UC-NRLF 


i   4   23b   7M? 


mjutmt  ©wtrai's  <©««. 

Coxgord,  Jtxr  2,  1830. 

|1,flVer>:N0Lffiterrecoiv'"g  a  C0I'V  of  this 
book,  will  bear  m  mind  (hat  ';  j,  tT 
property  of  the  State  of  New-Han 
J-}  and  that  he  will  be  heid  ciol£ 
We  for  ,ls  safe  keeping  and  deliver^, 
his  successor  in  office  * 

Aftt^Cltte 
"I'ed  to  one  copy  each  of  (his  work 

JOSEPH  LOW,  Aw.  GhA, 


ABSTRACT-    , 

OF 

INFANTRY     T  Ji  0  T I  €  IS  s 

INCLUDING 

EXERCISES  AND  MANOEUVRES 

OF 

LIGHT-INFANTRY  AND.  RIFLEMEN; 
for       . .         .,,.:.     >.        .      • 
THE    USE    OF    THE    MILITIA 

OF 

THE  UNITED  STATES. 


Published  by  the  Department  of  War,  under  the  Authority  of 
an  Act  of  Congress  of  the  2d  of  March,  1S29. 


BOSTON: 
HILLIARD,  GRAY,  LITTLE   AND  WILKIN8. 

Stereotyped  at  the  Boston  Type  and  Stereotype  Foundry. 

1S30. 


**■) 


HE)  M>t 

Us 
JfSO 

Extract  from  an  Act  providing  for  the  printing  and  bind 
ing  sixty  thousand  copies  of  the  abstract  of  infantry 
Tactics,  including  Manceuvbes  of  Light-Infantry  and 
Riflemen,  and  for  other  Purposes. 

Le  it  enacted  by  tJie.  Senate  and  House  of  Representatives  of  the  Uni- 
ted States  of  Amenta  in  Congress  assembled,  That  the  Secretary  of  W?r 
be,  and  he  is  hereby,  authorized  and  directed,  to  contract  with  Milliard, 
Gra  i-  am.  Co.  of  Boston,  or  some  other  person  or  persons,  for  printing,  bind- 
ing and  delivering,  ylxiy  thousand  copies  of  the  Abstract  of  Infantry  Tac- 
tics, including  Exercises  and  Manoeuvres  of  Light-Infantry  and  Riflemen, 
for  the  Use  of  the  Militia  of  the  United  States  ;  also,  five  thousand  copies 
of  a  System  of  Exercise  and  Instruction  of  Field-Artillery,  including  Ma- 
noeuvres for  Light  or  Horse- Artillery  ;  as  reported  by  the  Secretary  of  \\',<r, 
on  the  eighth  of  January,  eighteen  hundred  and  twenty-seven  ;  agreeably 
to  the  proposals  of  said  Hii  liard,Gray  and  Co.,  made  to  the  Secretary  of 
War,  dated  on  the  twenty-seventh  of  October,  eighteen  hundred  and  twenty- 
seven,  in  their  specimen  marked  B  :  and  when  so  printed,  bound  and  de- 
livered, the  Secretary  of  War  is  hereby  directed  to  apportion  the  same 
Mnong  the  several  Slates  and  Territories,  and  in  the  District  of  Columbia, 
for  the  use  of  the  Milui.i  vlu  reof,  according  to  the  number  of  the  Militia  in 
each  State  and  Territory  and  the  District  of  Columbia;  and  to  forward  to 
the  Chief;  Magis.r.ite  of  <;ach  State  and  Territory  the  number  allowed  to 
s.ich  Sd'ce  ard  Tc rrit.-ry  as  aforesaid,  to  be  by  said  Chief  Magistrate  dis- 
tributed among  the  officers  of  the  Militia  of  such  State  or  Territory,  for  their 
use,  and  the  use  of  their  successors  in  office,  under  such  rules  and  regula- 
tions as  they  may  direct.  And  the  Secretary  of  War  will  cause  the  num- 
ber of  copies  apportioned  to  the  District  of  Columbia  to  be  distributed  among 
the  officers  of  the  Militia  in  the  District,  under  such  rules  and  regulations 
as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  President  of  the  United  States. 

Approved  2d  of  March,  1829. 


NOTICE. 

HILLIARD,  GRAY  AND  CO.,  Boston,  will  supply 
States,  Booksellers,  and  others,  with  this  Work,  and  also 
the  System  of  Artillery  Exercise,  in  any  quantity,  on  the 
/nost  liberal  terms. 


Washington,  Dec.  5,  1826. 

Sir, 

THE  Board  of  Officers  assembled  at  this  place, 
under  your  orders  of  October  5,  1826,  for,  among  other  pur- 
poses, reporting  "A  System  of  Instruction  for  the  3IiJitia  In- 
fantry" have  now  the  honor  to  submit,  through  its  Recorder, 
(Lieutenant  Eakin,)  the  annexed  sheets. 

We  have  the  honor  to  be, 

Sir, 

With  high  respect, 

Your  most  ob't.  servants, 

WINF1ELD  SCOTT, 

Maj.  Gen.  and  President  of  the  Board 
T.  CADWALADER, 

Maj.  Gen.  Penn.  Militia- 
WM.  H.  SUMNER, 

Adj.  Gen.  of  Massachusetts. 
B.  DANIEL, 

Adj.  Gen.  Militia,.  North  Carolina. 
ABRM.  EUSTIS, 

Lieut.  Col.  4th  Artillery. 
Z.  TAYLOR, 

Lieut.  Col.  1st  Regt.  U.  S.  Infantry 
G.  CUTLER, 

Lieut.  Col.  3d  Infantry 
CHARLES  J.  NOURSE, 

U.  S.  A. 

To  the 

HON.  JAMES  BARBOUR, 

Secretary  of  War. 


■  3961 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


TO  secure  uniformity  of  instruction  and  practice  between 
the  infantry  of  the  militia  and  that  of  the  regular  army,  this 
Abstract,  both  in  its  principles  and  details,  is  .taken  from  the 
work  which  governs  the  regular  infantry.  The  form  of  the 
two  works  is  also  the  same. 

An  abridgment  of  the  larger  work  (which  is  indicated  in 
the  title  of  Abstract)  was  deemed,  however,  indispensable,  for 
general  circulation  in  the  militia  infantry.  Hence,  many  par- 
ticular paragraphs  have  been  suppressed  or  curtailed ;  some 
entire  articles  (the  titles  excepted)  omitted,  and  also  the  whole 
of  Section  V,  or  the  evolutions  of  many  battalions  in  the  same 
line.  These  omissions  and  curtailments  reduce  the  Abstract 
to  about  four-sevenths  of  the  prototype.  A  greater  reduction, 
for  officers,  and  particularly  for  field-officers,  was  considered 
unadvisablc. 

In  the  la-ger  book,  all  the  paragraphs,  from  the  beginning  to 
the  end,  are,  for  the  convenience  of  reference,  numbered  in 
one  unbroken  series.  The  same  numbers  are  retained  in  the 
Abstract  to  all  the  paragraphs  not  omitted,  in  order  to  afford 
the  means  of  internal  reference,  reference  to  the  larger  book, 
and  to  exhibit,  at  the  same  time,  the  places  of  the  several 
omissions.  The  Abstract,  however,  is  deemed  complete  with- 
in itself  fir  the  instruction  of  any  corps  less  than  a  brigade 


TABLE    OF    CONTENTS.         / 


SECTION  I.  Plge 

formation  of  a  Rogimsnt  of  Infantry  in  tho  Order  of  Battle  (or  Line)     .     .          ...  9 

Posts  of  Company  Officers,  and  Non-commissioned  Officers 9 

Posts  of  Field-Officers,  and  Regimental  Staff 10 

Posts  of  Drummers  and  Musicians 11" 

Posts  of  the  Colors  and  Color-Guard 11 

General  Instruction 12 

Instruction  of  Officers 12 

Instruction  of  Non-commissioned  Officers 12 


SECTION   II. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE   SOLDIER 13 

Division  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier ..........13 


PART  I. 

Lesson,].  Position  of  the  Soldier  without  Arms 14 

Eves  Right,  Eyes  Left 14 

2.  Facings 15 

3.  Principles  of  the  Ordinary  Step 15 

4.  Principles  of  the  Oblique  Step 16 


PART  II. 

Lesson  1.  Principles  of  Shouldered  Arms 17 

2.  Analysis  of  Loading  and  Firing,  and  of  the  Manual  Exercise 18 

3.  Loading  in  Quick  Time 20' 

Loading  in  Quickest  Time 20 

4.  Firings,  Direct  and  Oblique .     .  27 

Firing  by  File .28 


PART  III. 


Lesson  1.  Marching  to  the  Front ;  30 

2.  To  March  by  a  Flank        32 

3.  Alignment 3J 

4.  Wheelings ...  34 


SECTION  III. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE   COMPANY 30 

To  Rank,  Size,  and  Form  the  Company 30 

Division  of  the  School  of  the  Company 97 


LESSON  I. 


JMio1.}  1.  To  Open  Ranks 93 

2.  Alignment  of  Open  Ranks 3» 

3.  Manual  Exercise  and  Loadings 39 

4.  To  Close  Ranks 40 

5    Alignment  of  Closed  Ranks 40 

A*  5 


«'  CONTENTS. 

LESSON  II.  Pl5e. 

article  1.  To  Load  in  Quick  Time 41 

2.  To  Load  in  Quickest  Time 41 

3.  To  Fire  by  Company 41 

4.  To  Fire  by  File 42 

5.  To  File  to  tlie  Hear 42 


LESSON  III. 

Artichl.  To  Advance  in  Line 43 

2.  To  Halt  the  Company  Advancing  in  Line,  and  to  Align  it 44 

3.  Oblique  March  in  Line 45 

4.  To  Mark  Time,  March  in  QuickTime,  Side  Step,  Stepping  Short, and  Back 

Step 45 

5.  To  Retire  in  Line 46 

LESSON  IV. 

Article  I.  To  Marcli  by  a  Flank 46 

2.  To  Change  Direction  by  File 47 

3.  To  Halt  the  Company, "Marching  bv  a  Flank,  and  to  Front  it 47 

4.  To  Form  Line  by  File  on  the  Right  or  Left.  ' 47 

5.  The  Company  Marching  by  a  Flank,  to  Form  Company,  Platoons  or  Sec- 

tions, on  ths  March 46 

LESSON  V. 

Articlel.  To  Break  to  1  lie  Right  or  Left 50 

2.  To  Match  in  Column 51 

3.  To  Change  Direction  in  Column  at  Full  Distance 52 

4.  To  Halt  the  Column 53 

5.  To  Form. Line  to  the  Right  or  Left,  from  Column  at  Full  Distance.     ...  5-1 


LESSON  VI. 

Article  1.  Diminishing  and  Increasing  Front  by  Files 55 

2.  To  March  in  Column  by  the  Routo  Step,  and  to  execute  the  File  Movements 

prescribed  in  the  preceding  Article 5C 

3.  Diminishing  and  Increasing  Front  of  Columns,  by  Platoons  and  Sections      .  57 

4.  Corntermarch 59 

5.  To  Form  Line  on  the  Right  or  Loft,  from  Column  at  Full  Distance      ...  60 

Instructions  for  Firing  at  a  Target 61 

Manual  of  I  ho  Sergeants !>.> 

Sword  Manual  of  the  Officers    . 64 

Sword  Salute,  whether  in  or  out  of  the  Rinks,  Halting  or  Marching     ...  6-1 

Manual  of  the  Colors 65 

Instructions  for  the  Drum-Major 65 

Mode  of  Dismissing  Company' 66 


SECTION   IV. 


SCHOOL   OP   THE   BATT-aXVQJS- 66 

Prompt  Formation  of  the  Battalion ....     67 

Composition  and  March  of  the  Color-Escort .    .         .    .         .67 

Honors  Paid  to  the  Colors .     .  .  («J 


FART  I. 

Article  1.  To  Open  Ranks .......  W 

2.   Manual  Exercise,  and  Loading  in  Quick  Time C9 

3    Loading  in  Quickest  Time,  and  tho  Firings 09 

PAST  II. 

trOclt  1.  To  Break  to  the  Right  or  Left  [into  Open  Column] 71 

S    ro  File  to  the  Rear  into  Open  Colnmn TJ 

3  To  Fornr  Claw  Column  (or  Man)  from  Line li 

<•• 


CONTENTS.  T 

PART  HI.  p^ 

irtitlc  1.  Marcli  in  Column  at  Full  Distance 73 

2.  Column  of  Kouto 76 

3.  To  Change  Direction  in  Column  at  Full  Distance 77 

4.  Change  of  Direction  in  Column  at  Full  Distance-  by  the  Prompt  Manoeuvre. 

(Omiltodl       78 

5.  To  Halt  the  Column «[ 

fi.  To  Close  to  Half  Distance  from  Open  Column <9 

7.  To  March  in  Column  at  Half  Distance 8tt 

8.  To  Change  Direction  in  Column  at  Half  Distanco 80 

9.  To  Change  Direction  in  Close  Column.  (Omitted) 80 

10.  Countermarch £0 

11.  To  Form  Close  Column  of  Grand  Divisions,  from  a  Halted  Close  u-o'urcn  of 

Companies.  (Omitted; 80 


PART  IV. 

rf-ticlei.  Manner  of  Determining  the  Line 81 

2.  Different.  Methods  of  Forming  Line,  from  Column  at  Full  Distance      ...  82 

1st.     To  Form  Line  to  the  Left,  from  Column  at  Full  Distance,  Right  in 

Front 82 

Inversion 83 

-      2d.    To  Form  Line  on  the  Right,  from  Column,  Right  in  Front  ....  83 
'id.     To  Form  Line  to  the  Front,  from  Column  at  Full  Distance,  Right  in 

Front 8o 

ilk.    To  Form  Lino  faced  to  the  Rear,  from  Column  at  Full  Distance, 

Right  in  Front 86 

3.  Formation  in  Lino  by  two  Movements 88 

4.  Different  Methods  of  Forming  Line  from  Column  at  Half  Distance.     ...  88 

lsl.     To  Form  Line  to  the  Left,  from  Column  at  Half  Distance,  Right  in 
Front,  by  previously  taking  Wheeling  Distances  by  the  Head  of  the 

Column  " 88 

2d.     To  Form  Line  on  the  Right  or  Left,  from  Column  at  Half  Distance  .  89 

'Ad.    To  Form  Line  to  the  Front,  from  Column  at  Half  Distance  .     ...  89 

4th.     To  Form  Line,  faced  to  the  Rear,  i'rom  Column  at  Half  Distance      .  89 

5    Deployment  of  llie  Close  Column.  (Omitted) 89 

PART  V. 

Article  1.  To  Advance  in  Line S9 

2.  Fassago  of  Obstacles,  Advancing  or  Retiring  in  Line 93 

3.  To  Change  Direction  Marching  in  Line.  (Omitted) 95 

4.  Oblique  March  in  Line.  (Omitted) 95 

5.  To  Halt  the  Battalion  Advancing  1:1  Line,  and  to  Align  it 95 

C.  To  Retire  in  Line - 96 

7.  To  Halt  the  Battalion  Retiring  in  Line,  and  to  Front  it 97 

8.  To  March  by  a  Flank 97 

9.  To  Form  Line  by  File  on  the  Left  or  Ri^ht 98 

ID.  Passage  of  Lines 99 

11.  Change  of  Front 101 

12.  Passage  of  a  Defile,  in  Retiring,  from  either  Wing 104 

13.  Column  of  Attack.   (Omitted)    . 105 

14.  Dispositions  against  Cavalry.   (Omitted) .     .  105 

*             15.  Dispersing  and  Rallying 105 

School  of  the  Battalion  arranged  in  Lessons;  for  the  Exercise  of  a  Battalion    .     .     .     .105 


EXERCISES    JOJE    BfflAEJTOEUVaES    POR    LiaHT- 

mF.a.isrTinr  &sxn  riflemen iw 

COMPANY. 

Manual  Exercise 1°8 

To  Load  as  Riflemen 109 

To  Load  as  Light-Infantry 119 

Firings 11H 

To  Fire  and  Load,  Kneeling  and  Lying Ill 

File  Movements     ...          •     •     «     •     •  112 

To  March  bv  a  Flank,  to  the  Right  or  Left ;  to  Change  Direction,  Marching  by  a 

Flank  ;'to  Halt  the  Company,  Marching  by  a  Flauk  ;  to  Front  and  Align  it  .     .  112 

To  Advance  bv  Fil»s  from  the  Right  or  Left 112 

*To  Retire  by  File,  from  the  Right  or  Left 113 

To  Form  Single  File H3 

7 


8  CONTENTS. 

ftge. 

Fm-maticos  in  Line,  from  File .114 

To  the  Front .114 

On  the  Right  (or  Left) 114 

Faced  to  ilic  Hear .111 

To  Advance  by  Files  from  the  Centre .114 

.Advancing  by  Files  from  the  Centre,  to  Form  Line  to  Hie  Front 115 

Advancing  by  F'Jea  from  the  Centre,  to  Form  Line  on  cither  Flank  ....  .115 

To  Retire  by  Files  from  the  Centre 115 

Retiring  by  Files  from  the  Centre,  to  Form  Line,  faced  to  the  then  Rear 116 

Countermarch 116 

Change  of  Front   .  116 

To  Break  into  Column 116 

To  Resume  tl     Formation  in  Lino -.     ...     117 

To  the  Left 117 

On  the  Right  or  Left 117 

Diminishing  and  increasing  Front,  by  riatoons  and  Sections   .     .   -. 117 

Diminishing 117 

Increasing 118 

Column  of  Route 118 

To  Extend 118 

Supports  and  Reserves [No.  1732] 119 

To  Fire  in  Extended  Order 120 

Advancing 120 

Retiring 129 

Intervals  between  Ranks 121 

To  Cease  Firing 121 

To  Close 121 

To  Recall 122 

To  Halt 122 

To  Annul 122 

To  Incline 122 

To  Throw  forward  a  Flank 122 

Too  fast  (or  too  slow) 122 

Sign?  -g  (Bugle) 122 

Simple  Signals 122 

Combined  Signals 124 


BATTALION,  (Licht-Ixfaktey  and  Rule) 124 

To  Open  Ranks,  the  Alignment  of  Open  Ranks,  and  to  Close  the  Ranks 124 

Firings 124 

File  Movements 124 

To  March  to  the  Right  or  Left  Flank 124 

To  Change  Direction,  Marching  by  a  Flank 124 

To  Advance  by  the  Right  (or  Left)  of  Companies 124 

To  Retire  by  the  Right"  (or  Left)  of  Companies 125 

To  Advance  by  the  Centra  of  Companies  .    .    •.    , 125 

To  Retire  by  the  Centre  of  Companies 125 

Formations  in  Line,  from  File 125 

To  the  Front 125 

On  either  Flank,  or  at  any  Anglo  forward  of  the  Original  Line 126 

Faced  to  the  Rear  of  the  March,  retiring 126 

On  cither  Flank,  retiring,  at  any  Angle  in  Rear  of  the  Original  Line 127 

Different  Methods  of  funning  Open  Column 196 

To  Break  into  Column 123 

To  Pile  into  Column 12 

Bv  Filing  in  Front  or  Rear  of  the  Company,  on  either  Flank,  or  on  any  other  Company  128 

To  I'm  tin  ■"Column  in  March,  to  Change  Direction,  mid  to  Halt  it 129 

Closing  and  Opening  the  Cjlumn,  and  the  Countermarch 129 

[ethods  or  forming  Line  from  Column 129 

[\>  the  Left 199 

On  the  Right  or  Left 129 

Faced  to  the  Front  on  any  Company 130 

Faced  to  the  Rear  on  any  Company 131 

Changes  of  Front 132 

Forward  on  the  Right  (or  Loftl 132 

On  a  central  Company,  either  \Ving  forward 132 

To  tho  Rear,  on  either  Flank 133 

Column  of  Route 134 

To  Extend 135 

ToCloso 135 


PARADE   AND   REVIEW 135 


Plate  I. 


*H    I 


ft  Si 


M 


-5   1*1*1     II 


e  c  ^ 


o^.^a-s^  bee  =*■■ 
•S-if'^SM:  £  ~  S 
O  ^  •?  ^  O  «,  Co  O'oo 


EH 

I  i 

W 

m 


) 


\3 


^BDdBUO   ES    -° 


•  I 


2n 

... 

*  a 
■  a 

X 

i 

X 

sn 

\ 


ABSTRACT 


or 


INr^ITEY    TAOTICS, 


SECTION  I. 

Formation  of  a  Regiment  of  ■  Infantry  m,  the  Or/kr  of 
Battle  (or  Line.) 

3.  IN  the  manoeuvres,  regiments  will  be  denominated  battalions,  and  be 
numbered  from  right  to  left,  in  the  same  line. 

6.  The  companies  of  a  regiment  will  be  drawn  up  from  right  to  left,  as 
follows  :  1st,-  5th,  3d,  7th,  2d,  6th,  4th,  8th,  according  to  the  rank  of  the 
captains, 

7.  Nevertheless,  the  flank  companies  will  be  posted,  if  light-infantry  and 
rifle,  on  the  right  and  left  of  the  battalion  respectively. 

8.  The  companies  pasted  as  above  shall  be  renumbered  from  right  to 
left,  first,  second,  &c.  By  these  numbers  they  shall  be  known  in  the  man- 
oeuvres, and  the  flank  companies  singly  will  be  known  by  the  designation 
of  light-infantry,  or  riflemen. 

11.  The  colors  shall  be  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right  centre  battalion 
company  :  that  company,  with  all  on  its  right,  will  be  denominated  the 
right  wing  of  the  battalion,  and  the  remaining  companies  will  be  denomi- 
nated the  left  iving. 

12.  Every  company  will  be  divided  into  two  equal  platoons,  and  into  four 
equal  sections.  Platoons  and  sections  will  be  numbered  from  right  to  left, 
and  be  known  as  first  platoon,  &c,  first  section,  &.c. 

13.  The  order  of  formation,  or  of  depth,  shall  be  that  of  two  ranks,  and  a 
rank  of  file-closers. 

14.  The  manner  of  sizing  and  ranking  men  will  be  given  in  the  School 
of  the  Company. 

15.  The  distance  between  the  two  ranks,  whether  the  knapsacks  be  on 
or  oft",  shall  be  one  pace,  measured  from  the  heels  of  the  front  rank  to  the 
heels  of  th?  rear  rank. 

16.  The  rank  of  file-closers  shall  be  two  paces  from  the  rear  rank,  meas- 
ured in  like  manner. 

17.  For  manoeuvring,  the  companies  will  always  be  equalized  before 
they  are  divided  into  platoons  and  sections, by  assigning  overmen  from  the 
strongest  to  the  weakest  companies. 


Posts  of  Company  Officers  and  Non-commissioned  Offi- 
cers. 

13.  These,  exclusive  of  corporals,  may  (as  on  a  war  establishment,  with 
ranks  filled)  be  ten  in  number:  1.  Captain;  2.  First  lieutenant;  3.  Second 
lieutenant;  4.  Third  lieutenant;  5.  Ensign;  6.  First  sergeant;  7.  Second 
sergeant:  8.  Third  sergeant;  9.  Fourth  sergeant;  10.  Fifth  sergeant. 

19.  When  the  whole  ten  are  under  arms  with  the  company,  they  will 
be  posted  js  follows : 

20.  No   1,  in  the  front  rank,  on  the  right  of  th  3  company. 

11 


10  FORMATION   OF   A   BATTALION    IN 

21.  ?  o.  6,  in  tlie  rear  rank,  covering  No.  1.  In  the  evolutions,  No.  6 
(firrt  sergeant)  is  sometimes  denominated  covering  sergeant,  and  sometimes 
guide  of  the  right  of  the  company. 

22.  Nos.  2  and  7  of  the  left  company  of  the  battalion  line  shall  be  posted 
on  its  left,  No.  2  in  (lie  front  rank,  covered  by  No.  7  in  the  rear  rank. 

23.  The  remaining  officers  and  sergeants  shall  constitute  the  rank  of 
file-closers,  and  be  posted  as  follows: 

24.  No.  2,  except  in  the  left  company,  covering  the  centre  of  the  fourth 
sccticn.  ' 

25.  No.  3,  covering  the  centre  of  the  second  section. 

26.  No.  4,  covering  the  centre  of  the  third  section. 

27.  No.  5,  covering  the  centre  of  the  first  section. 

23.  No.  7,  except  in  the  left  company,  covering  the  second  fiic   fr*m 
the  le$  bf*.the  fourth   sec/ion.     No.  7,  (second  sergeant.)   in  every  com- 
pany, wiSlj  in  the  cvo!ut;<?ri3,.be  denominated  guide  of  the  left  of  the  com- 
pany. 
'-.'•)    K ...  -ond  file  from  the  left  of  the  second  sec- 

lion. 

80.  No.  9,  covering  the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the  third  sec- 
tion. 

81.  No.  10,  covering  the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the  first  section. 

32.  File-closers  will  not  be  suffered  to  consider  themselves  a  mere  orna- 
ment to  the  rear.  They  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  alignment  of  the 
rear  rank  particularly,  judging  by  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders,  and  the 
touch  of  the  elbow  in  that  rank.  In  battle,  the  arms  of  file-closers  are  best 
employed  in  preventing  the  ranks  from  breaking  to  the  rear. 

33.  Absent  officers  and  sergeants  v.  ill  be  replaced — officers  by  sergeants, 
and  sergeants  by  corporals,  according  to  rank,  to  the  number  seven.  The 
seven  will  then  occupy,  according  to  rank,  the  places  of  Nos.  I,  2,  3,  4,  5, 
6,  and  7,  as  above. 

34.  Bat,  when  companies  are  reduced  to  a  narrow  front  by  service,  or 
as  on  a  peace  establishment,  it  will  be  sufficient  if  the  posts  of  Nos.  1,  2, 
3,  6,  and  7,  be  filled,  by  replacing,  as  above. 

35.  The  first  and  second  non-commissioned  officers  in  rank  present  will 
always,  unless  it  be  specially  ordered  otherwise,  occupy  the  posts  of  Nos. 
6  and  7  respectively. 

37.  The  corporals,  other  than  those  of  the  color-guard,  belong  to  the 
rank  and  file  of  companies,  and  shall  be  posted  in  the  front  rank  in  the  fol- 
lowing order:  one  on  the  right,  and  one  on  the  loft  of  the  company;  one 
on  the  right  of  the  second  platoon;  one  on  the  right  of  the  second,  and 
one  on  the  right  of  the  fourth  section,  and  one  on  the  left  of  the  first  pla- 
toon. 


Posts  of  the  Field- Officers  and  Staff. 

38.  The  field-officers,  (colonel,   lieutenant-colonel,  and   major.)    are 
supposed  to  be  mounted ;  and  on  actual  service  they  shall  be  so.     The  ad- 
hen  the  battalion  is  undergoing  elementary  instruction,  shall  be 

on  foot. 

39.  The  colonel  shall  bo  posted  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  rank  of  file- 
closers,  and  opposite  to  the  centre  of  the  battalion. 

10.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  the  major,  the  adjutant  and  sergeant-major 
will  all  be  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

1 1 .  The  lieutenant-colonel  shall  be  opposite  to  the  centre  of  the  right 
wing;  the  major  shall  be  opposite  to  the  centre  of  the  left  wing  ;  the  adju- 
tant shall  be  opposite  to  the  right,  and  the  sergeant-major  opposite  to  the 
left  of  the  battalion.  The  adjutant  shall  aid  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and  the 
sergeant-major  shall  aid  the  major,  in  the  performance  of  their  respective 
duties  in  the  evolutions. 

12 


THE   ORDER  OF   BATTLE  OR   LINK.  11 

42.  Hence,  the  adjutant  and  sergeant-major  are  not  always  named  in  the 
evolutions,  it  being  understood  that  the  smaller  duties,  (and  those  requiring 
the  officer  to  be  on  foot,)  referred  to  the  lieutenant-colonel,  may  he  per- 
formed by  the  adjutant,  and  the  same  thing  in  respect  to  the  major  and  ser- 
geant-major, the  assistants  being  on  foot,  and  under  the  superintendence  of 
the  principals. 

43.  The  colonel  being  absent,  he  would  be  replaced  by  the  lieutenant- 
colonel,  and  the  lieutenant-colonel  by  the  major.  All  the  field-officers 
being  absent,  the  battalion  would  be  commanded  by  the  senior  captain ; 
but  if  one  field-officer  be  present,  he  would  perform  all  the  duties,  as  far 
as  practicable,  of  the  three,  without  (except  in  extraordinary  cases)  calling 
to  his  aid  the  senior  captain  to  act  as  field-officer. 

44.  The  quarter-master,  surgeon  and  his- assistant,  drawn  up  from  right 
to  left,  in  the  order  in  which  they  are  mentioned,  shall  be  posted  or,  ihe  left 
of  the  colonel,  three  paces  in  his  rear. 

45.  The  quarter-master-sergeant  shall  be  posted  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the 
rank  of  file-closers,  and  opposite  to  the  right  of  the  color-company. 


Posts  of  the  Drummers  and  Musicians. 

46'.  The  field  music  will  be  formed  in  two  ranks,  the  drummers  in  the 
rear.  They  will  be  placed  ten  paces  in  rear  of  the  rank  of  file-closers, 
opposite  the  left  of  the  left  centre  company.  In  a  company  detached,  tho 
music  will  be  placed  on  the  right  of  both  ranks,  the  drummer  in  the  rear 

47.  The  senior  principal  musician  shall  be  in  front,  and  the  junior  on  the 
right  of  the  whole.  Should  there  be  a  band,  the  latter  will  be  posted  two 
paces  in  front  of  its  centre. 

48.  When  there  is  a  band,  it  will  be  placed  in  several  ranks,  according  'o 
its  numbers,  and  three  paces  in  rear  of  the  drummers. 


Posts  of  the  Pioneers. 

(Omitted.) 

Posts  of  Colors  and  Color-guard. 

51.  The  state  and  regimental  colors  shall  be  borne  by  two  sergeants, 
the  former  on  the  right. 

52.  The.  color-guard  shall  consist  of  three  corporals,  to  be  selected  by 
the  colonel,  from  the  battalion  companies. 

53.  The  colors*  and  their  guard  shall  be  posted  on  the  left  of  the  right 
centre  company,  and  will  constitute  a  part  of  that  company. 

54.  The  color-bearers*  shall  be  placed  in  the  front  rank  with  a  color- 
sergeant  between  them.  The  three  corporals  shall  be  placed  covering 
them  in  the  second  rank. 

55.  The  color-guard  must  be  distinguished  for  regularity,  perfect  appear- 
ance under  arms,  and  marching. 

56.  The  color-bearers  and  the  color-sergeant,  placed  between  them, 
shall  be  selected  by  the  colonel. 

57.  It  is  of  the  utmost  importance,  in  marching  in  order  of  battle,  (or 
line,)  that  the  color-sergeant  should  be  thoroughly  habituated  to  preserve 
the  precise  length  and  cadence  of  step  ;  and,  in  his  own  person,  to  prolong 
a  given  direction,  without  deviation. 

58.  The  corporals  of  the  color-guard,  and  all  sergeants,  shall  carry  their 
arms  as  will  herein-after  be  prescribed.   (See  Nos.  758, -&c,  and  No.  776.) 

*  If  there  be  but  one  color  with  the  battalion,  then  for  color-sergeant,  throughout  this 
Abstract,  read  color-bearer,  and  omit  color-bearers,  whose  places  wouldvbe  occupied  by 
two  corporals.  The  color-bearer  and  the  two  corporals  would  then  constitute  the  celer 
rank.    \See  Nos.  1282,  1286,  &c,  &c.) 

B  -  13 


GENERAL   INSTRUCTION. 


General  Instruction. 

5ft.   The  colonel  will  be  responsible  for  the  instruction  of  hie  regiment. 

60  The  field-officers  in  their  respective  wings  shall,  with  the  assistance 
of  the  adjutant,  instruct  the  company-officers  in  the  Schools  of  the  Soldier, 
Company  and  Battalion. 

61.  The  captain  shall  instruct  those  under  his  command  in  the  Schools  of 
the  Soldier  and  Company.  In  the  instruction  of  his  non-commissioned  offi- 
cers and  privates,  he  shall  be  aided  by  his  subalterns. 

62.  The  colonel  is  responsible  that  no  person  be  allowed  to  instruct  in  his 
regiment  who  is  not  qualified  for  that  duty.  The  other  field-officers  have 
a  similar  responsibility  with  respect  to  those  below  them.  The  captains 
and  subalterns  have  a  similar  responsibility  in  respect  to  their  companies; 
and  in  no  case  shall  a  non-commissioned  officer  be  allowed  to  instruct  men, 
even  in  the  School  of  the  Soldier,  when  the  number  of  recruits  does  not 
render  it  absolutely  necessary,  without  being  specially  superintended, 
throughout,  by  an  officer. 

63.  The  use  of  music  or  the  drum,  in  instruction,  or  to  regulate  the  time 
of  inarch  of  troops  in  movement,  is  positively  forbidden;  and  in  marches  of 
parade,  where  the  music  is  allowed  to  play,  it  must  scrupulously  observe  the 
ordered  times  of  march,  whether  ordinary  or  quick,  and  use  no  times  bui 
such  as  are  particularly  adapted  to  such  rates  of  march.  The  drums  and 
fifes  are  to  be  trained  to  such  habit,  and  the  leader  is  not  to  be  allowed  to 
trust  to  his  own  ear,  or  apprehension,  but  always  .to  have  a  plummet,  and 
to  make  frequent  use  of  it,  in  order  to  preserve  the  correct  time.  When 
the  battalion  is  not  in  movement,  as  on  the  parade,  or  on  other  occasions 
whsn  the  music  is  ordered,  or  allowed  to  play,  there  is  no  necessity  for  its 
being  confined  to  the  preceding  rule. 

64.  In  instruction,  and  in  the  exercise  cf  a  battalion,  five  or  six  strong 
strokes  on  the  drum,  given  in  the  exact  times  of  the  swing  of  the  plummet, 
and  just  before  the  word  march  is  pronounced,  cannot  fail  of  confirming  the 
measure  of  time  on  every  mind,  and  transferring  it  to  the  step. 


Instruction  of  Officers. 

65.  The  instruction  of  officers  includes  what  is  taught  under  the  three 
heads,  the  School  of  the  Soldier,  that  of  the  Company,  and  that  of  the  Bat- 
talion. It  cannot  be  completely  established,  without  joining  theory  to 
practice. 

66".  In  conformity  to  this,  the  colonel  of  each  battalion  will,  frequently, 
assemble  the  officers  at  his  own  quarters,  in  order  to  explain,  or  cause  to 
be  explained  to  them,  the  principles  on  which  are  founded  these  three 
schools. 

67.  No  officer  shall  be  deemed  instructed,  until  he  shall  be  capable  of 
perfectly  explaining  the  three  schools  above  mentioned. 

68.  The  officers  shall  be  frequently  exercised  by  the  field-officers  in 
marching,  and  the  utmost  pains  must  be  bestowed  in  giving  thein  an  accu- 
rate position  under  arms;  in  teaching  them  to  form  regularly,  and  to  ob- 
serve the  exact  length  and  cadence  of  the  step. 


Instruction  of  Non-commissioned  Officers. 

69.  The  instruction  of  :hcse  shall  comprehend  the  School  of  the  Soldier, 
and  that  of  the  Company;  they  shall  be  required  to  possess  an  accurate 
knowledge  of  tbo  exercise  and  use  of  their  firelocks,  of  the  manual  exercise 
of  the  soldic,  and  of  the  firings  and  marchings. 

70.  The  field-officers  and  adjutant  shall  frequently  assemble  the  nou- 
corerni/sioned  officer*,  Hotb  lor  practical  anc'  'rooretieal  instruction,  und 

14 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER.  13 

shall  carefully  observe  whether  they  are  properly  instructed  by  their  com- 
pany officers.  The  sergeant-major  will  assist  in  the  instruction  of  the  ser- 
geants and  corporals. 

71.  When  promotions  take  place  among  the  non-commissioned  officers, 
the  first  sergeants  shall  be  required  to  instruct  the  new  sergeants  and  cor- 
porals.    The  captains  will  be  responsible  that  this  is  done. 

72.  The  colonels  will  cause  the  color-rank,  color-guard,  and  general 
guides  (see  No.  960)  to  be  frequently  exercised  in  marching  in  line. 

73.  The  most  scrupulous  attention  must  he  paid  by  the  colonel  in  causing 
the  color-sergeant  to  acquire  the  habit  of  prolonging,  without  variation,  a 
given  direction,  and  of  maintaining,  with  the  utmost  precision,  the  length 
as  well  as  the  cadence  of  the  step. 


SECTION  II. 
SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER. 

74.  THIS  school,  which  has  for  its  object  the  instruction  of  soldiers,  hav 
ing  an  influence  on,  and  being  intimately  connected  with,  the  instruction 
of  companies,  on  which  depends  that  of  the  battalion,  ought  to  be  establish- 
ed and  inculcated,  with  the  utmost  care  and  attention. 

Division  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier. 

75.  The  School  of  the  Soldier  shall  be  divided  into  three  parts.  The  first 
will  include  all  that  ought  to  be  taught  without  arms. 

76.  The  second  will  include  the  analysis  of  the  manual  exercise,  and  of 
the  loadings  and  firings. 

77.  The  third  will  comprehend  the  different  steps,  the  principles  of 
marching  to  the  front  and  to  a  flank,  alignments,  wheelings  and  changes  of 
direction. 

78.  Each  part  shall  be  divided  into  lessons,  as  follows  : 

Part  First. 

r  ,     (  Position  of  the  soldier  without  arms. 

Lesson  l.  £  Motion  of  the  head  to  the  right  and  left. 

Lesson  2.  Facings. 

Lesson  S.  Principles  of  the  ordinary  step. 

Lesson  4.  Principles  of  the  oblique  step. 


Part  Second. 


Lesson  1.  Principles  of  shouldered  arms. 

Lesson  2.  The  analysis  of  loading  and  firing,  and  of  the  manual  exercise. 

Lesson  3.  Loading  in  quick,  and  quickest  time. 

Part  Third. 
Lesson  1.  The  union  of  from  six  to  ten  men,  in  order  to  march  to  (he 
front ;  and  practising  the  different  steps. 
Lesson  2.  To  march  by  a  flank. 
Lesson  S.  Principles  of  alignment. 
Lesson  4.  Principles  of  wheeling  and  changes  of  direction. 

79.  Each  lesson  shall  be  followed  by  observations,  demonstrating  the 
utility  of  the  principles,  which  shall  have  been  prescribed.     The  instruc- 


14  SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER— PART   I. 

tei  cannot  study  them  too  much,  nor  he  too  particular  in  their  ap^liei- 
tion. 

80.  Commands  shall  he  always  animated  and  loud,  in  proportion  to  the 
number  of  recruits  at  exercise. 

81.  There  shall  be  two  sorts  of  commands,  viz.  those  of  caution  and 
those  of  EXECUTION. 

82.  The  words  of  caution,  which  are  in  these  regulations  printed  in 
Italics,  must  he  distinctly  pronounced  in  a  full  voice,  dwelling  a  little  on 
the  last  syllable. 

83.  The  commands  of  execution  will  be  distinguished  by  capitals. 
and  shall  be  pronounced  with  a  firm,  quick  tone. 

84.  Those  commands,  the  expression  of  which  shall  be  separated  by 
dashes,  will  be  divided  in  pronouncing  them. 

85.  The  instructers  will  always  explain  what  they  teach,  in  few  words, 
clearly  and  distinctly.  They  shall,  themselves,  always  execute  what  they 
command,  in  order  thus  to  exemplify  the  principle  they  are  explaining. 
They  will  endeavor  to  accustom  the  recruit  to  assume  the  proper  position, 
and  will  not  place  him  in  it  till  his  want  of  comprehension  shall  oblige  them 
so  to  do. 


PART  I. 

86.  The  first  part  of  the  School  of  the  Soldier  shall  be  taught  to  squads 
of  three  or  four  men,  when  the  number  of  instructers  will  permit :  they 
will  be  placed  in  one  rank,  without  arms,  one  pace  from  each  other. 


LESSON  I. 
Position  of  the  Soldier. 


87.  [PI.  III.  Fig.  1.)  The  heels  on  the  same  line,  as  near  each  other  as 
the  conformation  of  the  man  will  permit;  the  feet  forming  with  each  other 
an  angle  something  less  than  a  right  one,  and  turned  out  equally;  the 
knees  straight,  but  not  stiff';  the  body  perpendicular  on  the  haunches,  and 
inclining  a  little  forward  ;  the  shoulders  kept  back  and  falling  equally ;  the 
arms  hanging  naturally  ;  the  elbows  near  the  body  ;  the  palm  of  the  hand 
turned  a  little  to  the  front,  the  little  finger  back,  and  touching  the  seam  of 
the  pantaloons;  the  face  well  to  the  front :  the  chin  a  little  drawn  in,  with- 
out constraint ;  and  the  eyes  cast  on  the  ground,  at  the  distance  of  fifteen 
paces.  

Remarks  on  the  Position  of  the  Soldier. 

(Omission.) 
93.  The   instructer,  having  established  the  position,  shall  teach  the  ro- 
cruit  the  motions  of  the  head,  to  the  right  and  left  by  the  commands, 
1.  Eyes — right.     2.  Front. 

99.  At  the  conclusion  of  the  second  part  of  the  first  command,  the  soldier 
will  turn  his  head  to  the  right,  hut  not  suddenly,  so  that  the  corner  of  the 
left  eye,  nearest  the  nose,  shall  be  in  a  line  with  the  buttons  of  the  coat, 
his  eyes  being  fixed  in  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  of  the  rank  he 
stands  in. 

100.  At  the  second  command,  the  head  resumes  its  habitual  position  to 
the  front. 

101.  The  motion  of  Eye*— LEFT,  will  be  executed  by  inverse  means. 
lt»2.  The  instructor  shall  take  care  that  the  motion  of  the  head  may  not 

alter  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders,  which  might  happen  if  the  motion 
were  too  sudden. 
16 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER— PART   I.  i«S 

103.  When  the  instructer  wishes  the  squad  to  rest,  he  Trill  co  nmand, 

Rest. 

104.  At  this  command,  the  soldier  will  not  be  required  to  maintain,  oiiher 
his  position  or  steadiness  ;  but  his  left  heel  shall  not  r/Jt  it?  plac?. 

105.  The  instructor,  to  make  the  squad  resume  its  position,  Trill  nom- 
naand, 

1.  Attention.    2.  Squad. 

106.  At  the  first  word,  the  soldier  will  fix  his  attention;  at  the  :„cond, 
he  will  resume  the  prescribed  position  And  steadiness. 


LESSON  II. 

Facings. 

107.  In  going  through  the  facings,  from  a  halt,  the  left  heel  never  quits 
the  ground. 

108.  To  execute  the  face  to  a  flank,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.  Squad.     2.  Right  (or  left)— face. 

109.  One  Motion.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruits  will  turn  on 
flie  left  heel,  and,  at  the  same  time,  carry  the  right  heel  to  the  side  of  the 
left,  placing  it  on  the  same  line.  This  line  will  be  exactly  at  right  argles 
with  that  previously  occupied  by  the  heels. 

112.  To  make  a  full  face  to  the  rear,  the  command  will  be, 

1.  Squad.     2.  About — face. 

113.  First  Motion.  At  the  word  ./f  &ouf ,  make  a  half  face  to  the  right ; 
slip  the  right  foot  to  the  rear,  the  hollow  opposite  to,  and  full  three  inches 
from,  the  heel ;  seize,  at  the  same  times  the*  cartridge-box  by  the  corner 
with  the  right  hand. 

114.  Second  Motion.  At  the  word  face,  turn  on  the  two  heels,  raid- 
ing a  little  the  toes,  the  hams  straight,  and  face  to  the  rear ;  bring, .at 
the  same  time,  the  right  heel  to  the  side  of  the  left,  and  let  go  the  cartridge- 
box. 

118.  To  face  to  the  left  about,  is  deemed  useless,  as  the  same  front  can 
always  he  gained  by  facing  to  the  right  about. 

119.  With  firelocks,  in  the  first  motion  of  facing  to  the  right  about,  each 
man  will  turn  the  firelock  with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  to  the  front,  and  re- 
place it  in  the  position  of  carry  (or  shoulder)  arms,  at  the  instant  of  bring- 
ing the  right  heel  by  the  side  of  the  left. 

120.  The  instructer  will  take  great  care  that  the  motions  in  this  lessor- 
do  not  derange  the  position  of  the  body,  which  ought  to  remain  thrown  for- 
ward. He  will  also,  frequently,  after  the  command  Right  (or  left) — face, 
give  the  command, 

Front. 

121.  At  this,  the  squad  shall  face  back  to  its  proper  front,  by  the  left,  if 
it  had  last  faced  to  the  right ;  and  by  the  right,  if  it  had  last  faced  to  the 
left ;  but  a  full  face  from  the  rear  to  the  proper  front  shall  be  preceded  by 
the  command,  About — face. 


LESSON  III. 

Principles  of  the  Ordinary  Step. 

132.  The  length  of  the  ordinary  step  shall  be  twenty-eight  inches, 
reckcn< :  *g  iiCai  he?l  *°  ^oe^ »  an(*  ninety  of  these  paces  shall  be  taken  hi  n 
minute 


16  SCHOOL  OF   THE   SOLDIER— PART   I. 

133.  The  instructer,  seeing  the  recruit  confirmed  in  his  position,  shall 
explain  to  him  the  principles  and  mechanism  of  the  step,  by  placing  him- 
self three  or  four  paces  in  front  of,  and  facing  the  recruit,  and  by  showing 
him,  slowly,  the  mode  of  executing  the  step,  thus  exemplifying  the  prin- 
ciples he  is  explaining.     He  will  command, 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

134.  (PI.  III.  Fig.  2.)  At  the  first  word,  the  recruit  shall  throw  the 
weight  of  the  body  on  the  right  leg. 

135.  At  the  second,  he  will  smartly  throw  forward  the  left  foot  twenty- 
eight  inches,  without  a  jerk,  the  ham  straight,  the  toes  pointing  a  little 
downwards,  and,  as  well  as  the  knee,  turned  slightly  out.  He  will,  at  the 
same  time,  throw  forward  the  weight  of  the  body,  and,  without  stamping, 
will  plant  the  foot  flat,  precisely  at  the  distance  prescribed  from  the  right 
foot,  the  whole  weight  of  the  body  resting  on  the  foot  which  comes  to  the 
ground.  The  recruit  shall,  smartly,  but  without  a  jerk,  pass  the  right  foot 
to  the  front,  near  the  ground,  and  will  plant  it  at  the  same  distance,  and  in 
the  same  manner,  as  has  been  explained  for  the  left  foot.  He  will  march 
in  this  manner,  keeping  the  shoulders  square,  and  the  head  direct  to  the 
front. 

136.  When  tho  instructer  wishes  the  squad  to  halt,  he  will  command, 

1.   Squad.     2.  Halt. 

137.  At  the  second  word,  let  the  rear  foot  be  brought  up  to  the  side  of 
the  other. 

Remarks  on  the  Principles  of  the  Step. 

(Omission.) 

146.  The  instructer  will  explain  to  the  recruit,  occasionally,  the  cadence 
of  the  step,  by  giving  the  words  one-and  two,  when  the  feet  ought  to  be 
respectively  planted  on  the  ground,  observing  that  ninety  cadenced  steps 
are  taken  in  a  minute. 


LESSON  IV. 
Principles  of  the  Oblique  Step. 

147.  This  step  will  be  in  common  time. 

149.  (PI.  II.  Fig.  1.)  The  recruit  being  steady  in  his  rank,  the  instruc- 
tor will  make  him  step  off  with  the  right  foot,  to  the  right  and  front,  ob- 
liquely, and  shall  make  him  plant  it  twenty-six  inches  from  the  left ;  ob- 
serving to  make  him  turn  the  point  of  the  right  foot  a  little  inwards,  to 
prevent  the  throwing  forward  the  left  shoulder.  The  recruit  will  rest  in 
this  position. 

150.  At  the  word  two,  by  the  instructer,  the  recruit  shall  advance  his 
left  foot  over  the  shortest  line,  and  plant  it  eighteen  inches  in  front  of  the 
right  heel.     He  will  rest  in  this  position. 

151.  He  will  continue  to  march  in  this  manner,  at  the  words  one  and 
two,  stopping  at  each  step,  and  paying  the  greatest  attention  to  keeping  the 
shoulders  square,  and  the  head  direct  to  the  front. 

152.  The  oblique  step  to  the  left  shall  be  executed  on  the  same  princi- 
ples, the  recruit  stepping  off  with  the  left  foot. 

15::.  Alter  some  lessons  of  this  kind,  the  recruit  shall  oblique  tt  the  right 
and  left,  without  dwelling  ou  the  step,  as  follows  : 

164.  The  recruit  marching  to  the  front,  in  common  time,  the  instructer 
wUJ  command, 

1.  Right  oblique.    2.  Mabch. 
IS 


Plate  II. 


School  of  the  Soldier. 


Pig.  1. 


^ 


T^" 


JSP 


8      8      8      8      8 

'~Q=S 923~ —g^^ "-q^- -g^- 


FIG.  2- 


8      8      6      8 

^ — .g™. — — 


19 


Plate  III. 


School  of  the  Soldier. 


Plate  III.  continued. 


School  of  the  Soldier. 


SCHOOL   OF    THE   SOLDIER  -PART   II.  17 

155.  At  the  second  word,  which  shall  be  given  at  the  instant  when  the 
left  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  recruit  shall  commence  tie  oblique 
step  to  the.  right,  observing  to  conform  to  tbe  above  directions  relative  to 
the  execution  and  length  of  the  step,  and  squareness  of  the  shoulders  to 
the  front,  but  without  stopping  at  each  step.  He  will  thus  march  on  at 
the  prescribed  rate  of  ninety  paces  in  a  minute. 

156.  Obliquing  to  the  left  shall  be  executed  on  the  same  principles ;  the 
instructer  giving  the  word  March,  at  the  instant  when  the  right  foot 
comes  to  the  ground. 

157    To  resume  the  inarch  to  the  front,  the  instructer  will  command, 
1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

15S.  At  the  second  word,  which  shall  he  given*  when  either  foot  is  corn- 
ing to  the  ground,  the  recruit  shall  resume  the  march  to  the  front,  and  the 
ordinary  step  of  twenty-eight  inches. 


Remarks  on  the  Oblique  Step. 

(Omitted.) 


General  Remarks  on  the  Direct  and  Oblique  Steps. 

162.  To  ascertain  whether  the  position  of  the  body  conform  to  the  prin- 
ciples prescribed;  whether  the  step  be  regularly  formed;  and  whether  the 
weight  of  the  body  rest  on  the  foot  which  is  on  the  ground  ;  the  instructor 
shall  frequently  post  himself  from  ten  to  twelve  paces  in  front,  facing  the 
recruits.  If  he  do  not  perceive  the  sole  of  the  shoe,  when  they  raise  and 
plant  the  foot;  and  if  he  observe  no  waving  of  the  upper  part  of  the  body, 
he  may  rest  assured  that  the  principles  arc  properly  observed. 

163.  When  the  principles  of  the  step  are  shown  to  three  or  four  men  at 
a  time,  accurate  dressing  need  not  be  required,  as  that  might  divide  their 
attention  ;  besides,  when  they  have  acquired  the  habit  of  taking  the  ca- 
denced  step,  they  will  have  learnt  the  true  means  of  preserving  the  align- 
ment. 


PART  II. 
Shouldered  Arms. 


165.  The  instructer  shall  not  pass  the  recruits  to  this  Second  Fart  of  the 
School  of  the  Soldier,  until  they  arc  perfectly  confirmed  in  the  position  of 
the  body,  and  in  the  execution  "of  the  direct  and  oblique  steps. 

166.  The  instructor  shall  then  place  four  men  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  el- 
bow, and  shall  instruct  them  to  hold  their  arms,  at  a  shoulder,  as  follows : 


Principles  of  Shoiddercd  Arms. 

167.  The.  recruit  being  placed,  as  directed  in  the  first  lesson  of  the  First 
Part,  the  instructor,  will  make  him  raise  and  turn  up  the  left  hand,  without 
bending  the  wrist,  ftie  fore  arm  only  acting.  _  The  instructer  will  then  raise 
the  musket  perpendicularly,  and  place  it  as  follows  : 

(PI.  III.  Fig.  1.)  The  musket  in  the  left  hand,  the  arm  being  a  little 
bent ;  the  elbow  back,  and  joined  to  the  body  without  pressure  ;  the  palm 
of  the  hand  firmly  against  the  exterior  rounding  of  the  butt ;  tbe  exterior 
edge  of  the  butt  resting  on  the  joints  of  the  fingers  next  the  palm  ;  the  heel 
Oi  the  butt  iesting  between  the  first  and  second  fingers;  the  thumb  above, 
in  front ;  the  thir  1  and  little  fingers  under  the  butt,  which  must  be  more  or 
C  25 


18  SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER— PART   II. 

less  k*>pt  back,  according  to  the  conformation  of  the  recruit,  in  such  man- 
ner that  the  firelock,  seen  from  the  front,  may  rest  always  perpendicular, 
and  that  the  movement  of  the  thigh,  in  marching,  may  not  derange  it  in  its 
perpendicular  position  ;  the  ramrod  against  the  hollow  of  the  shoulder  ;  the 
right  arm  hanging  naturally,  as  in  No.  87. 


Remarks  on  Shouldered  Arms. 

(Omission.) 
172.  The  instructer,  previously  to  proceeding  to  the  second   lesson, 
shall  make  the  recruits,  at  shouldered  arms,  practise   the  motions  of  eyes 
right,  eyes  left,  and  also  the  facings  to  the  right,  to  the  left,  and  to  the 
right-about. 


LESSON  II. 

The  Analysis  of  Loading  and  Firing,  and  of  the  Manual 
Exercise. 

173.  This  shall  be  taught  to  four  men  in  a  rank,  "elbow  to  elbow,  and  to 
the  same  afterwards  in  two  files. 

174.  The  execution  of  each  command  shall  be  divided  into  distinct  mo- 
tions, that  the  recruit  may  the  better  understand  its  mechanism. 

175.  At  the  last  syllable  of  the  command,  the  recruit  shall  execute  the 
first  motion  smartly.  At  the  words  two  and  three,  the  other  motion?  shall 
be  executed.  When  the  recruits  shall  know  thoroughly  the  position  of 
each  motion  of  a  command,  they  will  be  instructed  how  to  execute  the 
commands  without  dwelling  on  each  motion  separately ;  but  they  must  ob- 
serve the  mechanism  of  the  motions,  the  better  to  confirm  them  in  the  use 
of  the  firelock. 

176.  This  lesson  shall  be  taught  in  the  following  order  : — The  instructer 
will  command, 

Load  by  twelve  conunands. 
1.  Load. 

177.  First  Motion".  (PL  III.  Fig.  3.)  Half  face  to  the  right,  on  the 
left  heel,  placing  at  the  same  time  the  right  foot  square  behind  the  left 
heel,  the  hollow  of  the  foot  resting  against  that  heel ;  turn  the  firelock, 
with  the  left  hand,  the  lock  outward's,  at  the  same  time  seizing  the  small 
of  the  stock  with  the  right  hand,  the  firelock  being  detached  from  the 
shoulder,  and  supported  perpendicularly  on  the  palm  of  the  left  hand  re- 
maining under  the  butt. 

178.  Second  Motion.  With  the  right  hand  bring  down  the  firelock 
into  the  left,  which  receives  it  at  the  swell,  the  thumb  extended,  the  butt 
under  the  right  fore  arm,  the  small  resting  against  the  body  under  the  right 
breast;  the  muzzle  as  high  as  the  eyes  ;  the  guard  turned  a  little  outward, 
the  left  elbow  supported  on  the  side  of  the  haunch  ;  the  thumb  of  the 
right  hand  will  be  placed  against  the  hammer  above  the  Hint,  at  the  mo- 
ment the  firelock  is  thrown  into  the  left  hand;  the  four  fingers  of  the 
right  hand  shut,  the  right  fore  arm  along  the  btiti. 

2.   Open — pan. 

179.  One  Motion.  Throw  open  the  pan  with  the  thumb  of  the  right 
hand,  the  left  hand  holding  the  piece  firmly  ;  draw  bnck  the  right  elbow  ; 
carry  the  hand  to  the  rear,  passing  it  between  the  butt  and  body,  and 
open  the  cartridge-box. 

3.  Handle — cartridge. 

180.  One  Motion.     Take  the  cartridge  with  the  thumb  and  two  first 

2C 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER— PART    II.  19 

fingers     place  it  between  the  teeth,  the  right  hand  passing  between  the 
body  and  the  butt. 

4.   Tear — cartridge. 
lSf.  One  Motion.     (PI.  III.  Fig.  4.)    Tear  the  cartridge,  holding  it 
near  the  opening ;  sink  down  the  cartridge,  holding  it  perpendicularly  against 
the  pan,  the  palm  of  the  right  hand  turned  towards  the  body,  the  right 
elbow  against  the  butt.  ( 

5.  Prime,     v 

182.  One  Motion.  Sink  forward  the  head,  cast  the  eyes  to  the  pan, 
filling  it  with  powder ;  press  close  the  top  of  the  cartridge  at  the  open- 
ing, between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger ;  raise  the  head,  place  the  right 
hand  behind  the  pan,  holding  the  little  and  third  finger  firm  against  the 
back  of  the  pan.  • 

6.   Shut — pan. 

183.  One"  Motion.  Hold  the  firelock  firm  with  the  left  hand;  shut 
the  pan  forcibly  with  the  two  lost  fingers,  holding  always  the  cartridge  be- 
tween the  thumb  and  two  fore-fingers;  seize  immediately  the  small  of  the 
stock  with  the  two  last  fingers  and  palm  of  the  right  hand ;  the  right 
wrist  close  to  the  body,  the  elbow  to  the  rear,  and  a  little  detached  from 
the  body. 

7.   Cast — about. 

184.  First  Motion.  With  the  right  arm  smartly  stretched,  without 
lowering  the  right  shoulder,  swing  round  the  firelock  to  the  left  thigh, 
along  which  the  butt  must  press  strongly,  turning,  at  the  same  time, 
the  ramrod  towards  the  body,  opening  and  letting  the  piece  slip  through 
the  left  hand  as  far  as  the  middle  pipe,  the  cock  resting  on  the  thumb  of 
the  right  hand ;  face  at  the  same  time  to  the  front,  turning  on  the  left  heel, 
carrying  the  right  foot  forward,  the  heel  resting  against  the  hollow  of  the 
left. 

185.  Second  Motion.  (PL  III.  Fig.  5.)  Quit  the  firelock  with  the 
right  hand,  sinking  it  with  the  left  along  and  neon-  the  body,  raising  at  the 
same  time  the  right  hand  to  the  muzzle,  holding  the  top  of  the  cartridge 
up ;  let  the  butt  fall  to  the  ground  gently,  the  left  hand  against  the  body, 
under  the  lowest  coat  button,  the  musket  in  contact  with  the  left  thigh, 
the  butt  of  the  ra^nrod  opposite  the  centre  of  the  body. 

8.   Charge — cartridge. 

186.  One  Motion.  (PL  III.  Fig.  5.)  Glance  the  eye  to  the  muzzle 
of  the  barrel ;  turn  smartly  the  upper  side  of  the  right  hand  towards  the 
body,  in  order" to  discharge  the  powder  into  the  muzzle,' raising  the  elbow 
as  high  as  the  wrist;  shake  the  cartridge,  and  insert  it.  in  the  barrel,  an  \ 
leave  the  hand  reversed,  the  fingers  closed  without  pressure. 

9.  Draw — ramrod. 

187.  First  Motion.  Lower  smartly  the  right  elbow,  and  seize  the 
ramrod  between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  bent,  the  other  fingers  closed; 
draw  it  smartly,  extending  the  arm,  the  nails  uppermost;  seize  it  back- 
handed at  the  middle,  with  the  fore-finger  and  thumb,  the  palm  of  the 
hand  outwards;  turn  it  quickly  between  the  bayonet  and  the  body,  at  the 
same  time  closing  the  fingers  upon  :<  ;  the  ramrod  of  each  marl  in  the  rear 
rank  grazing  the  right  shoulder  of  the  man  in  his  front ;  the  ramrod  par- 
allel to  the  bayonet,  the  arm  extended,  the  eyes  upward,  the  butt  of  the 
ramrod  opposite  the  muzzle,  without  being  inserted. 

188.  Second  Motion.  Insert  the  butt  of  the  ramrod  as  low  as  the 
hand. 

10.  Ram — cartridge. 
189    One  Motion.  (PL  III.  Fig.  6.)  Extend  the  arm  its  whole  length, 
in  raising  the  right  hand  to  seize  the  ramrod  with  the  thumb  extended 

27 


20  SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER- PART    II. 

and  the  fore-finger  bent,  the  other  fingers  being  closed ;  drive  the  ramrod 
forcibly  into  the  barrel,  ramming  home  twice  ;  seize  it  again  by  the  small 
end,  between  the  thumb  and  fore-finger  bent,  the  others  closed,  the  light 
elbow  close  to  the  body. 

11.  Return — ramrod. 

190.  First  Motion.  As  in  the  first  motion  of  drawing  ramrod,  bring 
the  small  end  cf  it  opposite  to  the  upper  pipe,  and  hold  it  there  wi:hout  en- 
tering it. 

191.  Second  Motion.  Introduce  the  small  end  into  the  pipe,  and  force 
it  into  its  place  ;  raise  the  right  hand  quickly,  and  place  it,. somewhat  bent, 
on  the  butt  of  the  ramrod,  the  pahn  downwards. 

12.  Shoulder — arms. 

192.  First  Motion.  (PL  III.  Fig.  1.)  Raise  the  firelock  with  the 
left  hand,  along  the  left  side,  the  left  hand  as  high  as  the  shoulder,  the 
left  elbow  resting  on  the  firelock,  keeping  the  barrel  outwards;  at  the 
same  time  sink  down  the  right  hand,  in  order  to  seize  the  firelock  at  the 
small  of  the  stock. 

193.  Second  Motion.  Raise  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand;  let 
the  left  hand  fall,  to  seize  and  support  the  butt,  carrying  back,  at  the  same 
time,  the  right  heel  to  the  side  of  the  left,  and  in  the  same  dignment; 
support  the  firelock  against,  and  at  the  left  shoulder  with  the  right  hand  in 
the  position  indicated  for  shouldered  arms ;  the  right  hand  touching  the 
small  of  the  stock,  without  pressing  against  it. 

194.  Third  Motion.  Let  the  Tight  hand  fall  smartly  to  the  right 
thigh,  hanging  there,  as  already  prescribed. 

Ready. 

195.  First  Motion.     As  in  the  first  motion  cf  loading. 

19(5.  Second  Motion.  (PL  III.  Fig.  7.)  Bring  the  firelock  with  the 
ripht  band  before  the  middle  of  the  body  ;  place  the  left  hand,  with  the  little 
finger  touching  the  feather-spring,  and  the  thumb  as  high  as  the  chin, 
pointing  upwards  along  the  wood  of  the  stock,  the  S  (or  plate  opposite  to 
the  lock)  being  turned  almost  towards  the  body,  the  ramrod  towards  the 
front;  and  apply, at  the  same  time,  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  to  the  head 
of  the  cock, 'the  fore-finger  under,  and  against  the  guard,  and  the  three 
otber  fingers  joined  to  the  first. 

197.  Third  Motion.  (PL  III.  Fig.  7.)  Sink  down  smartly  the  right 
elbow,  cocking  at  the  same  time,  and  seize  the  firelock  at  the  small  of  the 
stock. 

Aim. 

193.  One  Motion.  (PI.  III.  Fig.  9.)  Sink  down  smartly  the  muzzle 
of  the  piece,  slipping  the  left  hand  along  the  stock,  as  far  as  the  tail-pipe  ; 
apply  the  butt  to  the  right  shoulder ;  the  muzzle  "a  little  below  the  level 
of  the  eye,  the  elbows' kept  lowered;  shut  the  left  eye;  look  along  the 
barrel  with  the  right  eye;  lower  the  head  towards  the  butt  in  order  to  aim; 
and  place  the  fore-finger  on  the  (rigger. 

199.  (PL  III.  Fig.  10.)  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will,  at  the  same 
time,  step  with  the  right  foot  eight  inches  to  *he  right,  towards  the  left 
heel  of  the  man  on  their  right,  throwing  the  weight  of  the  body  on  the 
right  leer. 

200.  That  the  soldier  may,  be  habituated  to  wait  for  the  «werd  fire,  the 
instructor  shall  frequently  order  arms  to  be  recovered  by  the  following 
command  : 

Recover — arms. 
201    Owe  Motion.    (PI.  III.  Fig.  1.)    Raise  the  firelock  smartly,  and 
resume  the  position  of  the  third  motion  oi  ready. 

23 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER— PART   II.  21 

Aim. 

202    One  Motion.     Done  in  the  same  manner  as  in  Nos.  198,  199. 

Fixe. 

203.  One  Motion.  Apply,  with  force,  the  first  finger  to  the  trigger, 
without  moving  the  head,  and  remain  in  that  position. 

Load. 

204.  One  Motion.  Bring  down  the  firelock  smartly  into  the  position 
of  the  second  motion  of  load,  except  that  the  thumb,  in  lieu  of  being 
placed  against  the  hammer,  will,  with  the  fore-finger  bent,  seize  the  top 
of  the  cock,  the -other  fingers  remaining  shut.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank 
shall  bring  back  the  right  foot  behind  the  left,  placing  the  hollow  of  that 
foot  against  the  left  heel. 

205.  If,  in  this  position,  the  instructer  wish  to  make  the  ranks  re-load, 
he  will  command, 

Half-cock — FIRELOCK. 

206.  One  Motion.  Raise  the  cock  to  the  half-cock  notch,  taking  care 
not  to  cock  it ;  carry  the  right  hand,  between  the  butt  and  the  body,  to  the 
cartridge  box,  and  open  it. 

207.  When,  instead  of  loading,  the  instructer  wishes  to  shoulder  arms, 
he  will  command, 

Shoulder — arms. 

208.  At  the  word  Shoulder,  the  recruits  will  half-cock,  as  has  been  ex- 
plained, shut  pan,  and  seize  the  firelock  at  the  small  of  the  stock.  At  the 
word  arms,  they  will  shoulder  smartly,  and  front. 

209.  The  squad,  being  formed  in  a  single  rank,  elbows  touching,  arms 
shouldered,  will  be  taught  to  fire  both  as  a  front  and  second  rank,  kneeling, 
as  in  a  square  against  cavalry.  The  kneeling  position  will  be  assumed  at 
the  word  Ready,  as  above,  after  the  precautionary  command, 

Front  rank  kneeling. 

210.  First  Motion.  Turn  the  firelock,  the  lock  outwards;  seize  it 
with  the  right  hand  at  the  small,  as  in  the  first  motion  of  loading,  and  re- 
main facing  to  the  front,  turning  the  point  of  the  left  foot  a  little  inwards. 

211.  Second  Motion.  (PL  III.  Fig.S.)  Throw  the  right  foot  smartly 
.to  the  rear,  the  heel  raised,  and  the  foot  resting  on  the  toes,  bent ;  kneel 

down  with  the  right  knee  ten  or  twelve  inches  in  the  rear,  and  about  six 
inches  to  the  right  of  the  left  heel,  observing  not  to  come  down  sudden- 
ly; bringdown  the  firelock  at  the  same  time  with  the  right  hand,  and  seize 
it  with  the  left  at  the  swell ;  place  the  butt  on  the  ground  without  shock, 
in  front  of  the  right  thigh,  so  that  the  beak  of  the  butt  may  be  opposite  to 
the  left  heel,  and,  at  the  same  time,  seize  the  cock  between  the  thumb 
and  fore-finger. 

212.  Third  Motion.     Cock  the  piece. 

213.  At  the  subsequent  command,  Load,  the  men  representing  a  front 
rank  shall,  without  stooping  forward,  smartly  spring  up,  keeping  in,  or 
hack,  the  right  shoulder,  to  avoid  the  firelocks  of  the  rear  rank. 

Rear  rank  kneeling. 

214.  First  Motion.    (PL  III.  Fig.  11.)    As  front  rank  kneeling. 

215.  Second  Motion.  As  front  rank  kneeling,  except  that  the  right 
knee  shall  be  placed  about  ten  inches  to  the  right  of  the  left  heel,  or  as 
far  as  practicable  without  constraint. 

216.  Third  Motion.     As  front  rank  kneeling. 

217.  At  the  command  Boad,  after  firing,  spring  up  as  a  front  rank,  from 
the  kneeling  position,  and  place  the  feet  as  in  No.  204. 

C*  29 


22  SCHOOL   OF   THE    SOLDIER— PART    II. 

Present — arms. 

218.  Fir.st  Motion.  The  same  as  the  first  motion  of  load,  except  that 
the  recruits  remain  square  to  the  front. 

21!».  Second  Motion.  (PI.  IV.  Fig.  1.)  Complete  the  turning  in- 
wards of  the  firelock,  with  the  right  hand,  in  order  to  carry  it  perpen- 
dicularly opposite  to  the  left  eye,  the  ramrod  in  front,  and  the  cock  as  high 
as  the  lowest  coat  button,  holding  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand,  under 
and  against  the  guard;  seize  it  smartly,  at  the  same  time,  with  the  left 
hand  above  the  lock,  the  little  finger  touching  the.  feather-spring,  the 
thumb  extended  along  the  barrel,  and  against  the  slock,  the  fore  arm  joined 
to  the  body,  without  constraint,  and  remain  fronted,  without  moving  the 
feet. 

Shoulder — arms. 

220.  First  Motion.  Turn  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand,  barrel 
outwards;  raise,  and  place  it  against  the  left  shoulder  with  the  right 
hand  ;  let  fall  the  left  hand  under  the  butt,  the  right  hand  held  easy  against 
the  small  of  the  stock. 

221.  Second  Motion.     Let  the  right  hand  fall  smartly  tc  its  position. 

Order — arms. 

222.  First  Motion.  Sink  down  smartly  the  firelock  to  the  full  ex- 
tent of  the  left  arm,  seizing  it,  at  the  same  time,  with  the  right  hand, 
above,  and  near  the  tail-pipe  ;  quit  it  with  the  left  hand,  and  carry  it  oppo- 
site to  the  right  shoulder,  the  ramrod  in  front,  the  little  finger  behind  the 
harr  .1,  the  butt  three  inches  from  the  ground,  the  right  hand  s-upporlcd 
against  the  haunch,  the  firelock  perpendicular,  and  the  left  hand  hanging 
freely  by  the  side. 

223.  Second  Motion.  Let  the  firelock  slip  through  the  hand,  and  fall 
easy  to  the  ground,  assuming  the  position  about  to  be  described. 


Positio7i  of  Ordered  Arms. 

22 1.  (PI.  IV.  Fig.  2.)  The  hand  must  be  sunk  low ;  the  barrel  between 
the  thumb  and  fore-linger  extended  along  the  stock  ;  the  other  three  fin- 
gers extended  and  joined  ;  the  muzzle  about  two  inches  from  the  right 
shoulder;  the  ranirod  in  front;  the  beak  (that  is,  in  this  position,  the  front) 
of  the  butt  in  a  line  with  the  toes,  and  the  barrel  perpendicular.  If  trie 
ground  be  muddy,  the  butt  may  rest  on  the  right  foot. 
Sh  ouldcr — arm  s  . 

225.  First  Motion.  Raise  smartly  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand; 
carry  it  to  the  left  shoulder,  turning  the  barrel  to  the  front;  place,  at  the 
same  time,  the  left  hand  under  the  butt,  and  .slip  the  right  hand  down  to 
the  lock,  the  little  finger  resting  against  the  hammer. 

226.  Second  Motion.    Let  the  right  hand  fall  smartly  to  its  position. 
2^7.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the   recruits  to  stand  at  ease,  he  will 

command, 

1.   Order — arms.     2.  Rest. 

228.  At  this  command,  the  soldier  will  only  he  required  not  to  move  his 
left  foot,  nor  to  displace  the  heel  of  his  firelock. 

229.  To  resume  the  position  of  steadiness  with  ordered  arms,  the  instruc- 
tor will  command, 

1.  Attention.    2.  Squad. 

230.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruits  shall  resume  the  position  of 
ordered  arms.  No.  221. 

30 


Plate  IV. 


School  of  the  Soldier. 


Plate  IV.  continued. 


School  of  the  Soldier. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   SOLDIER— PART  II.  23 

Inspection  of  Arms. 

231.  The  recruits  being  at  ordered  arms,  the  instructor  will  command, 

Inspect — arms. 

232.  One  Motion.  Face  once  and  a  half  to  the  right,  on  the  left 
heel,  carrying  the  right  foot  perpendicularly  to  the  rear  of  the  alignment, 
six  inches  from,  and  forming  a  right  angle  with,  the  line  of  the  left;  seize 
the  firelock  smartly,  with  the  left  hand"  raised  to  the  level  of  the  lowest 
button  of  the  waistcoat,  inclining  the  muzzle  to  the  rear,  without  moving 
the  butt  from  its  place,  the  ramrod  turned  towards  the  body;  carry,  at 
the  same  time,  the  right  hand  to  the  bayonet,  seizing  it  by  the  socket  and 
shank,  in  such  a  manner,  that  the  extremity  of  the  socket  may  be  an  inch 
above  the  hand,  and  that,  in  drawing  it,  the  thumb  may  extend  on  the 
blade;  draw  it  from  the  scabbard,  carry  it  to  the  muzzle  of  the  firelock, 
and  fix  it  there;  immediately  seize  the  ramrod,  drawing  it  as  has  been 
prescribed  ;  spring  it  into  the  barrel,  and  then  face  back  immediately  to 
the  front,  into  the  position  of  ordered  arms,  No.  224. 

233.  (PI.  IV.  Fig.  4  and  5.)  The.  instructer  will  then  inspect  succes- 
sively the  firelock  of  each  soldier,  passing  in  front  of  the  rank.  Each  sol- 
dier, as  the  instructer  passes  him,  will  raise  his  firelock  smartly  with  the 
right  hand,  seize  it  with  the  left  hand  between  the  tail-pipe  and  feather- 
spring,  the  lock  outwards,  the  left  hand'  as  high  as  the  chin,  the  firelock 
opposite  the  left  ey^;  the  instructer  shall  take"  it  with  his  right  hand  at  the 
small,  and,  after  having  inspected  it,  shall  return  it  to  the  soldier,  who  will  • 
receive  it  back  with  "the  left  hand,  half-cock  and  shut  pan,  if  necessary, 
andresume  the  positidn  ©f  ordered  arms. 

234.  When  the  instructer  has  passed  the  recruit,  he  will  return  his  ram- 
rod, resuming  the  position  of  ordered  arms. 

235.  If,  instead  of  inspecting  arms,  bayonets  are  only  to  be  fixed,  the  irv 
structer  will  command, 

'Fix — BAYONETS. 

236.  Perform  tho  motion  of  inspect  arms,  except  springing  the  ram- 
rod into  the  barrel,  and  immediately  face  to  the  front. 

237.  If,  after  firing,  with  bayonets  fixed,  the  instructer  wish  to  determine 
whether  the  cartridges  ha\  a  been  discharged,  he  will  command, 

Spring — ramrods. 
23S.  One  Motion.     Put  the  ramrod  into  the  barrel,  as  has  been  pre- 
scribed above,  and  immediately  face  to  the  front.     The  recruits  shall  re- 
turn ramrods  successively,  after  the   inspector  has  passed  them,  resum- 
ing the  original  front. 

239.  The  soldier,  in  this  case,  will  not  raise  up  his  firelock,  in  order  to 
present  it  to  the  instructor  when  he  passes  him.  If  the  instructer  wish 
to  satisfy  himself  whether  the  firelock  be  loaded,  he  can  take  hold  of  the 
small  end  of  the  ramrod,  and  spring  it  in  the  barrel. 

240.  Bayonets  being  fixed  and  arms  shouldered,  if  the  instructer  wish 
arms  to  be  piled,  he  will  command, 

1.  Front  rank  one  pace  forward.     2.  March.     3.  About — face. 

241.  At  the  word  March,  the  front  rank  will  march  one  pace  to  the 
front,  and,  at  the  word  face,  will  face  to  the  right  about,  as  already  de- 
scribed.    The  instructer  will  then  command, 

1.   Squad.     2.   Trail — arms.     3.  Pile — arms. 

242.  At  the  second  command,  both  ranks  will  trail  arms  as  in  Nos.  276, 
277. 

243.  The  firelocks  of  every  two  contiguous  files  will  be  considered  as 
number  one.  two,  three,  four  ;  the  front  rank  firelocks  having  the  odd,  and 

33 


24  SCHOOL    OF   THE    SOLDIER— PART    II. 

the  second  rank  firelocks  the  ev;n  numbers,  and  beginning  on  the  right  of 
both  ranks. 

244.  At  the  last  command,  butt  No.  2  is  advanced  about  a  foot  in  the 
direction  of  No.  3,  the  muzzle  inclined  towards  No.  3,  with  the  barrel  to- 
wards the  left  of  the  line.  At  the  same  time,  the  butt  of  No.  3  is  advanced 
in  like  manner  to  meet  No  2,  the  lock  towards  the  right  of  the  line.  The 
shanks  of  the  bayonets  are  crossed  at  right  angles,  that  of  No.  3  upper- 
most. In  the  meantime,  the  butt  of  No.  4  is  moved  about  a  foot  to  the  right 
of  the  line,  the  barrel  to  the  right,  when  the  shank  of  the  bayonet  will  cross 
the  shanks  of  Nos.  2  and  3,  diagonally.  Butt  No.  1  is  moyed  towards  the 
centre;  the  barrel  to  the  front;  the  blade  of  the  bayonet  passing  between 
the  blades  of  Nos.  2  and  4,  and  locking  around  the  former.  Each  man  will 
then  bring  back  the  butt  of  his  firelock,  near  to  his  right  foot. 

245.  When  the  squad  i3  re-assembled  for  the  purpose  of  resuming  arms, 
the  men  will  arrange  themselves  as  they  stood  when  piling  arms;  every 
man  placing  his  right  hand  on  his  firelock  without  moving  it.  The  in- 
structor will  then  command, 

1.  Squad.     2.     Take — arms.     3.  Slwulder — arms. 

246.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  men  will  at  the  same  time  gently 
raise  their  firelocks,  and  bring  the  butts  together,  when  each  will  disen- 
gage his  firelock,  and  assume  the  position  of  ordered  arms.  At  the  third 
command,  the  squad  will  shoulder  arms. 

247.  The  instructer  will  then  command, 

1.  Front  rank.     2.  About — face. 

248.  At  the  second  command,  the  front  rank  will  face  to  the  right  about, 
as  already  described. 

249.  The  instructer  will  then  close  and  dress  the"ranks. 

250.  The  sergeants  will  pile  their  firelocks  together,  on  the  line  of  the 
rank  of  file-closers,  opposite  the  .centre  of  the  squad,  after  the  arms  of  the 
rank  and  file  are  piled,  and  will  resume  them  as  soon  as  the  squad  is  re-as- 
sembled. 

Support — A  RMS. 

251.  First  Motion.  (PI.  IV.  Fig.  3.)  Grasp  smartly  the  firelock 
about  four  inches  below  the  lock,  without  turning  it,  and  raise  it  a  little. 

252.  Second  Motion.  Quit  the  butt  with  the  left  hand,  placing  the 
left  fore-arm  extended  across  the  breast,  supporting  the  cock  ;  the  hand  on 
the  right  breast. 

253!  Third  Motion.     Let  the  right  hand  fall  smartly  to  its  position. 
Carry — arms. 

254.  First  Motion.  With  the  right  hand  grasp  smartly  the  small  of 
the  stock. 

255.  Second  Motion.     Place  the  left  hand  smartly  under  the  butt. 

256.  Third  Motion.  Let  the  right  hand  drop  smartly  to  the  right  side 
and,  at  the  same  time,  sink  the  firelock  to  the  position  of  shouldered  arms 

Ease — arms. 

257.  One  Motion.  Carry  the  firelock  sloped  indifferently  on  cither 
shoulder,  or  with  either  hand;  the  muzzle  always  well  up. 

Carry — arms. 

258.  At  tbi-i  command,  the  soldiers  will  quickly  resume  the  habitual  po- 
sition of  shouldered  arms. 

Unfix — BAYONET. 

259.  First  Motion.  Sink  down  the  Brelock  by  extending  the  left 
arm;  grasp  it,  at  the  same  time,  with  the  right  hand  above,  and  near  the 
swell,  as  in  the  first  motion  of  order  arms. 

360.  Second  Motion.  With  the  right  hand  lower  the  firelock  along 
the  left  thigh  Go  the  ground  ;   seize  it  with  the  left  hand  above  the  right,  in 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER— PART   II.  25 

order  to  assume  the  position  of  the  second  motion  of  cast  about,  but  without 
placing  the  right  heel  before  the  hollow  of  the  left  foot;  strike  oil"  the  bay- 
onet with  the  right  hand,  returning  it  into  the  scabbard  under  the  left  arm, 
leaving  the  right  hand  near  the  socket. 

261.  Third  Motion.  Raise  the  firelock  with  the  left  hand,  seize  it  at 
the  small  with  the  right,  resuming  the  position  of  shouldered  arms. 

Secure — arms. 

262.  First  Motion.  Grasp  smartly  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand, 
the  thumb  against  the  S,  and  the  fore-finger  against  the  cock ;  detach,  at 
the  same  time,  the  firelock  from  the  shoulder,  keeping  the  barrel  outwards , 
seize  the  firelock  at  the  swell,  with  the  left  hand,  the  thumb  extended 
along  the  ramrod,  the  firelock  perpendicular,  opposite  the  shoulder,  the  left 
elbow  pressing  on  the  firelock. 

263.  Second  Motion.  (PL  IV.  Fig.  6.)  Bring  down  the  muzzle  of 
the  firelock,  the  lock  under  the  left  arm,  the  left  hand  remaining  at  the 
swell,  the  thumb  pressing  against  the  ramrod,  to  prevent  its  sliding  out,  the 
right  hand  falling,  at  the  same  time,  into  its  position. 

Shoulder — arms. 

264.  First  Motion.  Raise  the  firelock,  but  not  too  suddenly,  lest  th* 
ramrod  should  escape  from  its  pipes  ;  seize  it  with  the  right  hand,  at  the 
small,  to  support  if  against  the  shoulder;  at  the  same  time,  quit  the  firelock 
with  the  left  hand,  placing  it  smartly  under  the  butt. 

265.  Second  Motion.  Let  the  right  hand  fail  quickly  into  its  posi- 
tion, sinking,  at  the  same  time,  the  firelock  with  the  left  hand,  to  the 
proper  position  of  shouldered  arms. 

Fix — BAYONET.    * 

266.  First  Motion.     As  in  the  first  motion  of  unfix  bayonet. 

267.  Second  Motion.  As  the  second  motion  of  unfix  bayonet,  ex- 
cept that  the  right  hand  will  seize  the  socket  of  the  bayonet,  as  prescribed 
in  Inspection  of  Arms,  No.  232,  in  order  to  draw  it  from  the  scabbard,  and 
carry  it  smartly  to  the  muzzle  ;  the  right  hand  remaining  at  the  shank  of 
the  bayonet. 

268.  Third  Motion.  Shoulder  arms,  as  explained  in  the  third  motion 
of  unfix  bayonet. 

Arms — port. 

269.  One  Motion.  (PL  IV.  Fig.  7.)  At  one  motion,  throw  the  firelock 
from  the  shoulder  across  the  body,  (meeting  it  smartly  with  both  hands  at 
the  same  instant,)  to  a  diagonal  position,  in  which  the  lock  is  to  be  turned 
to  the  front,  and  at  the  height  of  the  breast ;  the  muzzle  slanting  upwards, 
so  that  the  barrel  may  cross  opposite  the  point  of  the  left  shoulder,  wiih 
the  butt  proportionally.  The  right  hand  grasps  the  small  of  the  butt,  and 
the  left  holds  the  piece  at  the  swell,  close  to  the  lower  pipe,  the  thumbs 
of  both  hands  pointing  towards  the  muzzle  ;  both  elbows  close  to  the  body, 
the  fingers  of  the  left  hand  between  the  stock  and  barrel. 

Shoulder — a  rm  s . 

270.  First  Motion.  Bring  the  firelock  smartly  to  the  left  shoulder,  •• 
placing  the  left  hand  under  the  butt. 

271.  Second  Motion.  Drop  the  right  hand  smartly  to  its  position  on 
the  right  side. 

Charge — bayonet. 

272.  First  Motion.  (PL  III.  Fig.  3.)  As  the  first  motion  of  load, 
grasping  the  firelock  two  inches  below  the  cock. 

273.  Second  Motion.  (PL  IV.  Fig.  8.)  Bring  down  the  firelock  with 
the  right  hand  into  the  left,  which  seizes  it  a  little  above  the  swell,  the 
barrel  uppermost,  the  left  elbow  near  the  body,  the  right  hand  against 
the  right  haunch,  the  point  of  the  bayonet  as  high  as  the  eye.     The  inoa 

D  37 


26  SCHOOL  OF   THE   SOLDIER— PART   II. 

in  the  rear  rank  will  take  care  to  avoid  touching  the  men,  who  are  in 
front  of  them,  with  their  bayonets. 

Shoulder — arms." 

274.  First  Motion.  Turn  to  the  front  on  the  left  heel ;  bring  up  the 
right  heel  to  the  side  of,  and  in  a  line  with,  the  left ;  and  spring  up,  at  tlte 
same  time,  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand  to  the  left  shoulder,  placing  the 
left  hand  under  the  butt. 

275.  Second  Motion.     Let  the  right  hand  fall  smartly  to  its  place. 

Trail — arms. 

276.  First  Motion.  {PI.  IV.  Fig.  9.)  The  first  motion  of  order  arms, 
No.  222. 

277.  Second  Motion.  Incline  forward  a  little  the  muzzle  of  the  fire- 
lock, the  butt  towards  the  rear,  and  about  three  inches  from  the  ground. 
The  right  hand,  against  the  haunch,  will  steady  the  firelock  in  such  manner, 
that  the  bayonets  of  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  not  touch  the  men  ia 
front 

Shoulder — a  rm  s . 

278.  At  the  word  Shoulder,  raise  the  firelock  perpendicular  in  the  right 
hand.  At  the  word  arms,  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  shoulder- 
ing, from  ordered  arms. 

Remarks  on  the  Analysis  of  Loading  and  Firing,  and  of 
the  Manual  Exercise. 

(Omitted.) 


LESSON  III. 

Loading  in  Quick  Time. 

281.  Its  object  is  to  enable  the  soldier  to  distinguish  the  motions,  which 
should  be  rapidly  executed,  from  those  executed  with  more  regularity  and 
attention ;  such  as  those  of  prime,  charge  cartridge,  and  ram  cartridge. 
It  will  therefore  be  divided  into  four  principal  divisions,  as  follows : 

282.  The  first  will  be  executed  at  the  command  Load  ;  the  three  others, 
at  the  commands  Two,  Three  and  Four. 

283.  The  instructer  will  command, 

Load  hi  quick  time. 
Load. 

284.  (PI.  III.  Fig.  4.)  Execute  the  motion  of  load;  open  pan,  handle 
cartridge,  tear  cartridge,  prime. 

Two. 

285.  (PI.  III.  Fig.  5.)  Shut  pan,  cast  about,  charge  cartridge. 

Three. 

286.  (PI.  III.  Fig.  6.)  Draw  ramrod,  ram  cartridge. 

Four. 

287.  (PI.  III.  Fig.  1.)  Return  ramrod,  shoulder  arms. 


Loading  in  Quickest  Time. 

288.  The  instructer  will  next  teach  the  recruit  to  load  in  quickest  time, 
which  shall  be  executed  the  same  as  loading  in  quick  time,  but  continued 
Mid  without  pauses.     The  instructer  will  command, 
Load  in  quickest  time. 
38  Load. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER— PART   II. 
Remarks  on  the  Loadings. 

(Omitted.) 


LESSON  IV. 

Firings. 

291.  These  are  either  direct  or  oblique,  and  will  be  executed  as  will  be 
explained. 

Direct  Firings. 

292.  The  instructer  will  give  the  following  commands  : 

1.  Squad.    2.  Ready.     3.  Aim.     4.  Fire.     5.  Load. 

293.  (PI.  II.  Fig.  2.)  These  several  commands  shall  be  executed  as  has 
been  already  prescribed. 

294.  At  the  second  command,  the  men  will  assume  the  indicated  posi- 
tion, according  to  the  rank  in  which  they  are  respectively  placed:  at  the 
fifth  command,  they  shall  load  and  shoulder  arras. 


Oblique  Firings. 

295.  Oblique  firings  are  executed  to  the  right  and  left,  by  the  same 
commands  as  the  direct  fires,  with  this  difference,  that  the  command  Aim 
shall  be  preceded  by  the  caution  Right  (or  left)  oblique ;  at  which  caution 
the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  fix  their  eyes  on  the  interval  through  which 
they  are  to  aim. 

Position   of  the  Ranks  in  the  Oblique  Firings  to   the 
Right. 

296.  At  the  word  Ready,  both  ranks  will  execute  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed for  the  direct  fire. 

297.  At  the  word  Aim,  the  front  rank  man  will  direct  his  firelock  to  the 
right,  inclining  the  left  knee  inwards,  without  moving  the  feet. 

298.  The  rear  rank  man  will  advance  the  left  foot  about  six  inches,  and 
towards  the  toe^of  the  right  foot  of  the  front  rank  man  of  his  file,  advancing 
also  the  body,  bending  the  left  knee  a  little,  and  will  direct  his  firelock  to 
the  right. 

299.  Both  ranks  will  throw  back  the  right  shoulder. 

300.  At  the  word  Load,  both  ranks  will  resume  the  position  prescribed 
for  the  direct  fire.  The  rear  rank  men  will  bring  back  the  left  foot,  and 
place  the  heel  against  the  hollow  of  the  right,  bringing  down  the  firelock 
to  the  above  position. 


Position  of  the  Ranks  in  the  Oblique  Firings   to   the 
Left. 

301.  At  the  word  Ready,  both  ranks  will  execute  what  has  been  pre 
scribed  for  the  direct  fire. 

302.  At  the  word  Aim,  the  front  rank  mr.n  will  direct  his  firelock  to  the 
left,  inclining  the  left  knee,  without  moving  the  feet. 

303.  The  rear  rank  man  shall  advance  the  left  foot  about  six  inches,  and 
towards  the  right  heel  of  the  front  rank  man  on  the  left  of  his  file  ;  and 
shall  also  advance  the  upper  part  of  the  body,  bending  the  left  knee,  and 
aiming  through  the  interval  to  the  left  of  the  front  rank  man  of  his  file 

39 


28  SCHOOL   OF   THE   SOLDIER— PART   II. 

304.  Both  ranks  shall  throw  back  the  left  shoulder. 

305.  At  the  word  Load,  both  ranks  shall  draw  back  their  firelocks,  in  the 
oblique  position,  in  which  they  range,  and  shall  prime  in  that  position.  The 
rear  rank  shall  carry  back  the  left  loot,  placing  the  heel  against  the  hollow 
*«f  the  right ;  and,  in  casting  about,  both  ranks  shall  take  the  same  position 
ts  in  the  direct  fire. 


Remarks  on  the  Oblique  Firings. 

(Omitted.) 


Firing  by  File. 

310.  The  instructor  will  command, 

1.  Fire  by  file.     2.  Squad.     3.  Ready.     4.   Commence — firing. 

311.  At  the  third  command,  both  ranks  will  take  the  position  prescribed 
in  the  direct  and  oblique  firings. 

312.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  men  of  the  right  file  will  aim  and  fire 
together  ;  the  next  file  will  aim  at  the  instant  when  the  first  has  fired,  and 
so  on  successively  to  the  left ;  after  the  first  fire,  every  man  will  load  and 
fire  without  waiting  for  the  others. 

313.  The  men  shall  always  front  in  casting  about  the  firelock,  and,  after 
having  loaded,  they  will  assume  the  position  indicated,  No.  197.  For  this 
purpose,  each  soldier,  after  returning  his  ramrod,  shall  spring  up  his  fire- 
lock with  the  left  hand,  letting  it  slip  through  that  hand,  which  seizes  it 
near  the  feather-spring,  at  the  height  of  the  chin  ;  at  the  same  time,  he 
will  half  face  to  the  right,  in  order  to  return  to  the  prescribed  position  ; 
place  the  thumb  of  the  right  hand  on  the  head  of  the  cock,  in  order  to  cock 
it,  the  little  finger  under  and  against  the  guard. 

314.  When  the  instructor  wishes  the  firing  to  cease,  he  will  command,  ( 

Ruffle. 

315.  At  this  command,  the  soldiers  will  cease  firing.  Each  man  will 
half-cock,  if  cocked;  will  load,  if  unloaded;  and,  if  loading,  will  complete 
the  operation,  and  shoulder  arms. 


General  Remarks  on  the  Firings. 

31G.  The  firings  shall  be  executed  at  first  without  cartridges,  next  with 
priming  only,  and  afterwards  with  blank  cartridges. 

017.'  During  the  firings,  it  shall  be  required  of  the  soldier  to  be  attentive 
in  observing,  when  he  half-cocks,  whether  smoke  proceeds  out  of  the  vent. 
which  is  a  sure  indication  that  the  piece  has  gone  off.  If  the  smoke  do  not 
pppear,  the  soldier,  in  lieu  of  reloading,  will  prick  the  vent,  and  prime  a 
second  time.  If  the  soldier,  th&king  he  has  fired,  has  loaded  again,  he 
ought  to  discover  his  mistake  in  ramming  homo,  by  the  length  of  the 
charge  ;  and  he  would  be  very  culpable  were  he  to  load  a  third  time. 

818.  The  instructor  will  inspect  the  arms,  in  order  to  ascertain  whether 
the  soldier  has  committed  the  fault  of  charging  his  firelock  with  two  or 
more  cartridges. 

319.  The  instructor  ought  also  to  watch  particularly  that  the  soldier,  in 
half-cocking,  does  not  cock,  a  fault  from   which  accidents  might  result. 
He  will  further  impress  the  recruits  with  the  importance  of  having  the 
flint  always  in  good  firing  order. 
40 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  II.  2!) 

General  Remarks  on  the  Second  Part  of  the  School  of  the 
Soldier. 

320.  After  some  days  of  practice  of  the  lesson  relative  to  the  use  of  arms, 
and  after  the  recruits  are  confirmed  in  the  position  of  shouldered  arms,  the 
instructer  will  terminate  the  lesson,  by  making  the  four  recruits  march  for 
some  time  in  one  rank,  at  the  distance  of  one  pace  from  each  other,  in  or- 
der to  confirm  them  more  and  more  in  the  mechanism  of  the  direct  and 
oblique  steps.  He  will  show  them  the  mode  of  marking  time,  as  fol- 
lows : 


To  Mark  Time. 

321.  The  four  recruits,  marching  with  the  ordinary  step,  shall  receivo 
the  command, 

1.  Mark  time.     2.  March. 

322.  At  the  second  word,  which  shall  be  given  at  the  instant  the  foot  is 
coming  to  the  ground,  the  soldier  shall  make  a  semblance  of  marching,  by 
bringing  back  the  heels  alternately  to  the  side  of  each  other,  without  ad- 
vancing, observing  the  cadence  of  the  step. 

323.  The  instructer,  wishing  the  ordinary  step  to  be  resumed,  will  com 
mand, 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

324.  At  the  second  word,  given  as  above,  the  recruit  shall  resume  the 
step  of  twenty-eight  inches. 


To  Change  Step. 

325.  To  the  recruits,  marching  with  the  ordinary  step,  the  instructer  will 
command, 

1.   Change  step.     2.  March. 

326.  At  the  second  word,  to  be  given  when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the 
ground,  the  recruits  shall  quickly  bring  up  the  foot  in  the  rear  to  the  side 
of  that  planted  in  front,  which  latter  foot  will  step  off. 


The  Side  Step. 

327.  The  squad  being  at  a  halt,  and  aligned,  the  instructer,  to  teach  this 
step,  will  suppose  an  interval  of  six  or  eight  common  paces  to  be  gained  to 
the  right  or  left,  on  a  fixed  point.     For  this  purpose,  he  will  command, 

1.  Side  step  to  the  right  (or  left.)     2.  March. 

328.  At  the  first  command,  each  recruit  will  glance  Lis  eyes  to  the  right ; 
at  the  second,  he  will  carry  his  right  foot  about  ten  inches  to  the  right,  (or 
towards  the  left  foot  of  his  right  hanl  man,)  and  instantly  bring  up  his  left 
foot,  and  so  on,  the  whole  with  perfect  precision  of  time,  shoulders  square 
to  the  front,  and  each  man  halting  in  his  own  person,  when  he  has  closed 
on  the  fixed  point,  or  the  man  next  to  him. 

329    The  instructer  will  then  order, 

Front. 


To  Step  Short. 

330.  The  squad  being  on  a  march,  the  instructor,  to  teach  this,  will 
command, 

1.  Step  short.    2.  March. 
D  41 


30  SCHOOL  OF  THE   SOLDIER— PART  III. 

351.  At  the  second  command,  the  foot  advanced  will  finish  its  pace,  and 
afterwards  each  recruit  will  step  as  far  as  the  hall  of  his  toe,  and  not  far- 
ther, until  the  words  Forward — march,  when  he  will  resume  the  ordi- 
nary step. 


PART  III. 

LESSON  I. 

Marching  to  the  Front. 

332.  When  the  four  recruits  shall  he  well  confirmed  in  th^  principles 
and  mechanism  of  the  step,  the  position  of  the  body,  and  that  of  shouldered 
arms,  the  instrvcter  will  unite  from  six  to  ten  men,  in  oilier  to  instruct 
them  in  the  principles  of  the  touch  of  elbows,  marching  to  the  front  and  ta 
a  flank  ;  the  quick  step,  the  back  step,  the  principles  of  changes  of  direc- 
tion, wheeling  on  a  movable  and  a  halted  pivot,  and  the  principles  of 
alignment. 

333.  The  instructer  will  place  them  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  and 
command, 

1.  Squad— forward.     2.   Guide1*  left  (or  right.)     3.  March. 

334.  At  the  word  March,  the  rank  shall  step  off  smartly  with  the  left 
foot. 

335.  The  instructer  will  cause  a  well-instructed  soldier  to  march  two 
paces  in  front  of  the  recruits,  on  the  right  or  left  of  the  rank,  according  to 
the  flank  to  which  the  guide  may  be  ordered.  He  shall  direct  the  soldier 
on  the  flank  to  march  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  man  who  precedes  him, 
preserving  the  distance  of  two  paces  from  him.  This  is  the  surest  means  of 
making  the  recruits  contract  the  habit  of  taking  the  step  of  the  prescribed 
length  and  cadence. 

The  instructer  will  cause  the  following  rules  to  be  observed  : 

336.  Touch  lightly  the  elbow  towards  the  guide. 

337.  Not  to  open  out  the  left  elbow,  nor  the  right  arm. 

338.  Yield  to  pressure  from  the  side  of  the  guide,  and  resist  that  com- 
ing from  the  opposite  side. 

339.  Not  to  lap  elbows. 

340.  Not  to  swing  the  arms. 

341.  Retouch,  insensibly,  the  elbow  towards  the  guide,  in  case  of  the 
opening  of  files. 

342.  Keep  always  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  the  eyes  cast  on  the 
ground,  about  fifteen  paces  to  the  front, on  whatever  flank  the  guide  may 
be  posted. 

343.  If  a  recruit  find  himself  too  fir  advanced  or  behind,  he  will  grad- 
ually resume  his  place,  by  lengthening  or  shortening  his  step. 

344.  Finally,  tbe  instructer  shall  endeavor  to  make  the  recruit  com- 
prehend, that  the  alignment  in  marching  cannot  he  preserved,  without  the 
regularity  of  the  step,  the  touch  of  the  elbow,  and  the  squareness  of  the 
shoulders ;  for  instance,  that  if  some  took  longer  steps,  or  marched  quicker 
than  others,  the  result  must  be  a  breaking  of  the  rank  ;  that  if  the  head 
were  not  direct  to  the  front,  and  the  light  touch  of  the  elbow  preserved,  it 
•would  be  impossible  for  them  to  judge  whether  they  march  in  the  same 
line  with  those  on  their  right  and  left,  and  whether  openings  take  place. 

345.  The  instructer  shall  next  exercise  them  in  obliquing  to  the  right, 
With  the  guide  on  the  left ;  and  in  obliquing  to  the  left,  \\  itli  tb-^  guide  en 
the  right. 


*  Ovide  Ir/i.  i*  here  given  merely  as  a  caution  to  the  rank,  that  tlio  'ouch  of  the  ei- 
bow  outli/  to  be  to  tile  left,  that  ia,  that  the  rank  will  drcsj  by  the  Irjl. 
42 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III.  2n 

346.  In  both  the  oblique  and  direct  marches,  the  touch  of  the  elbow 
ought  to  be  kept  up  towards  the  guide ;  and  thus  each  man  will  touch, 
lightly,  the  elbow  of  the  man  next  to  him  on  that  side. 

347.  The  oblique  march  to  the  side  opposite  to  the  guide  being  much 
more  difficult  than  that  to  the  side  he  is  on,  the  instructed  will  recom- 
mend to  the  recruits  to  redouble  their  attention  when  thus  obliquing. 

348.  When  these  various  principles  have  become  familiar  to  the  recruits, 
and  they  are  confirmed  in  the  position  of  the  body,  the  carrying  of  arms, 
the  mechanism,  length  and  cadence  of  the  ordinary  step,  the  instructer 
shall  make  them  pass  from  the  ordinary  to  the  quick  step,  and  the  reverse, 
as  follows  : 

349.  The  rank  marching  with  the  ordinary  step,  the  instructer  will 
command, 

1.  Quick  time.    2.  March. 

350.  At  the  word  March,  given  when  either  foot  is  coming  tb  the 
ground,  the  rank  will  assume  the  quick  step. 

351.  The  length  of  this  step  shall  be  the  same  as  that  of  the  ordinary 
step  ;  but  one  hundred  and  twenty  of  these  steps  must  be  taken  in  one 
minute. 

352.  Plummets,  which  vibrate  the  required  times  of  march  in  a  minute, 
are  of  great  utility  ;  they  must  be  in  possession  of,  and  constantly  referred 
to,  by  each  instructer  of  a  squad  and  the  drum-major ;  the  several  lengths 
of  plummets,  swinging  the  times  of  the  different  marches  in  a  minute,  are 
as  follows  : 

353.  Common  time,  n-inety  steps  in  a  minute. 

Plummet,  seventeen  inches  and  thirty-eight  hundredths  of  an  inch  in 
length. 

354.  Quick  time,  one  hundred  and  twenty  steps  in  a  minute. 
Plummet,  nine  inches  and  seventy-eight  hundredths  of    an   inch   in 

length. 

355.  A  musket  ball,  suspended  by  a  string  not  liable  to  stretch,  and  on 
which  are  marked  the  different  required  lengths,  will  answer  the  above 
purpose,  may  be  easily  procured,  and  should  be  frequently  compared  with 
an  accurate  standard  in  the  adjutant's  possession.  The  length  of  the 
plummet  is  to  be  measured  from  the  point  of  suspension  to  the  centre  of 
the  ball. 

356.  With  the  exception  of  the  oblique  step,  the  quick  time  is  that 
which  will  generally  be  ordered  in  all  interior  movements  of  battalions, 
and  other  corps,  as  in  wheelings,  filings,  and  successive  formations  gener- 
ally. ' 

Remarks  on  the  Quick  Step. 

357.  Marching  in  quick  and  common  time  will  be  executed  by  the  same 
principles ;  but  the  impulse  of  quick  time  tending  to  produce  excitement 
in  the  soldier,  the  instructer  will  pay  particular  attention  that  the  cadence 
of  this  step,  and  the  steadiness  of  the  body,  be  preserved.  The  instructer 
will  cause  the  recruits  to  mark  time,  change  step,  and  step  short. 

358.  When  the  instructer  wishes  the  recruits  to  resume  the  ordinary 
step,  he  will  command, 

1.  Common  time.    2  March. 

359.  At  the  word  March,  given  when  either  foot  is  coming  to  the  ground, 
the  rank  shall  resume  the  ordinary  step. 

360.  The  instructer  shall  cause  the  rank  to  halt,  by  the  commands  and 
means,  Nos.  136,  137. 

361.  The  rank  being  halted,  the  instructer  shall  Gause  it  to  march  back- 
yard, a*  fi<  lows  : 

1.  Backward.    2.  March. 

43 


32  SCHOOL   OF  THE   SOLDIER— PART  III. 

362.  At  the  word  March,  the  recruit  will  step  smartly  to  the  rear  with 
the  left  foot,  planting  it  fourteen  inches  from  .the  right,  reckoning  from 
heel  to  heel,  and  so  on,  till  the  word  Halt  is  given,  which  shall  be  always 
preceded  by  that  of  Squad.  The  recruits  will  halt,  at  this  command,  by 
bringing  back  *he  foot  in  front  to  the  side  of  the  other. 

■)iio.  The  instructor  will  take  care  that  the  recruits  dp  not  lean  against 
each  other ;  that  they  march  straight  backward ;  and  that  the  proper 
position  of  the  body  and  firelock  be  always  preserved. 


LESSON  II. 

To  March  by  a  Flank. 

364.  The  recruits  being  drawn  up  in  one  rank,  elbow  to  elbow,  the  in 
structer  will  command, 

1.  Squad.     2.  Right  (or  left) — face.     3.  Forward — march. 

365.  At  the  second  command,  the  recruits  will  face   to  the  right  or 
left. 

366.  At  the  word  March,  they  shall  step  off  quickly,  with  the  left  foot, 
and  in  common  time. 


Remarks  en  Marching  by  a  Flank. 

367.  The  instructer  will  place  a  well-instructed  soldier  by  the  side  of 
the  leading  recruit,  en  the  flank  to  which  the  rank  has  faced,  in  order  to 
conduct  it,  and  regulate  its  step  ;  and  it  will  be  enjoined  on  the  soldier 
who  is  on  the  leading  flank,  to  touch  the  elbow  of  the  man  who  is  to  di- 
rect him. 

368.  At  the  word  March,  the  whole  file  will  step  off  smartly  together, 
first  with  the  left  foot,  then  the  right,  at  the  prescribed  pace  of  twenty- 
eight  inches,  which  will  bring  the  foot  last  raised  (except  that  of  the  file- 
leader)  on  the  ground,  about  six  inches  in  advance  of  the  foot  of  the  man 
immediately  in  front.  In  this  way,  only,  can  the  original  or  facing  distan- 
ces of  the  men,  in  file-marching,  be  preserved. 

369.  The  instructer  will  be  careful  to  cause  the  men  in  file  to  cover 
each  other  accurately,  and  will  see  that  they  do  not  bend  the  knee, 
or  look  downwards,  either  of  which  would  cause  the  loss  of  the  lack-step 
and  cadence. 

370.  The  instructor,  during  the  march,  will  place  himself  five  or  six 
paces  in  front,  to  see  that  the  principles  prescribed  above  are  strictly 
observed. 

371.  He  will  also,  sometimes,  place  himself  in  rear  of  the  file,  and  let  it 
pass  him  fifteen  or  twenty  paces,  to  observe  whether  the  recruits  cover  the 
file-leader  exactly. 

372.  The  instructer,  to  cause  the  rank  to  wheel  by  file,  to  the  right  or 
left,  will  command, 

1.  By  file  right  (or  lift.)     2.  March. 

373.  At  the  second  word,  the  leading  man  will  turn  to  the  right  or  left, 
and  then  march  straight  forward,  each  man  turning  successively  on  the 
same  ground. 

374.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  recruits,  marching  to  the  front,  to 
face  to  the  right  ami  lift,  thus  : 

1.  By  the  right  (or  left)  fan!:.     2.   March. 

375.  At  the  second  word,  to  be  given  ;\  little  before  either  foot  comea  to 
the  ground,  the  recruits  will  turn  the  body,  plant  the  fool  that  is  raised,  iu 
the  new  direction,  and  step  olf  w  ith  the  other  foot,  without  altering  the 
cadence  of  the  step. 

44 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  SOLDIER— PART  III.  S3 

376.  When  the  instrueter  wishes  to  halt  and  front,  the  rank  marching 
by  the  flank,  he  will  command, 

1.  Squad.     2.  Halt.     3.  Froa-t. 

377.  At  the  second  word,  the  rank  marching  in  file  will  halt,  and  no 
man  will  move,  even  to  rectify  a  false  distance  ;  "this  attention  being  neces- 
sary to  habituate  the  soldier  to  the  constant  observance  of  his  distance. 

378.  At  the  third  word,  each  man  will  front,  by  facing  to  the  left,  if 
marching  by  the  right  flank  ;  and  by  facing  to  the  right,  if  marching  by 
the  left  flank. 


General  Remark  on  Marching  by  a  Flank. 

379.  When  the  recruits  have  acquired  ease  and  facility  in  marching  by 
a  flank,  the  instructor  will  repeat  the  lesson  in  quick  time:  the  practice 
of  this  will  make  them  sensible  of  the  necessity  of  maintaining  the  lock- 
step,  in  marching  by  a  flank,  and  of  observing  the  cadence  of  the  step,  and 
the  upright  position  of  thG  body. 


LESSON  III. 
Alignment. 

350.  The  instrueter  will  exercise  the  recruits  in  aligning  themselves, 
one  by  one,  that  they  may  the  better  comprehend  the  principles  of  the 
alignment ;  and,  for  this  purpose,  he  will  order  the  two  men  on  the  right 
flank  to  step  two  paces  to  the  front,  and,  having  aligned  them,  he  will 
caution  each  man,  successively,  to  move  up  on  the  alignment  of  the 
two  first. 

351.  Each  recruit,  on  the  caution  from  the  instructor,  to  move  up  on  iho 
alignment,  will  turn  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  right,  to  the  position  pre- 
scribed, No.  99  ;  march  in  the  cadence  of  the  ordinary  step,  two  paces  to 
the  front ;  shortening  the  last  step,  so  as  to  be  six  inches  in  rear  of  the 
new  alignment,  which  is  never  to  be  passed.  The  recruit  will  steadily, 
and  without  jerking,  move,  by  short  steps,  to  the  side  of  the  man  next  to 
him  in  the  new  alignment,  without  deranging  the  position  of  his  head,  the 
fine  of  his  eyes,  or  the  squareness  of  his  shoulders,  ro  as  to  find  himself  in 
the  direction  of  this  man,  whose  elbow  he  is  lightly  to  touch,  without  open- 
ing out  his  own. 

382.  Aligning  to  the  left  is  executed  on  the  same  principles. 

383.  When  the  recruits  shall  have  learned  thus,  one  by  one,  to  align 
correctly,  the  instrueter  will  cause  the  whole  rank  to  align  at  once,  by  the 
following  command : 

Right  (or  left) — dress. 

354.  At  this  word,  the  whole  rank,  except  the  two  men  previously, 
placed  as  a  base  of  alignment,  shall  steadily  march  up  to,  and  place  them- 
selves on  the  new  line,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed,  No.  381. 

355.  The  instrueter,  placed  five  or  six  paces  in  front  of,  and  facing  to 
the  rank,  shall  carefully  observe  that  the  principles  are  adhered  to ;  and, 
to  verify  this,  he  will  proceed  to  the  flank  which  has  served  for  a  base  ot 
alignment. 

386.  The  instrueter,  seeing  nearly  the  whole  of  the  rank  aligned,  will 
command, 

Front. 

387.  At  this  command,  the  recruits  shall  turn  the  head  to  the  front,  and 
remain  steady. 

388.  Should  the  instrueter  observe  that  some  file,  or  files,  be  not  cor- 
rectly a'igned,he  will  order,  such  file,  (or  files,)  forward,  (or  back,)  desig- 

45 


34  SCHOOL  OF  THE   SOLDIER— PART   III. 

nating  them  by  their  numbers.  The  files  designated,  only,  will  cast  the 
eyes  towards  the  side  of  the  alignment,  in  order  to  judge  how  far  they 
should  move  up  or  back,  and  will  steadily  place  themselves  on  the  line, 
turning  afterwards  the  head  to  the  front. 

389.  The  instructor  will  previously  number  the  files. 

390.  Alignments  to  the  rear  are  executed  on  the  same  principles  :  the 
recruits  step  back  a  little  beyond  the  line,  and  then  move  up  to  it,  by  small 
steps  to  the  front,  as  prescribed,  No.  381. 

391.  The  instructor  will  command, 

Right  (or  left)  backward — dress. 


Remarks  on  the  Principles  of  Alignment. 

392.  The  instructer  shall  inculcate  the  observance  of  the  following 
principles  : 

393.  That  the  soldier  steadily  arrive  on  the  line. 

394.  That  he  do  not  bend  the  body  back,  or  the  head  forward. 

395.  That  he  turn  the  head  the  least  possible,  and  only  so  as  to  see  the 
line  of  the  eyes. 

396.  That  he  never  pass  beyond  the  line. 

397.  That,  at  the  command  Front,  all  movement  on  the  part  of  the 
soldier  ceafe,  even  though  he  may  not  be  aligned. 

398.  That,  at  the  command  such  file,  (or  such  files,)  forward,  (or  back.) 
those  not  designated  do  not  move. 

399.  Tliat,  in  alignments  to  the  rear,  the  soldiers  pass  a  little  beyond 
the  line. 


LESSON  IV. 

Wheelings. 

400.  Wheelings  are  of  two  sorts  ;  on  a  halted,  and  on  a  movable  pivot. 

403.  In  wheels  from  a  halt,  the  pivot  man  turns  in  his  place,  without 
advancing  or  receding  ;  in  wheeling  from  line  into  column,  and  from  col- 
umn into  line,  he  will  face  as  will  be  pointed  out  in  the  text,  under  those 
heads  respectively. 

404.  In  wheeling  on  a  movable  pivot,  the  pivot  man  takes  steps  of 
seven  inches,  in  order  to  clear  the  wheeling  point.  This  is  necessary,  in 
order  that  the  divisions*  of  a  column  may  be  enabled  to  change  direction 
without  losing  their  distance,  as  will  be  explained.  School  of  the  Company. 

405.  In  both  cases,  the  man  on  the  wheeling  Hank  will  always  take 
steps  of  twenty-eight  inches. 

406.  T'.;c  movement  of  right  or  left  turn  is  used  only  for  changes  of  di- 
rection in  column  to  the  side  of  the  guide.  Great  care  must  be  taken  not 
to  confound  this  movement  with  wheeling  on  a  movable  pivot. 


To  Wheel  on  a  Halted  Pivot.-\ 

v  will   place  a  well-instructed   man 

ind  will  command, 

Squad — right  wheel,     2.  March. 


407.  The  instructer  will   place  a  well-instructed   man   on  the  wheeling 
flank,  to  conduct  it,  and  will  command, 


*  Division  is  a  general  term,  employed  to  signify  any  of  those  equal  parts,  into  which 
tin-  Battalidn  la  broken,  whether  tiny  are  grand  divisions,  companies,  platoons  or 
sections. 

f  The  pivot,  or  (as  it  is  sometimes  called)  tin'  proper  fieot  flank  of  tin-  column,  is  tliat. 
by  wheeling  up  to  which,  the  divisions  of  the  column  arc  brought  into  line  in  theii 
regular  order,  ami  to  their  proper  front.    The  other  is  called  tin'  merit  tlank. 

The  tlank  of  a  division,  on  which  a  wheel  ii  executed,  is,  with  reference  to  that 
particular  wheol,  termed  the  pivot,  although,  with  reference  to  the  column,  It  maybe 
the  r -verse  flank. 
46 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   SOLDIER— PART   III.  35 

408.  At  the  second  word,  the  soldiers  will  step  off  with  the  left  foot,  and 
turn,  at  the  same  time,  the  head  a  little  to  the  left,  their  eyes  fixed  in  the 
direction  of  those  of  the  men  who  are  on  their  left.  The  pivot  man  shall 
only  mark  time,  conforming  to  the  movement  of  the  marching  flank:  the 
man  who  conducts  that  flank  will  march  steps  of  twenty-eight  inches  ; 
from  the  first  step,  hring  forward  the  left  shoulder  a  little,  cast  his  eyes  on 
the  ground  he  is  to  go  over,  and,  from  time  to  time,  along  the  rank  ;  and 
he  will  always  feel  the  elbow  of  the  man  next  to  him,  but  wi.hout  press- 
ing him. 

409.  The  other  soldiers  must  keep  up  the  light  touch  of  the  elbow- 
on  the  side  towards  the  pivot,  and  resist  all  pressure  coming  from  the 
opposite  flank,  each  man  proportioning  Lis  step  to  his  distance  from  the 
pivot 

410.  The  instructer  shall  make  the  rank  describe  a  circle,  once  or  twice, 
before  he  halts  it,  in  order  to  render  the  principle  understood ;  and  he 
shall  carefully  see  that  the  rank  wheel  straight,  and  do  not  open  out  from 
the  centre,  or  break,  or  displace  the  pivot. 

411.  He  shall  make  the  rank  wheel  to  the  left,-on  the  same  principles, 
and  will  command  a  halt  as  follows  : 

1.   Squad.     2.  Halt. 

412.  At  the  second  word,  the  rank  will  halt,  and  no  man  will  move 
until  a  further  command. 

413.  The  instructer  shall  go  to  the  flank  opposite  the  pivot,  and  place 
the  two  outer  men  of  that  flank  in  the  direction  he  chooses  to  give  to  the 
rank,  leaving  sufficient  space  between  them  and  the  pivot  for  the  others 
to  place  themselves  in,  and  command, 

Left  (or  right) — dress. 

414.  At  this  command,  the  rank  will  place  itself  on  the  alignment  of 
the  two  men  who  are  to  serve  as  a  base,  conforming  to  the  principles 
prescribed. 

415.  The  instructer  will  then  order,  Front,  which  will  be  executed  as 
prescribed,  No.  387. 


Remarks  on  Wheeling  on  a  Halted  Pivot. 

416.  Turn  the  head  a  little  towards   the  marching  flank,  arid  fix  the 
eyes  t»i  the  line  of  the  eyes  of  the  men  who  are  towards  that  flank. 

417.  Keep  up  the  light  touch  of  the  elbow  towards  the  pivot. 

418.  Resist  a  pressure  coining  from  the  marching  flank. 


To  Wheel  on  a  Movable  Pivot. 

419.  When  the  recruits  wheel  on  a  halted  pivot,  with  accuracy,  the 
rank  will  be  taught  to  wheel  on  a  movable  pivot. 

420.  For  this  purpose,  in  order  to  cause  the  rank  on  the  march  to 
change  direction  on  the  reverse  flank,  the  instructer  commands, 

1.  Right  (or  left)  wheel.     2.  March. 

421.  The  first  command  shall  be  given,  when  the  rank  is  within  tw» 
paces  of  the  wheeling  poiot. 

422.  At  the  second  word,  the  wheel  will  he  executed  as  on  a  halted 
pivot,  except  that  the  touch  of  the  elbows  will  be  towards  the  marching 
flank  ;  that  the  pivot  man,  in  lieu  of  turning  in  his  place,  shall  conform  to 
the  movement  of  the  marching  flank,  feel  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  man 
next  to  him,  take  steps  of  seven  inches,  gain  ground  in  advancing,  and 

47 


36  SCHOOL  OF  THE   COMPANY. 

move  on  a  part  of  the  circumference  of  a  small  circle,  so  as  to  clear  the 
wheeling  point,  the  centre  of  the  rank  cuiving  a  little  towards  the  rear. 

423.  The  wheel  being  effected,  the  instructer  shall  command, 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

424.  The  first  word  will  be  pronounced  two  paces  before  the  wheel  is 
finished. 

425.  At  the  second,  to  be  given  at  the  instant  the  wheel  is  effected,  the 
man  directing  the  inarching  flank  will  move  straight  forward,  and  the 
pivot  man,  with  the  other  men  composing  the  rank,  will  resume  the  step 
of  twenty-eight  inches,  directing  the  head  to  the  front. 


To  Change  Direction  on  the  Pivot  Flank. 

426.  This  is  effected  by  the  following  commands  : 

1.  Left  (or  right)  turn.     2.  March. 

427.  The  first  word  shall  be  given  when  the  rank  is  within  two  paces  of 
the  turning  point,  as  above. 

42S.  At  the  second  word,  to  be  given  at  the  instant  when  the  rank  is  to 
commence  turning,  the  guide  will  turn  to  the  left,  (or  right,)  in  marching, 
and,  without  changing  the  cadence,  or  without  lengthening  or  shortening 
the  step,  will  move  forward  in  the  new  direction:  the  rest  of  the  rank  will 
quickly  conform  to  the  new  direction  of  the  guide  ;  and,  for  this  purpose, 
each  man  will  advance  the  shoulder  farthest  from  the  guide,  will  turn  the 
head  and  eyes  to  the  flank  the  guide  is  on,  touch  the  elbow  of  the  next 
man  towards  the  guide,  placing  himself  on  the  same  alignment  with  the 
guide,  and  then  turn  his  head  and  eyes  to  the  front.  Each  man  arrives 
thus,  successively,  on  the  alignment  of  the  guide. 

429.  The  instructer,  having  taught  the  wheel  on  a  fixed,  and  on  a  mov- 
able pivot,  in  common  time,  will  next  cause  the  squad  to  execute  the 
same  movements  in  quick  time,  giving  the  word  quick  before  March. 


SECTION  III. 
SCHOOL    OF    THIS   COMPART?. 

To  Rank,  Size,  and  Form  the  Company. 

430.  THE  men  being  assembled  in  one  rank,  at  shouldered  arms,  and 
naving  quickly  fallen  in,  as  nearly  as  may  be,  according  to  height,  from 
right  to  left,  the  first  sergeant  will  command, 

1.   Company.     2.  Right — face.     3.  Size — march. 

431.  At  the  second  word,  the  whole  rank  will  face  to  the  right ;  at  the 
third,  the  men  will  change  places,  so  that  the  tallest  man  be  on  the  right, 
the  second  tallest  next,  and  so  on  successively  to  the  left.  The  first  ser- 
geant will  then  order, 

1.  Front.     2.  Right — dress. 

432.  The  sergeant  will  then  direct  the  man  on  the  right  to  call  one,  the 
next  two,  and  so  on  alternately  from  right  to  Kit.  This  being  effected,  he 
will  command, 

1.  Form  ranks.     2.  March. 

433.  At  the  word  March,  tin-  even  numl vis  will  step  obliquely  to  the 
right,  and  rear,  so  as  to  cover  the  odd  numbers. 

IM 


SCHOOL   OF  THE  COMPANY.  37 

434.  The  first  sergeant  will  then  divide  the  company  into  two  platoons, 
and  command, 

1.  Second  platoon.     2.  Forward — march.     3.  Halt. 

435  At  the  word  March,  the  second  platoon  will  step  forward  one  pace, 
and  halt. 

436.  The  sergeant  will  then  order, 

1.  Platoons.     2.  Right  and  left — face.     3.  Maiuii. 

437.  At  the  word  face,  the  first  rank  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right, 
and  the  rear  rank  to  the  left.  At  the  word  March,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the 
front  rank  man  of  the  first  platoon  stands  fast,  the  others  closing  upon  him  ; 
the  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  inarch,  successively,  turn  to  the  right,  and 
form  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank.  At  the  word  March,  the  second  platoon 
will  follow  the  directions  given  to  the  first,  except  that  the  front  rank  will 
advance,  followed  by  the  rear  rank,  both  forming  in  front  of  the  first  platoon, 
and  thus  becoming  the  front  rank  of  the  company. 

438.  The  sergeant  will  then  order, 

Front. 

439.  At  which  word  the  whole  will  front,  and  the  company  is  thus 
formed  in  two  ranks,  the  tallest  men  alternately  on  the  right  and  left  of 
the  ranks  to  which  they  belong,  and  the  men  of  the  rear  rank  respectively 
taller  than  their  file-leaders. 

440.  This  being  accomplished,  the  first  sergeant  will  divide  the  company 
into  platoons  and  sections,  and  post  the  non-commissioned  officers  and  pio- 
neer in  the  manner  already  prescribed.  He  will  also  inform  each  man  on 
the  right  and  left  of  each  platoon  and  section,  that  he  is  the  right  or  left 
man  of  that  division. 

441.  If  a  company  has  to  form  suddenly,  the  men  will  fall  in  in  two  ranks, 
and  as  nearly  as  possible  in  the  order  in  which  they  stood  when  the  compa- 
ny was  last  under  arms.  For  this  purpose,  the  first  sergeant  will  always, 
before  dismissing  the  company,  caution  the  men  to  recollect  their  ranks, 
and  the  individuals  who  were  on  their  right  and  left  respectively. 

442.  The  instruction  of  the  company  having  for  its  object  to  prepare  the 
soldiers  for  the  battalion,  the  progressive  nieth^l  and  principles  about  to  be 
prescribed  will  be  strictly  observed. 

443.  The  officer  who  exercises  the  company  is  called  the  instructer 
When  the  captain  is  instructer,  the  next  in  rank  will  perform  his  duties, 
and  be  posted  accordingly. 

444.  The  School  of  the  Company  will  be  divided  into  six  lessons,  and 
each  lesson  into  articles,  as  follows  : 


Lesson  I. 


1.  To  open  ranks.  I  4.  To  close  ranks. 

2.  Alignment  of  open  ranks.  5.  Alignment  of  closed  ranks. 

3.  Manual  exercise  and  loadings. 


Lesson  II. 


1.  To  load  in  quick  time.  I  4.  To  fire  by  file. 

2.  To  load  in  quickest  time.  5.  To  fire  to  the  rear. 

3.  To  fire  by  company.  [ 


Lesson  III. 


1.  To  advance  in  line. 

2.  To  halt  the  company  advancing  in 

line,  and  to  align  it. 

3.  Oblique  march  in  line. 

£ 


4.  To  mark  time  ;  to  march  in  quiet 

time  ;  and  the  back  step,  &c 

5.  To  retire  in  line. 


38  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON   I. 

Lesson  IV. 


1.  Td  march  by  a  flank. 

2.  To  change  direction  by  file. 

3.  To  halt  the  company,  marchingby 

a  flank,  and  to  front  it. 


4.  To  form  line  by  file  on  the  right 

or  left. 

5.  To  form  company,  platoons  or  sec- 

tions, marching  by  a  flank. 


Lcssotl  V. 

1.  To  break  to  the  right  or  left.  I  4.  To  halt  the  column. 

2.  To  march  in  column.  5.  To  form  line  to  the  right  or  left. 

3.  To  change  direction. 


Lesson  VI. 

1.  Diminishing  and  increasing  front  I  3.  Diminishing  and  increasing  front. 

by  files.  4.  Countermarch. 

2.  To  march  by  the   route  step  ;  to    5.  To  form  line  on  the  right  or  left, 

change  direction  thus  march-  |  from  column, 

ing ;  to  break  off  files,  and  move 
them  up  to  the  front. 


445.  The  instructer  will  number  the  files  from  right  to  left,  that  each 
man  may  know  his  number  in  his  rank.  The  instructer  must  be  clear  and 
concise  in  his  explanations  ;  he  will  cause  the  captain  to  rectify  the  errors 
committed  by  the  soldiers,  after  pointing  them  out  to  him,  if  not  observed ; 
he  himself  will  not  rectify  them,  unless  the  captain  has  not  well  compre- 
hended him,  or  has  imperfectly  executed  his  orders. 

446.  Steadiness  and  calmness  being  the  essential  requisites  in  him  who 
commands,  and  those  who  execute,  the  instructer  will  exemplify  these  in 
his  own  person. 


LESSON  I. 

ARTICLE  FIRST. 
To  Open  Ranks. 

447.  The  company  being  drawn  up  at  ordered  arms,  to  open  ranks,  the 
instructer  will  cau.se  the  guide  of  the  left  to  post  himself  on  the  left  of  the 
rear  rank,  and  will  then  command, 

1.  attention.      2.  Company.      3.  Shoulder — arms.      4.  Bear  rank — 
open  order. 

448.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  covering  sergeant,  and  the  guide  of  the 
left  of  the  company,  will  take  six  back  steps,  of  fourteen  inches  each,  and 
align  themselves  parallel  to  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

449.  The  instructer  will,  at  the  same  time,  proceed  to  the  right  flank,  to 
ascertain  whether  they  are  parallel  to  the  front  rank,  and,  if  necessary,  will 
qr.ickly  rectify  their  positions,  and  then  command, 

5.  March. 

450.  At  this  word,  the  front  rank  will  stand  fast 

451.  The  rear  rank  will  step  back  in  common  time,  without  counting  the 
steps,  and  will  place  itself  on  the  alignment  marked  out  for  it,  conforming 
to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  390. 

452.  The  covering  sergeant  will  align  the  rear  rank  on  the  guide  <>f  the  left 

453.  The  file-closers  will  Btep  back  at  the  w  ord  M  ahcm,  and  align  them- 
selves at  their  proper  distance  from  the  rear  rank. 

454.  The  coveriug  sergeant  having  aligned  the  rear  rank,  the  instructer 


will  command, 


6.  Front. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   COMPANY— LESSON    I.  38 

455.  The  instructer,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  examine  the  position 
of  the  hody,  and  of  the  firelocks,  in  the  tront  rank,  and  will  direct  the 
captain  to  examine  the  rear  rank. 


ARTICLE  SECOND. 


Alignment  of  Open  Ranks. 

456.  The  ranks  heing  opened,  the  instructer  will,  the  better  to  inculcate 
the  principles,  cause  the  men  of  each  rank  to  align  themselves  one  by  one. 

457.  He  will  order  the  three  men  on  the  right  or  left  of  each  rank  to 
march  three  or  four  paces  to  the  front,  and,  having  aligned  them,  will 
command, 

By  file,  right  (or  left) — dress. 

458.  At  this  command,  the  soldiers  of  each  rank  will  move  up  successively 
to  the  alignment,  each  allowing  the  next  man  towards  the  flank  of  the 
alignment  to  precede  him  two  paces. 

459.  Successive  alignments  having  habituated  the  soldiers  to  align  them- 
selves correctly,  the  instructer  will  cause  entire  ranks  to  align  to  the  front 
and  rear,  in  parallel  and  oblique  directions,  always  placing  three  men  as  a 
base  of  alignment  for  each  rank.     To  effect  this,  he  will  command,     ,  .   ^ 

Right  (or  left) — dress;  or,  it  may  be,  Right  (or  left)  backward  .dress. 

460.  In  oblique  alignments  at  open  order,  the  rear  rank  need  not  endeav- 
or to  cover  their  file-leaders,  since  the  object  of  this  instruction  is  to  exer- 
cise the  soldiers  in  aligning  themselves  correctly  in  their  respective  ranks 
in  every  direction. 

461.  In  these  various  alignments,  the  instructer  will  superintend  the 
front,  and  the  captain  the  rear  rank,  placing  themselves  for  that  purpose 
on  the  flank  of  the  alignment. 

462.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  soldiers  will  conform  the  line  of  their 
shoulders  to  the  new  direction  of  their  rank,  and  will  place  themselves  on 
the  alignment,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed.  Nos.  381,  390,  accord- 
ing as  the  new  direction  may  be  to  the  front  or  rear  of  the  original  position 
of  the  rank. 

463.  After  each  alignment,  the  instructer  and  the  captain  will  pass  along 
the  rank,  inspect  the  position  of  the  body,  and  that  of  the  firelocks,  in  order 
to  accustom  the  soldiers  not  to  be  negligent  in  these  respects. 


ARTICLE  THIRD. 

.  Manual  Exercise  and  Loadings. 

464.  The  ranks  being  open,  the  instructer  will  place  himself  in  front 
of  the  right  flank,  so  as  to  see  the  two  ranks,  and  order  the  following 
exercises  :  . 


1.  Present  arms. 

2.  Shoulder  arms. 

3.  Order  arms. 

4.  Shoulder  arms. 

5.  Trail  arms. 

6.  Pile  arms. 

7.  Take  arms. 

8.  Shoulder  arms. 
9    Support  arms. 

10    C  irry  arms. 


11.  Fix  bayonet. 

12.  Arms  port. 

13.  Shoulder  arms. 

14.  Charge  bayonet. 

15.  Shoulder  arms. 

16.  Unfix  bayonet. 

17.  Secure  arms. 

18.  Shoulder  arms. 

19.  Load  by  twelve  commaiais 

51 


40  SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON   I. 

465.  The  instructor  will  strictly  observe  that  the  positions  of  the  body, 
feet,  limbs  and  firelocks  be  always  exact ;  that  the  motions  be  smartly  ex- 
ecuted and  close  to  the  body,  and  that  they  be  not  slurred  over,  as  by  sleight 
of  hand. 


Remwks  on  Arms  Pent,  Charge  Bayonet,  and    Trail 
Arms. 

466.  When  a  battalion  or  line  is  to  charge  bayonet,  the  whole  arc,  in  the 
first  instance,  to  come  to  Arms — port,  and  advance  at  a  firm,  quick  step, 
but  in  the  most  perfect  order  possible,  until  they  reach  the  enemy.  (See 
No.  545.) 

467.  It  is  at  that  instant  that  the  front  rank  are  necessarily  to  bring  their 
firelocks  clown  to  the  charging  position,  and  the  whole  are  to  press  forward 
with  the  utmost  energy.  The  enemy  being  routed,  it  will  depend  on  the 
officer  commanding  to  give  the  word  Halt;  when  the  front  rank  will  re- 
sume the  position  of  Arms — port,  and  proceed  as  may  be  afterwards  direct- 
ed. But  the  word  Halt  is  on  no  account  to  be  given  during  a  charge,  or  as 
preparatory  to  the  front  rank  bringing  the  firelock  down  to  the  charging 
position.  It  is,  therefore,  to  be  understood,  that,  in  the  charge,  or  quick 
attack  upon  the  enemy  with  fixed  bayonets,  either  previous  to,  or  after  fir- 
ing, (which  usually  commences  at  a  distance  of  one  hundred,  or  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  yards,  as  the  ground  may  permit,)  the  charging  position  of 
the  front  rank  is  to  be  assumed  only  at  the  instant  of  attack  or  defence. 

468.  In  cases  such  as  passing  through  a  thick  wood,  shouldered  arms  is 
impracticable  ;  and  a  soldier  has  sometimes  recourse  to  his  firelock  as  a 
necessary  support,  as  in  climbing  the  steep  sides  of  an  eminence,  and  cross- 
ing ditches  ;  it  becomes,  therefore,  necessary  that  the  instructor  should 
sometimes  make  the  soldiers  practise  the  motions  of  Arms — port,  and  of 
Trail — arms,  whilst  marching,  to  teach  them  to  avail  themselves  most  ad- 
vantageously of  their  firelocks,  under  different  circumstances. 


ARTICLE  FOURTH. 

•     To  Close  Ranks. 

469.  Having  executed  the  manual  exercise  and  loadings,  the  instructer 
will  cause  the  ranks  to  close.     To  effect  this,  he  will  command, 

1.  Rear  rank,  close  ordei'.     2.  March 

470.  At  the  word  March,  the  rear  rank  will  close  in  common  time,  each 
man  covering  his  file-leader. 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 

Alignment  of  Closed  Ranks. 

471.  The  ranks  being  closed,  the  instructor  will  exercise  the  company 
in  taking  parallel  and  oblique  alignments  to  the  right  and  left-,  to  the  front 
and  rear,  always  previously  placing  three  files  as  a  base  line  of  alignment. 
He  will  give  the  commands  directed  in  No.  £59. 

472.  In  aligning  at  close  ofdeTj  the  captain  will  superintend  the  align- 
ment of  the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  that  of  the  cear  rank: 
they  '■■■ill  accustom  themselves  to  judge  accurately  of  the  alignment,  by  the 
line  of  the  eyes  and  shoulders,  and  by  glancing  along  the  trout  and  rear  of 
the  rank. 

473.  When  (he  captain  sees  Iho  whole,  nearly,  of  the  front  rank  aligned, 

he  will  command,  Fjiowt;  rectifying,  afterwards,  the  alignment  of  such  as 
require  it,  by  the  means  prescribed,  No.  888.     The  roar  rank  will  conform 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   COMPANY-  LESSON    II.  41 

to  the  alignment  of  the  front  rank,  and  the  covering  sergeant  will  see  that 
this  is  done. 

474.  The  rank  being  steady,  the  instructor  proceeds  to  the  flank,  to  ver- 
ify the  alignment  of  the  ranks  ;  and  will  observe  whether  the  men  of  the 
rear  rank  correctly  cover  their  file-leaders. 

475.  In  oblique  alignments,  the  instructer  will  cause  to  be  observed  what 
is  prescribed,  No.  462. 

476.  The  file-closers  will  always  place  themselves  two  paces  from  the 
rear  rank. 

477.  To  rest,  the  instructer  will  order, 

1.   Order — arms.     2.  Rest. 

478.  This  shall  take  place  at  the  conclusion  of  each  lesson.  (See  No. 
228.) 


LESSON  II. 

479.  The  instructer,  wishing  to  pass  to  t'*e  second  lesson,  will  com- 
mand, 

1.  Attention.     2.  Company.     3.  Shoulder — arms. 

48'0.  He  will  then  exercise  the  company  in  the  loadings  and  firings,  in 
the  following  order : 


ARTICLE  FIRST. 

To  Load  in  Quick  Time.  • 

481.  Loading  in  quick  time  shall  be  executed  by  the  commands  and 
means  prescribed,  No.  2S1  and  following.  The  instructer  will  cause  this 
to  be  repeatedly  practised,  before  he  proceeds  to  loading  in  quickest  time. 


ARTICLE  SECOND. 

To  Load  in  Quickest  Time. 

482.  This  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  288. 

483.  At  the  first  motion  of  loading  in  quick  and  quickest  time,  the  cap- 
tain and  the  covering  sergeant  will  half  face  to  the  right  with  the  men,  and 
will  front  when  the  man  next  to  them  respectively. casts  about. 

484.  The  instructer  will  see  that,  in  the  loadings,  the  soldiers  conform  to 
the  principles,  prescribed,  Nos.  289,  290 

485.  Loading  in  quickest  time  being  used  in  battle,  it  is  of  importance 
that  it  be  done  expertly  ;  and,  therefore,  the  practice  of  it  is  to  be  particu- 
larly dwelt  on.  When  the  soldiers  are  well  grornded  in  the  principles,  they 
will  be  gradually  brought  to  load  and  fire,  at  least  three  or  four  times  in  a. 
minute,  with  regularity  and  facility. 


ARTICLE  THIRD. 

To  Fire  by  Company. 

486.  To  effect  this,  the  instructer  will  cemmand, 

1.  Fire  by  Company.     2.   Commence  Firing. 

487.  At  the  first  word,  the  captain  will  retire  quickly  behind  the  cent* ! 
of  hi?  company,  tw?  paces  in  rear  of  the  file-closers. 

E*  53 


42  SCHOOL   OF   THE  COMPANY— LESSON   II. 

488.  The  covering  sergeant  will  fall  back  to  the  alignment  of  the  file- 
eiosers,  opposite  his  interval :  this  rule  will  .be  general  for  the  covering 
sergeant  during  the  firings. 

489.  At  the  second  command,  the  captain  will  order, 

1.   Company.     2.  Ready.     3.  Aim.     4.  Fihe.     5.  Load. 

490.  At  the  word  Load,  the  soldiers  will  bring  down  their  firelocks  to 
the  primiLg  position,  load,  and  shoulder;  the  captain  will,  by  the  same  com>- 
mands,  cause  the  company  to  fire  again,  which  will  be  continued  until  a 
ruffle  cause  the  firing  to  cease. 

491.  The  captain  will  sometimes  cause  his  company  to  fire  obliquely  to 
the  right  and  to  the  left,  taking  care  to  give  the  caution,  Right  (or  left)  ob- 
lique, after  the  word  Ready,  and  before  the  word  Aim.  He  will  also, 
sometimes,  make  his  men  Recover — arms,  after  aiming,  in  order  to  accus- 
tom them  to  steadiness,  and  attention  to  the  command. 


ARTICLE  FOURTH. 

To  Fire  by  File. 

492.  To  effect  this,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.  Fire  by  File.     2.   Company.     3.  Ready.     4.   Commence — fiiung. 

493.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  will  retire  one  pace  in  rear  of  the 
rear  rank,  opposite  his  interval. 

494.  The  third  and  fourth  commands  will  be  executed  as  prescribed, 
No.  311  and  following. 

495.  The  right  hand  file  will  commence  the  firing,  the  next  file  will 
aim  at  the  instant  the  first,  which  has  just  fired,  primes,  and  so  on  to  the 
left ;  but  this  progression  will  take  place  only  for  the  first  fire,  every  man 
afterwards  loading  and  firing,  without  waiting  for  others,  and  conformine 
to  No.  312. 

496.  The  instructer  will  cause  the  firing,  whether  by  file  or  company, 
o  cease  by  a  ruffle,  at  the  commencement  of  which  the  firing  will  cease. 
Those  who  have  just  fired  will  load  and  shoulder  ;  if  in  the  position  of 
ready,  they  will  front,  half-cock,  and  then  shoulder  at  the  same  time  ;  if 
aiming,  they  will  recover  of  their  own  accord,  front,  half-cock,  and 
shoulder. 

497.  The  ruffle  will  always  be  followed  by  a  tap  of  the  drum  :  at  this  sig- 
nal, the  captain,  as  also  the  covering  sergeant,  will  quickly  resume  their 
places  in  line,  and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  alignment  of  the  ranks. 

498.  In  this  school,  the  instructor  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease  by  the 
command, 

Ruffle. 

499.  At  the  word  Ruffle,  the  firing  will  cease  ;  to  ensure  which,  every 
file-closer  will  call  out,  Cease  firing. 

BOO.  The  tap  of  the  drumstick,  as  a  signal  for  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant  to  resume  their  places  in  line,  may.be  indicated  by  the  command 
Taj>  from  the  instructer,  when  he  sees  arms  shouldered. 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 

To  Fire  to  the  Rear. 

501.  To  effect  this,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1    yire  to  the  rear.     2.   Company.     3.  About — face. 

502.  At  tin   word  .'llhiut,  the  captain  will  place  himself  facing,  and  cIosl 
ag  just,  the  >•  gh    hand  front  rank  man  of  his  company  ;   (he  covering  ser- 

51 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON   III.  43 

geant  and  file-closers  will  pass  quickly  through  the  interval  of  the  captain, 
placing  themselves  facing  to  the  rear,  two  paces  from  the  front  rank,  and 
opposite  to  their  respective  places  in  line. 

508.  At  the  word  face,  the  captain  will  occupy  his  interval  in  line, but 
place  himself  in  the  rear  rank,  now  become  front ;  and  the  covering  ser- 
geant will  place  himself  in  the  front  rank,  now  become  rear,  covering  the 
captain. 

504.  The  company  being  faced  to  the  rear,  the  instructer  will  cause  the 
firings  to  be  executed  by  the  commands  prescribed  in  the  preceding  ar- 
ticle. 

505.  Firing  by  file  will  commence  from  the  left  of  the  company,  now 
become  the  right. 

506.  To  front  the  company,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.   Company.     2.  About — face. 

507.  At  the  word  About,  the'eaptain,  covering  sergeant  and  file-closers 
will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  above. 

508.  At  the  word  face,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  resume  their 
places  in  line. 

Remarks  on  the  Firings. 

509.  The  instructer  will  accustom  the  ranks  to  lower  the  muzzle  a  lit- 
tle under  the  level,  in  taking  aim. 

510.  The  instructer  will  direct  the  captain  to  make  a  small  pause  be- 
tween the  words  airji  and  fire,  to  enable  the  troops  to  aim  well. 

511.  The  instructer  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the  right  flank,  so  as  to 
command  a  view  of  the  ranks,  in  order  to  observe  such  faults  as  may  be 
committed  ;  he  will  charge  the  captain  and  file-closers  to  report  to  him 
such  as  are  found  to  load  or  fire  awkwardly ;  these  will  be  remanded  to  the 
School  of  the  Soldier. 

512.  The  instructer  will  cause  the  soldiers  to  observe  the  utmost  steadi- 
ness and  calmness,  during  the  firings,  consistently  with  the  requisite  viva- 
city of  execution. 

513.  In  the  firings,  he  will  lay  it  down  as  a  general  principle,  that  the 
left  heel  is  always  to  turn  on  the  same  spot,  in  order  that  the  alignment  of 
ranks,  and  the  covering  of  files,  may  be  maintained;  and,  after  the  firing, 
he  will  ascertain,  by  inspecting  the  alignment,  whether  this  principle  has 
been  observed. 

514.  The  instructer  will  add  to  these  remarks  all  those  in  Nos.  316,  317 
319. 

515.  When  the  company  fires  with  cartridges,  the  instructer  will  cause 
the  ranks,  in  close  order,  to  spring  ramrod,  to  ascertain  whether  there  may 
not  be  three  charges  in  the  firelock ;  in  which  case,  he  will  cause  them  to 
be  drawn. 


LESSON  III. 

ARTICLE  FIRST. 

To  .Advance  in  Line. 

516.  The  company  being  drawn  up,  correctly  aligned,  the  instructer  will 
place  himself  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  face  to  him, 
and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation  of  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant. 

517.  He  will  previously  assure  himself  that  the  shoulders  of  the  captain, 
and  9-1  the  covering  sergeant,  are  perfectly  in  the  line  of  direction  of  their 
re->p;ctive  ranks,  and  that  they  correctly  cover. 

55 


44  SCHOOL   OF  THE   COMPANY— LESSON    III. 

518.  The  instructor,  having  aligned  himself  on  the  directing  file,  will 
command, 

1.   Company— forward. 

519.  At  this  command,  a  sergeant,  previously  selected,  will  advance  six 
paces  in  front  of  the  captain  ;  the  instructer,  placed  as  just  described,  will 
correctly  align  this  sergeant  on  the  prolongation  of  the  directing  file. 

520.  The  sergeant,  placed  six  paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  being  charg- 
ed with  the  direction,  will  take  two  points  on  the  ground,  in  the  line  pass- 
ing from  himself,  between  the  heels  of  the  instructer. 

521.  This  arrangement  made,  the  instructer  will  command, 

2.  March. 

522.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  step  off  smartly  :  the  sergeant 
charged  with  the  direction  will  maintain,  with  the  greatest  precision,  the 
length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  march  in  the  direction  of  the  two  points  he 
has  chosen  between  himself  and  the  instructer  ;  take,  as  he  advances,  and 
always  before  he  arrives  at  the  nearest  point,  new  points,  which  must  be 
exactly  in  the  prolongation  of  the  two  first,  and  fifteen  or  twenty  paces 
from  each  other  :  the  captain  will  constantly  march  in  the  trace  of  the  di- 
recting sergeant,  keeping  always  six  paces  from  him  :  the  soldiers  will 
keep  the  head  direct  to  the  front,  touch  lightly  the  elbow  towards  the  file 
of  direction,  and  conform  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  the  march  to  the 
front  in  Nos.  335,  &c. 

523.  The  front  rank  man,  next  to  the  captain,  will  be  particularly  care 
ftil  never  to  be  mere  advanced  than  he  ;  and,  for  this  purpose,  will  always 
keep  the  line  of  his  shoulders  a  little  in  rear,  but,  at  the  same  time,  in  a  di- 
rection parallel  to  those  of  the  captain. 

■  524.  The  rank  of  lile-closers  will  march  two  paces  in  rear  of  the   rear 
rank. 

525.  If  the  soldiers  lose  the  step,  the  instructer  will  command, 

Step. 

526.  At  this  command,  the  soldiers  glance  to  the  directing  sergeant,  take 
up  the  step,  and  turn  the  head  again  immediately  to  the  front. 


Remarks  on  the  March  in  Line. 

527.  If  the  company  be  undergoing  a  course  of  elementary  instruction, 
the  instructer  will  post  the  captain  'and  covering  sergeant,  sometimes  on 
the  r'gnt,  and  sometimes  on  the  left  of  the  company. 

52».  The  directing  sergeant  having  the  greatest  influence  on  the  march 
of  the  company,  the  instructer  shall  appoint  for  this  important  duty,  such 
only  as  are  perfectly  confirmed  in  the  precision  of  the  step,  the  habit  of 
maintaining  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders,  and  of  prolonging,  without 
deviation,  a  given  direction. 


ARTICLE  SECOND. 

To  Halt   tlie    Company  Advancing  in  Line,   and  to 
Align  it. 

532.  To  halt  the  company,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt. 

533.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt  ;  the  directing  ser- 
geant will  remain  in  front,  unless  the  instructer,  not  wishing  to  continue 
The  march,  orders  him  to  retire  to  his  place  in  line. 

534.  The  companj  being  halted,  the  instructer  will  make  the  three  til>s 
nearest  the  directfrg  flank  advance,  and  will  align  the  company  on  mem, 

5(i 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   COMPANY— LESSON   III.  45 

as  a  base,  or  he  may  confine  himself  to  rectifying  the  alignment.  In  the 
last  case,  the  instructer  will  command,  Rectify  the  alignment ;  the  captain 
will  immediately  glance  to  the  rank,  and  rectify  the  alignment,  conforming 
to  what  is  prescribed.  No.  388. 


ARTICLE  THIRD. 


Oblique  March  in  LAne. 

535.  The  company,  marching  to  the  front  in  line,  will  oblique  by  the  fol- 
lowing commands  Irom  the  instructer  : 

1.  Right  (or  left)  oblique.     2.  March. 

536.  At  the  second  command,  to  be  given  as  prescribed,  Nos.  155,  156, 
the  company  will  oblique  ;  the  directing  sergeant  will  give  his  utmost  at- 
tenrion  in  maintaining  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders,  and  to  oblique  with 
a  uniform  movement  and  step  ;  the  captain  will  conform  his  march  to  that 
of  the  directing  sergeant ;  the  soldiers  will  keep  up  the  light  touch  of  the 
elbow  towards  the  directing  flank,  and  carefully  observe  the  principles  pre- 
scribed, No.  336.  The  man  next  the  captain  must  be  careful  not  to  be 
more  advanced  than  he. 

537.  To  resume  the  march  to  the  front,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

538.  At  the  word  March,  which  will  be  pronounced  at  the  moment  the 
foot  is  coming  to  the  ground,  the  company  will  resume  the  march  to  the 
front,  the  instructer  will  spring  forward,  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in  front 
of  the  captain,  face  to  the  rear,  place  himself  correctly  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant,  and,  by  signal,  place  the  directing 
sergeant  on  that  line,  should  he  happen  to  be  either  on  the  right  or  left  ot 
it;  the  directing  sergeant  will  immediately  take  two  points  on  the  ground, 
between  himself  and  the  instructer,  taking  afterwards  new  points,  as  be 
advances,  as  explained,  No.  522. 


Remarks  on  the  Oblique  tilkrch. 

(Omitted.)  ■    ' 

ARTICLE  FOURTH. 

To  Mark  Time,  March  in  Quick  Time,  Side  Step,  Step- 
ping Short,  and  Back  Step. 

543.  These  will  severally  be  practised  by  the  commands,  and  according 
to  the  principles,  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Soldier. 


Remarks  on  Quick  Time. 

544.  The  instructer  ought  not  to  exercise  the  men  in  marching  in  quick 
time,  till  they  are  thoroughly  confirmed  in  the  length  and  cadence  of  the 
step  in  common  time  ;  and  he  will  then  endeavor  to  render  it  familiar  and 
easy  to  them  to  take  one  hundred  and  twenty  steps  in  a  minute,  to  keep 
the  bodv  upright,  and  to  be  as  calm  as  in  marching  in  common  time.  (See 
No.  357.) 

545.  In  the  last  fifteen  or  twenty  steps  of  a  charge,  and  in  other  circum 
stances  requiring  great  celerity  of  movement,  troops  having  a  front  not  ex- 
ceeding that  of  a  battalion  may  quicken  the  march  to  the  rate  of  one  hun- 
dred and  fifty  steps  in  a  minute  for  a  limited  time  ;  but  as  a  line  marching 
?/  thi?  rate  foi  more  t\an  one  hundred  paces  would  be  liable  to  break,  this 

57 


46  SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSOR    IV. 

measure  of  acceleration  will  not  be  considered  a  prescribed  head  of  instruc- 
tion, and  consequently  the  troops  are  to  be  exercised  in  the  quick  time  of 
one  hundred  and  twenty  steps  in  a  minute. 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 

To  Retire  in  Line. 


546.  The  company  being  halted  and  aligned,  the  instructer,  wishing  it  to 
retire,  will  command, 

1.   Company.     2.  About — face. 

547.  The  company  having  faced  about,  the  instructer  will  step  quickly 
to  the  front  of  the  directing  file,  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed, 
No.  516. 

548.  Tho  instructer,  being  correctly  placed  on  the  prolongation  of  the 
directing  file,  will  command, 

3.    Company— forward. 

549.  At  this  command,  the  directing  sergeant  will  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed,  Nos.  518,  519,  with  this  difference,  that  he  posts  himself  six 
paces  in  front  of  the  file-closers. 

550.  The  covering  sergeant  will  post  himself  in  the  alignment  of  the 
file-closers,  opposite  his  interval,  and  the  captain  will  take  his  place  in  the 
rear  rank,  now  become  front. 

551.  This  disposition  being  made,  the  instructer  will  command, 

4.  March. 

552.  At  this  command,  the  directing  sergeant,  the  captain,  and  the  sol- 
diers, will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  Ncs.  522,  523. 

553.  With  the  exception  of  the  back  step,  the  instructer  will  cause  the 
company  retiring  to  execute  all  that  has  been  prescribed  for  advancing  in 
line.     The  commands  and  means  of  execution  will  be  the  same. 

554.  When  the  instructer,  having  halted  the  company,  wishes  to  align 
it,  he  will  front  it  by  the  Commands, 

F.   Company.     2.  About — face; 
and  the   captain  and  covering  sergeant,  having  faced  about,  will  resume 
their  posts. 

555.  The  instructer  may  then  order  the  three  files  nearest  the  directing 
flank  to  advance,  as  a  base  of  alignment,  or  he  may  confine  himself  to  the 
rectification  of  the  alignment,  conforming,  in  either  case,  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed, No.  534. 


LESSON  IV. 

ARTICLE  FIRST. 

To  March  by  a  Flank. 

556.  The  company  being  in  line  at  a  halt,  the  instructer,  wishing  it  to 
march  by  the  right  flank,  will  command, 

1.    Company.     2.  Right — face.     3.  Forward — march. 

557.  (PI.  V.  Fig.  1.)  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face  to 
the  right;  the  captain  will  also  face,movinjj  one  pace  out  of  the  rank,  so  as 
to  be  on  the  left  .of  the  covering 'sergeant,  who  will  also  face  to  the  ri^ht. 
moving  to  the  front  raiik,  so  as  to  occupy  the  place  out  of  w  huh  the  captain 
has  just  moved. 

558.  At  the  word  MARCH,  the  company  will  stopoff,  smartly,  in  common 
time  ;  tin'  covering  sergeant,  placed  before  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  front 

58 


Plate  V. 


School  of  the  Company. 


vmm- 


///' 


&7 


** 


to  »5^ 

i •  %\ 


M 


if 


\ 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   COMPANY— LESSON   IV.  47 

rank,  and  the  captain,  placed  at  the  side  of  the  covering  sergeant,  will 
march  straight  forward.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  march  abreast  of 
their  file-leader,  and  keep  the  face  direct  to  the  front;  the  file-closers  will 
march  opposite  their  respective  places  in  line. 

559.  The  instructer  will  see  that  the  rules  of  marching  by  a  flank  are 
observed,  placing  himself,  during  the  march,  as  prescribed,  Nos.  370,  371, 

560.  The  instructer  will  cause  the  company  to  march  by  the  left  flank, 
by  the  commands  prescribed  for  marching  by  the  right,  substituting  the 
word  left  for  that  of  right. 

561.  At  the  instant  the  company  faces  to  the  left,  the  guide  of  the  left 
will  place  himself  before  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  ;  the  captain 
will  go,  quickly,  to  the  left,  placing  himself  on  the  right  of  the  guide ;  the 
covering  sergeant  will  post  himself  in  the  front  rank,  occupying  the  place 
left  by  the  captain. 


ARTICLE  SECOND. 

To  change  Direction  by  File. 

562.  (PI.  V.  Fig.  1.)  The  company  being  faced  to  a  flank,  eithei 
marching,  or  at  a  halt,  the  instructer,  wishing  it  to  wheel  hy  file,  will 
command, 

1.  By  file  right  (or  lift.)     2.  March. 

563.  At  the  word  March,  the  leading  file  will  wheel ;  if  on  the  front 
rank  man,  he  will  not  turn  suddenly,  but  describe  a  small  circle,  shorten- 
ing a  little  the  two  or  three  first  steps,  in  order  to  give  the  rear  rank  man 
time  to  conform  to  his  movement.  If  the -wheel  be  made  on  the  rear  rank 
man,  the  front  rank  man  will  march  the  step  of  twenty-eight  inches  in 
turning,  and  the  man  of  the  rear  rank  conforms  to  his  movement  by  de- 
scribing a  small  circle,  as  has  first  been  explained.  Each  file  will  wheel 
in  succession  on  the  same  ground. 

564.  The  instructer  will  strictly  observe,  that  the  wheel  is  executed  on 
these  principles,  so  that  the  distance  between  the  files  may  always  be  pre- 


ARTICLE  THIRD. 


To  Halt  the   Company  Marching  by  a  Flank,  and  to 
Front  it. 

565.  The  instructer  will  command, 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front. 

566.  The  second  and  third  commands  will  be  executed  as  prescribed, 
Nos.  377,  378.  The  captain  and  covering  sergeant  resume  their  posts  in 
line  at  the  instant  the  company  fronts. 

567.  The  instructer  may  then  cause  the  company  to  take  a  new  align 
ment,  or  direct  the  captain  to  rectify  the  alignment  of  the  company  on  iit 
ground. 


ARTICLE  FOURTH. 

To  form  Line  by  File  on  the  Right  or  Left. 

568.  The  instructer  will  cause  the  company  marching  by  the  right  flank 
to  form  by  file  on  the  right.     To  effect  this,  he  will  command, 
1.   On  right,  by  file  into  line.     2.  March. 


*S  SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON   IV. 

E69.  (PI.  V.  Fig.  2.)  At  the  word  March,  the  rear  rank  will  mart 
time  ;  the  covering  sergeant  and  the  captain  will  turn  to  the  right,  march 
straight  forward,  and  be  halted  by  the  instructer,  when  they  have  passed, 
at  least,  four  paces  beyond  the  rear  rank ;  the  captain  shifting  to  the  right 
of  the  covering  sergeant:  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  will  con- 
tinue marching,  pass  behind  the  covering  sergeant,  turn  to  the  right  when 
beyond  him,  and  move  up  to  his  left;  the  second  man  .of  the  front  rank 
will,  in  the  same  manner,  pass  in  rear  of  the  first,  then  turn  to  the  right, 
and  move  up  to  his  left,  and  so  on,  to  the  last  man  of  this  rank  ;  the  rear 
rank  will  execute  the  movement  in  the  same  manner  as  the  front;  the 
right  hand  man  of  the  rear  rank  will  not  commence  the  movement  till  he 
sees  three  or  four  men  of  the  front  rank  in  line. 

570.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  place  themselves  correctly,  covering 
their  file-leaders,  as  they  move  up,  one  by  one,  into  line. 

571.  The  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  as  the  men  of  the  front  rank 
arrive  on  the  line. 

572.  If  the  company  were  marching  by  the  left  flank,  the  instructer 
would  form  it  by  file  on  the  left  by  the  commands  prescribed,  No.  56S, 
substituting  left  for  right,  and  by  inverse  means ;  the  captain,  on  the  left 
of  the  front  rank,  will  resume  his  place  in  line,  after  the  instructer,  seeing 
the  company  formed,  shall  have  ordered  him  so  to  do. 

573.  The  better  to  make  the  soldiers  comprehend  the  mechanism  of  this 
movement,  the  instructer  will  at  first  make  each  rank  execute  it  separate- 
ly, and  afterwards  the  two  ranks  together,  directing  them  to  form  as  if  each 
rank  were  independent,  but  always  observing  what  has  been  prescribed 
for  the  rear  rank,  relative  to  the  moment  of  cornmencing  the  movement. 

574.  The  instructer  will  follow  up  the  movement,  to  assure  himself  that 
each  file  conforms  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  5b'9. 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 


The  Company  Marching  by  a  Flank,  to  Form  Company, 
Platoons  or  Sections,  on  the  March. 

575.  The  company  supposed  marching  by  the  right  flank,  the  instructer 
will  order  the  captain  to  execute  the  intended  movement.  The  captain 
will  command, 

1.  By  company  into  line.     2.  March. 

576.  At  the  word  March,  the  covering  sergeant  will  continue  to  march 
forward ;  the  soldiers  will  advance  the  right  shoulder,  assume  the  quick 
step,  and  move  diagonally  to  their  respective  places,  observing  to  arrive  on 
the  line  one  after  another. 

577.  As  the  soldiers  come  into  line,  they  will  take  up  the  step  from  the 
covering  sergeant. 

578.  The  men  of  the  rear  rank  will  conform  to  the  movement  of  their 
file-leaders,  whom  they  will  allow  to  precede  them  in  coming  up  into 
line. 

579.  At  the  instant  the  movement  commences,  the  captain  will  face  to 
his  company,  and  conduct  its  execution ;  when  the  company  is  formed  to 
the  front,  he  will  command,  Guide  lejt,  and  then  post  himself  two  paces 
before  the  centre  of  the  company,  front,  and  take  up  the  step  of  the  com- 
pany. 

580.  At  the  word  Guide  left,  the  guide  of  the  left  will  spring  to  the  left 
of  the  front  rank  man,  and  the  covering  sergeant,  who  is  at  the  opposita 
flank,  will  remain  there. 

581.  If  the   company   were  marching  by  the  left  flank,  the  movement 
would  be  excculed  by  the  same  commands,  and  on  the  same  principles 
the  company  being  formed,  the  captain  would  order,  Guide  right. 

62 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON    IV.  4fl 

582.  In  a  column  of  companies,  the  covering  sergeant  of  each  will  be 
always  placed  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank,  and  the  guide  of  the  left  will 
be  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank,  whether  the  column  has  the  right  or  left 
in  front ;  they  will  be  denominated  guide  of  the  right,  and  guide  of  the 
left,  of  the  company,  and  one  of  them  will  be  charged  with  the  direction, 
according  as  the  column  may  be  marching  with  the  right  or  left  in  front. 

583.  If  the  company,  marching  by  a  flank,  is  to  form  platoons,  the  cap- 
tain, by  an  order  to  that  effect  from  the  instructer,  will  command, 

1.  By  platoon  into  line.     2.  March. 

584.  This  movement  is  executed  according  to  the  same  principles  :  the 
captain  will  post  himself  before  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  first 
lieutenant  before  the  centre  of  the  second  platoon ;  and  they  will  com- 
mand, Guide  right,  or,  it  may  be,  Guide  left,  at  the  instant  their  platoon  is 
formed. 

585.  At  the  word  Guide  left,  or  Guide  right,  from  the  chief  of  each  pla- 
toon, the  guide  of  each  would  take  post  on  the  proper  flank,  if  not  already 
there,  passing  by  the  front  rank ;  and  this  is  a  general  rule  for  the  shifting 
of  guides. 

586.  The  guide  of  the  right  of  the  company  will  always  be  the  guide 
of  the  right,  or  of  the  left,  of  the  first  platoon;  and  the  guide  of  the  left  of 
the  company  will  be  the  guide  of  the  right,  or  of  the  left,  of  the  second 
platoon. 

587.  The  company,  marching  by  a  flank,  will  also  be  required  to  form 
sections :  to  effect  this,  the  instructer  directs  the  captain  to  order, 

1.  By  section  into  line.     2.  March. 

588.  This  again  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles ;  and  whether 
the  right  or  left  be  in  front,  the  captain  will  put  himself  in  front  of  the  firf 
section  ;  the  second,  third,  and  first  lieutenants,  respectively,  in  front  of  th 
second,  third,  and  fourth  sections ;  and  each  will  command,  Guide  left,  (o 
right,)  at  the  instant  his  section  is  formed. 

589.  In  column  of  sections,  the  covering  sergeant  becomes  the  guide  ol 
the  first  section  ;  the  second  sergeant,  the  guide  of  the  fourth  section;  and 
the  third  and  fourth  sergeants,  respectively,  the  guides  of  the  second  and 
third  sections. 

590.  Accordingly,  in  a  column  of  platoons  or  sections,  there  shall  be  one 
guide  to  each,  and  he  shall  always  be  guide  of  the  left,  right  in  front,  and 
guide  of  the  right,  left  in  front. 

591.  Whether  it  be  a  column  of  companies,  platoons,  or  sections,  the 
file-closers  will  follow  their  respective  divisions. 

592.  To  cause  a  column,  marching  right  in  front,  to  prolong  itself  in  the 
same  direction,  by  a  file  movement,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.   Column  by  the  right  flank.     2.  By  file  left.     3.  March. 

593.  (PI.  VII.  Fig'.  4.)  At  the  first  command,  chiefs  of  divisions  will 
caution  their  divisions,  that  they  are  to  face  to  the  right ;  the  guide  of  the 
leading  division  will  spring  to  the  right  of  his  division. 

594.  At  the  command  March,  each  division  will  face  to  the  right  in 
marching,  and  wheel  by  file  to  the  left;  the  captain  will  quickly  place 
himself  as  in  file  movements,  and  the  chiefs  of  the  other  divisions, 
shifting  by  the  left,  resume  their  places  as  file-closers. 

595.  The  leading  file  of  each  division  will  unite  in  file  with  the  rear  of 
the  preceding,  and  the  whole  company  thus  march  by  the  right  flank. 

596.  If  the  left  be  in  front,  the  manoeuvre  will  be  executed  by  inverse 
means. 


SO  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON   V. 

LESSON  V. 

ARTICLE    FIRST. 

To  Break  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

597.  To  break  by  platoon  to  the  right,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.  Platoons — right  wheel.     2.  March. 

598.  (PI.  VI.  Fig.  1.)  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  platoons  will 
place  themselves  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their  platoons,  facing 
to  the  rear,  the  chief  of  the  second  platoon  passing,  for  this  purpose,  round 
the  left  flaak  of  the  company. 

599.  At  the  word  March,  the  man  on  the  right  cf  the  front  rank  of 
each  platoon  will  face  to  the  right ;  the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  move 
quickly  by  the  shortest  line  beyond  the  point  where  the  marching  flank  is 
to  rest,  face  to  the  rear,  and  place  himself  so,  that  a  line  drawn  from  him 
to  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  may  be  perpendicular  to  the  line 
of  the  company,  previous  to  wheeling  ;  the  platoons  will  wheel  according 
to  the  principles  prescribed  for  wheeling  on  a  halted  pivot;  and  when  the 
man  who  conducts  the  marching  flank  shall  have  arrived  within  two  paces 
of  the  perpendicular,  the  chief  of  each  platoon  will  command, 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

600.  At  the  second  command,  the  platoons  will  halt ;  the  covering  ser 
geant  will  move,  at  the  same  instant,  to  the  point  where  the  left  of  the  first 
platoon  will  rest ;  the  guide  of  the  left  of  the  company  will  move  to  the 
point  where  the  left  of  the  second  platoon  is  to  rest;  they  must  take  care 
to  leave  between  themselves,  respectively,  and  the  man  on  the  right  of 
their  platoons,  a  sufficient  space  to  contain  the  platoon  ;  the  captain  and  the 
chief  of  the  second  platoon  will  each  align  his  platoon  between  himself  and 
the  pivot  man  who  has  faced  to  the  right. 

601.  The  guide  of  each  platoon  being  established  on  the /perpendicular, 
the  chiefs  of  platoons  will  command, 

3.  Left — dress. 

602.  The  alignment  being  effected,  each  chief  of  platoon  will  command, 
Front,  and  place  himself  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  platoon. 

603.  The  file-closers  will  conform  to  the  movement  of  their  respective 
platoons. 

604.  Platoons  will  break  to  the  left  on  the  same  principles,  but  by  ia- 
versc  means. 


Remarks  on  Breaking  into  Column. 

605\  The  instructer,  placed  in  front  of  the  company,  will  carefully  observe 
whether  the  movements  be  executed  according  to  the  principles  prescribed 
above ;  whether  the  platoons,  alter  breaking  into  column,  arc  placed  on 
lines  perpendicular  to  the  line  previously  occupied  by  the  company, 
and  whether  the  guide,  who  has  moved  to  the  marching  flank  of  his  pla- 
toon, has  left  between  nimself  and  the  man  on  the  right  (or  left)  of  the 
front  rank  sufficient  space  to  contain  the  platoon. 

606.  The  platoons  having  broken,  if  the  guide  of  the  rear  one  do  not  ex- 
actly cover  the  guide  who  precedes  him,  he  must  not  endeavor  to  place 
himself  on  the  direction  till  the  column  is  put  in  march,  unless  the  in- 
structor, V7ishing  immediately  to  form  line,  should  think  proper  to  rectify 
the  direction  of  the  guides,  which  would  be  effected  as  will  he  explained 
in  the  fifth  article  of  (bis  lesson. 

607.  Tin-  Instructer  will  observe, that  (he  man  next  to  the  pivot, who, on 
the  second  command  from  the  instructer, has  faced  to  the  right  or  left,  gains 
ground  a  little  '.o  the  front  in  wheeling,  so  as  to  unmask  the  pivot. 

61 


Plate  VI. 


ichool  of  the  Company. 


Tig.  4. 


•HI 
liar 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON   V.  51 

ARTICLE  SECOND. 

To  March  in  Column. 

608.  The  company  having  broken  into  column  of  platoons  right  in  front, 
the  instructer,  wishing  it  to  advance,  will  move  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  to 
the  front,  facing  to  the  guides,  and  place  himself  correctly  on  their  direc- 
tion, after  having  ordered  the  leading  guide  to  take  points  on  the  ground  to 
march  on. 

609.  The  instructer  thus  placed,  the  guide  of  the  leading  platoon  will 
take  two  points  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the  instructer,  on  the 
line  passing  from  himself  between  the  heels  of  the  latter,  who  will  then 
command, 

1.   Column— forward.     2.   Guide  left.     3.  March. 

610.  At  the  word  March,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoons, 
the  whole  will  step  forward  smartly  together. 

611.  The  soldiers  will  touch  lightly  the  elbow  towards  the  guide,  ob- 
serving on  the  march  the  principles  prescribed,  No.  336  and  following. 

612.  The  man  of  each  platoon  next  the  guide  shall  always  keep  six 
Inches  from  him,  in  order  to  avoid  pushing  him  out  of  the  direction,  and 
will  be  also  careful  never  to  be  more  advanced  than  the  guide. 

613.  The  leading  guide  will  observe,  with  the  greatest  precision,  the 
length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  maintain  the  direction  of  the  march  by 
the  means  prescribed,  No.  522. 

614.  The  following  guide  will  march,  accurately,  in  the  trace  of  the 
leading  guide,  observing  to  keep  a  distance  equal  to  the  front  of  his  own 
platoon  from  him,  maintaining  the  same  step  as  that  of  the  guide  who  pro 
cedes  him. 

615.  If  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  lose  his  distance,  which  can 
arise  only  from  his  own  carelessness,  he  will  regain  it  gradually,  either  by 
insensibly  lengthening  or  shortening  the  step. 

616.  If  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon,  neglecting  to  follow  exactly  the 
trace  of  the  first,  should  oaf  3  th.own  himself  without  the  line  "*"  direction, 
he  will  remedy  this  tkult  by  advancing,  more  or  iuss,  the  left  shoulder,  so 
as  to  regain  the  direction,  gradually,  by  the  direct  step,  in  arder  to  cvoid 
the  inconvenience  of  the  oblique  step,  which  would  occasion  a  loss  of  dis- 
tance ;  if,  on  the  contrary,  the  guide  had  thrown  himself  within  the  direc- 
tion, he  would  remedy  that  fault  by  inverse  means  ;  in  either  supposition, 
the  chief  of  platoon  will  see  that  tho  soldiers  conform  to  the  movement  of 
the  guide. 

Remarks  on  the  March  and  Direction  in  Column. 

620.  The  guide  of  each  platoon  will  be  responsible  for  the  distance, 
«tep,  and  direction ;  the  chief  of  platoon,  for  the  maintenance  of  order  and 
uniformity  in  his  platoon,  to  which  he  will  frequently  turn. 

621.  The  instructer,  placed  near  the  pivot  flank,  will  superintend  the 
execution  of  all  the  principles  prescribed  ;  and  he  will  sometimes  place 
himself  in  rear  of  the  guides,  aligning  correctly  on  them,  and  halt  during 
the  march  of  twenty  or  thirty  paces,  to  ascertain  whether  the  leading  guide 
deyiates  from  the  direction,  and  whether  the  following  guide  marches  ex- 
actly in  the  trace  of  the  first. 

622.  Whenever  the  line  breaks  into  column,  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will 
repeat  the  commands  March,  and  Halt,  given  by  the  instructer,  at  the 
moment  they  hear  them,  and  without  waiting  for  each  other ;  they  will 
not  repeat  any  other  command,  but  will  caution  the  men,  if  the  latter  have 
not  heard  the  commands. 

07 


32  SCHOOL  OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON   V. 

ARTICLE  THIRD. 

To  change  Direction  in  Column  at  full  Distance. 

623.  The  column  marching  right  in  front,  the  instructer,  wishing  to 
change  direction,  will  command,  Head  of  column  to  the  left,2x\&  immedi- 
ately afterwards  post  a  marker,  or  place  himself,  at  the  point  where  the 
movement  is  to  commence  ;  the  person  thus  placed  in  the  line  of  direction 
of  the  guide  on  the  pivot  flank,  is  to  have  his  right  shoulder  nearest  to  the 
head  of  the  column. 

624.  The  leading  guide  will  direct  his  march  on  the  instructer  or  mark- 
er, placed  at  the  turning  point,  so  that  his  left  arm  shall  lightly  graze  his 
breast,  and  when  arrived  nearly  abreast  of  him,  the  chief  of  platoon  will 
command, 

1.  Left  turn.    2.  March. 

625.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  guide  is  within  two 
paces  of  the  turning  point. 

626.  At  the  word  March,  to  be  given  at  the  moment  the  guide  arrives 
at  the  turning  point,  the  guide  as  well  as  the  platoon  will  turn  to  the  left, 
conforming  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  428. 

627.  The  guide  of  the  first  platoon,  having  turned,  will  take  points  on  the 
ground  in  the  new  direction. 

628.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  forward ;  its  guide  will 
execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  leading  guide ;  and,  when  arriv- 
ed at  the  turning  point,  the  second  platoon  will  turn  by  the  same  commands 
and  on  the  same  principles  as  the  first. 

629.  In  order  to  change  direction  on  the  reverse  flank,  (opposite  the 
guide,)  the  instructer,  after  giving  a  caution  to  that  effect  to  the  chief  of 
the  first  platoon,  will  immediately  proceed  to  the  point  where  the  change 
of  diiection  is  to  commence,  or  will  detach  a  marker  thither,  placing  him- 
self on  this  marker  as  prescribed  for  changing  direction  on  the  pivot  flank. 

630.  The  guide  of  the  leading  platoon  will  direct  his  march  as  prescrib- 
ed, No.  624;  and,  when  arrived  within  two  paces  of  the  wheeling  point,  the 
thief  of  platoon  will  command,  , 

I.  Eight  wheel.     2.  March. 

631.  (PI.  VI.  Fig.  3.)  At  the  word  March,  given  at  the  instant  the 
guide  shall  arrive  at  the  wheeling  point,  the  platoon  will  wheel  to  the 
right,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  422. 

632.  The  wheel  being  effected,  the  chief  of  platoon  will  command, 

3.  Forward.     4.  March. 

633.  These  commands  will  be  given,  and  executed,  as  prescribed,  Nos. 
424,  425. 

634.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward,  the 
guide  observing  to  direct  himself  on  the  instructer,  or  marker;  this  platoon 
will  wheel  at  the  same  point,  and  by  the  same  commands  and  means,  as 
the  first. 

635.  Changes  of  direction  of  a  column  left  in  front  will  bo  executed  on 
the  same  principles,  and  by  inverse  means. 


Remarks  on  the  Changes  of  Direction  in  Column,  at  full 
Distance. 

636.  It  is  very  important,  for  the  preservation  of  the  distance  and  direc- 
tion, that  all  the  platoons  effect  (heir  change  of  direction  precisely  on  the 
•amc  ground :  it  is  for  this  reason  the  instructer  cught,  previously,  to  place 
himself,  or  a  marker,  at  the  wheeling  point ;  that  die  guides  are  ordered  to 
march  on  the  person  so  posted,  ajid  that  the  chiefs  of  platoons  ought  not  to 
6? 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   COMPANY-^LESSON   V.  53 

commence  the  execution  of  the  movement,  till  the  guide  shall  graze  the 
breast  of  the  person  placed  at  fhe  wheeling  point. 

637.  The  chiefs  of  platoons  ought  to  see  that  their  platoons  arrive  square, 
en  the  ground  where  the  change  of  direction  is  to  take  place  ;  and,  for  this 
purpose,  they  ought  to  face  to  their  platoon,  when  that  which  precedes  is 
beginning  to  turn  or  wheel. 

633.  If,  in  the  changes  of  direction  on  the  reverse  flank,  the  pivot  of  the 
wheeling  platoon  did  not  clear  the  wheeling  point,  the  following  platoon 
would  be  impeded,  and  the  distance  would  be  lost.  To  remedy  this  defect, 
the  pivot  man  is  directed  to  take  steps  of  seven  inches,  in  order  that  the 
succeeding  platoon  may  not  be  impeded  ;  the  chiefs  of  platoon  will  look  to 
the  execution  of  this  principle,  turning  to  their  men,  and  cautioning  the 
pivot  man  to  lengthen  or  shorten  his  step,  as  they  may  deem  it  necessary. 
From  the  nature  of  this  movement,  the  centre  of  the  platoon  ought  to  curve 
a  little  towards  the  rear. 

639.  The  guides  ought  never  to  change  the  cadence  or  length  of  the 
step,  whether  the  change  of  direction  be  made  on  the  pivot,  or  the  reverse 
flank. 

640.  The  instructer  or  marker  at  the  wheeling  point  will  always  present 
the  right  shoulder  towards  the  column,  if  the  right  be  in  front,  or  the  left 
shoulder,  if  the  left  be  in  front,  and  will  place  himself  on  the  prolongation 
of  the  guides.  The  instructer  will  see  that  all  the  principles  prescribed 
above  are  observed ;  that  each  platoon  does  not  commence  the  wheel  till 
the  instant  the  guide  grazes  the  breast  of  the  marker,  and  is  ready  to  pass 
him ;  and  that,  in  changes  of  direction  on  the  reverse  flank,  the  marching 
flank  does  not  describe  too  large  a  circle,  which  would  tend  to  throw  it  out 
of  the  new  direction. 


ARTICLE  FOURTH. 


To  Halt  the  Column. 

641.  To  halt  the  column,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt. 

642.  At  the  word  Halt,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoons,  they 
will  all  halt  at  the  same  time  ;  and  the  guides  will  not  move,  even  though 
they  have  not  their  distance  or  their  direction,  unless  the  instructer,  wish- 
ing to  form  the  line,  think  proper  to  rectify  their  direction,  which  will  be 
effected  as  will  be  prescribed  in  the  following  article. 


Remarks  on  Halting  the  Column. 

643.  If  the  word  Halt  were  not  repeated  with  the  greatest  vivacity,  and 
instantly  executed,  the  distances  would  he  lost. 

644.  If  one  guide,  having  lost  his  distance,  endeavored  to  resume  it 
after  the  word  Halt,  he  would  communicate  his  own  error  to  the  following 
guide,  who,  if  he  had  marched  correctly,  would  then  find  that  his  distance 
was  rendered  inaccurate;  and  if  the  latter,  in  his  turn,  endeavored  to  re- 
sume his  distance,  the  same  movement  would  extend,  successively,  to  the 
rear  of  the  column. 

645.  When  the  instructer,  having  halted  the  column,  does  not  wish  to 
form  it  in  line,  he  might  dispense  with  rectifying  the  direction  of  the 
guides,  which  would  be  sufficiently  exact,  as  well  as  the  distances,  if  the 
leading  guide  and  the  one  following  have  observed  what  is  prescribed, 
Nas.  613,  614. 


SCHOOL    OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON    V. 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 

To  Form  Line  to  the  Right  or  Left,  from  Column  at  full 
Distance. 

646.  The  instructed,  having  halted  the  column,  supposed  right  in  front, 
and  wishing  to  wheel  it  into  line,  will  immediately  proceed  to  the  distance 
of  a  platoon  in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  face  to  him,  and  rectify,  if  requi- 
site, the  position  of  the  following  guide  ;  which  heing  executed,  the  in- 
structor will  command, 

Left — DRES9. 

647.  At  this  command,  which  will  not  he  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  pla- 
toons, each  chief  will  quickly  proceed  about  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide, 
and  will  direct  the  alignment  of  his  platoon  perpendicularly  to  the  direc- 
tion of  the  column. 

648.  (PL  VI.  Fig.  4.)  The  chiefs,  having  aligned  their  respective  pla- 
toons, will  command,  Front,  and  move  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their  platoons. 

649.  This  disposition  made,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.  Left  into  line  wheel.     2.  March. 

650.  At  the  word  March,  briskly  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of  platoons, 
the  man  on  the  left  of  each  platoon  will  face  to  the  left,  and  bear  his  breast 
lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  the  guide  placed  by  his  side,  who  will  not 
move  ;  the  platoons  will  wheel  to  the  left  on  the  principle  of  wheeling  on 
a  halted  pivot,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  607 ;  each  chief  will 
turn  to  his  platoon  to  conduct  the  wheel,  and  when  the  right  of  his  platoon 
arrives  within  two  paces  of  the  line,  he  will  command, 

1.  Platoon.    2.  Halt. 

651.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  having  halted  it,  will  retire  to  the 
rank  of  file-closers. 

652.  The  captain,  having  halted  the  first  platoon,  will  place  himself  on 
the  line,  at  the  point  where  the  right  of  the  company  is  to  rest,  and  imme- 
diately command, 

1.   Company.     2.  Right — dress. 
653?  At  this  command,  the  two  platoons  will  move  up  to  the  alignment ; 
the  man  of  the  first  platoon,  who  is  opposite  the  instructer,  established  on 
the  direction  of  the  guides,  will  lightly  bear  his  breast  against  his  left  arm. 
The  captain  will  align  his  company  on  the  guide  of  the  left. 

654.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  command,  Front. 
The  instructor,  seeing  the  company  aligned,  will  command, 

...  Guides — posts. 

655.  At  this  command,  the  covering  sergeant  and  guide  of  the  left  will 
retire  to  their  posts. 

656.  The  instructer  will  verify  the  alignment,  and,  if  necessary,  will 
cause  the  captain  to  rectify  it. 

657.  To  wheel  to  the  right  into  line,  the  left  being  in  front,  would  be 
executed  on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means;  the  captain,  after 
halting  the  first  platoon,  proceeding  to  the  loft  of  the  company,  to  align 
both  platoons,  and  shifting  to  his  proper  flank  when  the  instructer  gives  thu 
word  Guides — posts. 


Remarks  on  Forming  Line  to  the  Right  or  Left. 

658.  The  instructor  may  dispense  with  commanding  Jti»ht  (or  left)-- 
ra#.89,  previous  to  commanding  Left  (or  right)  into  line  wheel,  unless  it 
70 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON   VI.  55 

may  have  become  necessary,  by  rectifying  the  position  of  the  guides,  that 
the  platoon  should  incline  to  the  right  or  left. 

659.  The  instructer,  previously  to  commanding  Left  (or  right)  into  line 
wheel,  ought  to  see  that  the  rear  platoon  has  its  proper  distance.  This  at- 
tention is  important,  as  it  habituates  the  guides  never  to  neglect  so  very 
essential  a  point. 

660.  As  a  column  of  sections  may,  on  actual  service,  sometimes  be  re- 
quired to  wheel  into  line,  the  instructer  will  execute  the  movement,  oc- 
casionally, as  an  elementary  lesson,  and  on  the  principles  prescribed  above. 

661.  To  effect  this,  the  commands  to  be  given  by  the  instructer  are  the 
same  as  in  the  case  of  a  column  of  platoons,  and  cacrt  chief  of  section,  ex- 
cept the  captain,  after  the  command  Section — halt,  retires  to  the  rank  of 
file-c'osers. 

662.  The  captain  then  aligns  all  the  sections  by  the  commands  prescrib- 
ed, No.  652.  At  the  command  Guides — posts,  the  guide  of  the  second 
section  will  retire  by  the  right  flank,  and  the  guide  of  the  third  section  by 
the  left. 


LESSON  VI.  < 

ARTICLE  FIRST.  I 

Diminishing  and  Increasing  Front  by  Files. 

663.  Files  will  be  broken  off  from  the  pivot  flank  only.  The  company 
marching,  and  supposed  to  constitute  a  part  of  a  column,  right  in  front, . 
and  the  instructer  wishing  to  break  off  files,  he  will  give  a  caution  to  that 
effect  to  the  captain,  who  will  immediately  face  to  his  company,  and  com- 
mand, 

1.   One  file,  from  left  to  the  rear.     2.  March. 

664.  (PI.  XI.  Fig.  2.)  At  the  command  March,  the  first  file  on  the 
left  will  mark  time,  and  the  company  will  continue  to  march  forward  ;  the 
man  of  the  rear  rank  of  that  file  will  move,  so  soon  as  the  rear  rank  of  the 
company  shall  have  passed  him,  to  the  right,  and  will  place  himself  in  rear 
of  the  second  file  from  the  left;  the  man  of  the  front  rank  will,  likewise, 
move  in  rear  of  the  first  file,  at  the  instant  the  rear  of  the  company  shall 
have  passed  him :  each  man  will  move  to  his  place  by  advancing  the  left 
shoulder,  taking  great  care  not  to  lose  distance. 

665.  The  instructer,  wishing  to  break  off  another  file,  will  give  caution 
to  that  effect  to  the  captain,  who  will  give  the  same  commands  as  above. 

666.  At  the  command  March,  from  the  captain,  the  file  already  broken 
off,  advancing  the  left  shoulder,  will  gain  the  space  of  one  file  to  the  right, 
shortening  the  step,  in  order  to  make  room  for  the  new  file  in  its  front;  the 
new  file  will  break  off  in  the  same  manner  as  the  first,  and  place  itself  be- 
tween the  company  and  the  file  first  broken  off. 

667.  The  instructer  will  thus  be  enabled  to  diminish,  successively,  the 
front  of  the  company,  by  as  many  files  as  he  may  judge  necessary. 

668.  The  file-closers  of  the  part  of  the  company  broken  off  will  arrange 
themselves  opposite  the  files  they  cover  in  line. 

669.  The  instructer,  to  cause  files  in  the  rear  to  form  up,  successively, 
will  order  the  captain  to  effect  this  by  the  following  command, 

1.   One  file  into  line.     2.  March. 

670.  At  the  word  March,  the  front  file  of  those  broken  off  will  move  up 
quickly  to  the  front,  and  the  files  in  the  rear  will,  by  bringing  forward  the 
right  shoulder,  incline  the  breadth  of  one  file  to  the  left. 

671.  The  captain,  facing  his  company,  will  see  that  the  movement  is  ex- 
ecuted  according  to  the  prescribed  principles. 

6?2.  (PI.  XL  Fig.  2.)  The  instructer,  having  thus  caused  files  to  break 

71 


50  SCHOOL  OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON    VJ. 

off  and  form  up,  successively,  one  at  a  time,  will  cause  two  or  three  files  to 
break  off  together  ;  the  named  files  will  face  inwards,  mark  time  until  dis- 
engaged from  the  company,  and  then,  wheeling  in  file  to  the  left,  cover  the 
two  exterior  files  of  the  left  flank. 

673.  The  instructor  will  then  order  the  captain  to  cause  two  or  three 
files  at  the  same  time  to  move  to  the  front.  To  effect  this,  the  captain  will 
command, 

1.  Two  (or  three)  files  into  line.    2.  March. 

674.  The  named  files  will  move  up  quickly  over  the  shortest  lines  lead- 
ing to  their  places,  as  ai>ove. 

675.  When  files  are  broken  off,  the  guide  will  close  to  the  right,  as  the 
front  diminishes,  so  as  to  be  always  close  to  the  flank  of  the  company,  from 
which  a  file,  or  files,  have  been  broken  off;  and  he  will  incline  to  the  left  as 
files  are  ordered  to  move  up. 

676.  On  the  same  principles,  the  front  of  platoons  and  sections  may  be 
diminished  ;  and,  if  the  left  be  in  front,  by  inverse  means. 


Remarks  on  Diminishing  and  Increasing  Front  by  Files. 

677.  It  is  of  the  greatest  importance,  with  respect  to  the  preservation  of 
distances  in  a  column  of  route,  composed  of  several  battalions,  to  accustom, 
the  soldiers,  in  the  elementary  lessons,  to  execute  these  movements  with 
great  precision. 

678.  If,  when  new  files  are  broken  off,  they  do  not  step  out  well  in  ob- 
liquing; and  if,  when  moving  up  into  line,  they  do  not  move  quickly,  they 
would,  in  either  case,  stop  the  progress  of  the  following  files,  which  would 
occasion  a  loss  of  distance,  and  a  lengthening  of  the  column. 

679.  The  instructor  will  place  himself  on  the  pivot  flank,  to  assure  him- 
self of  the  exact  observance  of  the  prescribed  principles. 

680.  If  an  actual  necessity  require  a  greater  diminution  of  front  than  six 
files,  a  column  of  companies  may  break  into  pla'oons,  or,  if  already  in 
platoons,  may  break  into  sections,  and,  if  already  in  sections,  it  may  march 
by  a  flank;  in  either  case,  on  the  principles  presciibcd,  No.  592  and  fol- 
lowing. 

681.  In  the  last  case,  (marching  by  a  flank,)  the  reverse,  or  unbroken 
flank,  will  naturally  lead,  and  the  files  broken  off,  if  any,  will  follow  in 
proper  order,  in  the  rear  of  their  respective  divisions,  the  whole  having  pre- 
viously been  ordered  to  march  by  the  cadenced  step. 


ARTICLE  SECOND. 

To  March  in  Column  by  the  Route  Step,  and  to  execute 
the  File  Movements  prescribed  in  the  preceding  Ar- 
ticle. 

682.  The  company  being  halted,  and  supposed  to  form  part  of  a  column, 
the  instructer,  wishing  to  put  it  in  march  by  the  route  step,  will  command, 

1.   Column,  forward.    2.   Guide  left  (or  right.)     3.  Route  st<ji. 
4.  March. 

683.  At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  the  captain,  the  ranks  will  step 
off  together,  the  rear  rank,  in  marching,  taking  the  distance  of  two  pacci 
from  the  front  rank,  which  being  effected,  the  instructer  will  command, 

5.  Ease — arms. 

684.  At  this  command,  the  men  will  carry  their  firelocks  as  prescribed, 
No.  257;  they  will  no  longer  be  required  to  march  with  the  cadenced  -!c  p, 
nor  to  keep  silence;  the  tiles  march  at  ease,  but  the  ranks  must  never 

72 


Plate  VII. 


School  of  (he  Company. 


Fig.  2. 


Pig.  4. 


IP 


^e$t* 


2  4  3  5 


^MIIBIHBHHBBOTBS 

bed  b         S'''e  °/  the  front  runh. 


2D  4°  3  a        i  a 

'"-!',  ij  n  n  n  n  n  n  r?  >.;  ■■!  n  rj  n  n  b 

- — u  Sane  nr.  a  a  a  c  a  a  h  d« 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   COMPANY-  LESSON   VI.  67 

intermix,  and  the  menoi  the  front  rank  must  never  be  farther  advanced  to 
the  front  than  the  guide  who  is  on  the  pivot  flank ;  and  the  rear  rank 
must  keep  at  the  distance  of  about  two  paces  from  the  front  rank. 

685.  TLe  column  marching  with  the  cadenced  step,  the  instructer,  wish- 
ing it  to  march  with  the  route  step,  will  command, 

1.  Route  step.     2.  March. 

686.  At  the  word  March,  the  iront  rank  will  continue  to  march  the 
step  of  twenty-eight  inches ;  the  rear  rank  will,  in  marching,  take  the  dis- 
tance of  about  two  paces  from  the  front  rank ;  the  instructer  will  then 
command,  Ease  arms,  which  will  be  executed  as  just  prescribed. 

687.  The  soldiers  marching  by  the  route  step,  the  instructer  wih  cause 
the  direction  to  be  changed  on  the  pivot,  or  on  the  reverse  flank,  which 
will  be  executed  without  a  command,  and  simply  on  a  caution  from  the 
captain ;  the  rear  rank  will  change  direction  on  the  same  ground  as  the 
front,  conforming,  though  marching  by  the  route  step,  to  the  principles 
prescribed  for  changing  direction  with  closed  ranks  and  cadenced  step, 
with  this  difference,  that,  in  changes  of  direction  on  the  reverse  flank,  the 
pivot  man  will  take  steps  of  fourteen  inches,  in  order  to  clear  the  wheel- 
ing point. 

688.  The  instructer  will  also  direct  the  men  to  be  exercised  in  the  va- 
rious file-movements  detailed  in  the  preceding  article,  and  according  to  the 
principles  therein  prescribed.  He  will  also  sometimes  cause  the  ranks  to 
be  closed,  and,  to  effect  this,  the  captain  will  command, 

1.  Rear  rank,  close  order.     2.  March. 

689.  At  the  word  March,  the  front  rank  will  resume  the  cadenced 
step  ;  the  rear  rank,  and  dso  the  files  broken  off,  will  quickly  close  up,  take 
the  cadenced  step,  and  the  whole  will  shoulder  arms. 

690.  When  the  company,  marching  by  the  route  step,  halts,  the  rear 
rank  will  close  up,  at  the  word  Halt,  and  the  men  will  shoulder  arms ; 
were  the  company  marching  with  closed  ranks  and  arms  supported,  at  tho 
command  Halt,  arms  would  be  carried.  This  rule  is  general,  whatever 
may  be  the  number  of  companies. 

691.  In  this  school,  the  route  step  will  be  the  same  as  in  marching  with 
ranks  closed,  in  common  time.  In  route  marches,  the  approximation  to 
the  same  rate  will  be  as  near  as  the  roads  will  admit. 


ARTICLE  THIRD. 

Diminishing  and  Increasing  Front  of  Columns,  by  Pla- 
toons and  Sections. 


Diminishing. 

692.  (PI.  VII.  Fig.  1.)  The  company  marching  with  the  cadenced 
step,  in  common  time,  and  being  supposed  to  form  a  part  of  a  column,  right 
in  front,  the  instructer,  to  break  into  platoons,  will  give  the  order  for  tho 
purpose  to  the  captain,  who  will  command, 

1.  Break  into  platoons. 
The  captain  will  take  post  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  first  platoon. 

693.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  placed  in  its  rear,  will,  at  this 
eommand,  post  himself  before  its  centre,  where,  when  arrived,  he  will  give 
the  caution,  Mark  ti?nv. 

694.  The  captain  will  then  command, 

2.  March. 
695    The  first  platoon  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward,  and  th 


36  SCHOOL   OF   THE  COMPANY— LESSON    VI. 

covering  sergeant  will  place  himself  on  its  left  flank,  when  that  flank  u 
clear  ot  the  right  of  the  second  platoon. 

696.  At  the  word  March,  from  the  captain,  the  second  platoon  will 
mark  time,  as  previously  cautioned  by  its  chief,  and  will  likewise  oblique 
to  the  right,  on  a  second  caution,  as  soon  as  the  rear  rank  of  the  first  pla- 
toon shall  have  passed  its  front. 

697.  The  guide  on  the  left  of  the  second  platoon,  having  nearly  arrived 
in  the  direction  of  that  of  the  first,  the  chief  of  the  second  will  command, 
Forward,  and,  at  the  instant  the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  covers  the 
guide  of  the  first,  he  will-add,  March. 

698.  The  column  of  platoons,  marching  as  above,  will  he  reduced  to 
section  front  on  the  same  principles ;  the  instructer,  who  gives  the  com- 
mands in  this  case,  substituting  sections  for  platoons,  and  adding  the  word 
March,  when  the  second  and  first  lieutenants  have  cautioned  their  sec- 
tions to  Mark  time. 

699.  At  the  word  March,  from  the  instructer,  the  guide  of  the  first 
platoon  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  the  first  section;  the  guide  of  the 
•econd  platoon  remains  on  the  left  of  the  fourth  section ;  the  third  sergeant 
places  himself  on  the  left  of  the  second  section,  and  the  fourth  sergeant  on 
the  left  of  the  third  section. 


Increasing. 

700.  To  double  the  front  of  the  column  of  sections,  marching  in  common 
time,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.  Form  platoons. 

701.  At  this,  the  captain  and  third  lieutenant,  each,  cautions  his  section 
to  oblique  to  the  right,  and  the  second  and  first  lieutenants,  respectively, 
caution  their  sections  (the  second  and  fourth)  to  march  steadily  forward. 
These  cautions  given,  the  instructer  adds, 

2.  March. 

702.  At  this  word,  which  will  be  repeated  by  the  captain  and  third  lieu- 
tenant, their  sections  oblique  to  the  right,  to  unmask  the  other  sections; 
the  guide  of  the  first  marks  time  until  the  second  section  has  marched  up 
to  him,  when  he  becomes  guide  of  the  first  platoon,  and  the  third  and  fourth 
sergeants  retire  to  their  places  as  file-closers. 

703.  When  the  obliquing  sections  have  nearly  uncovered  those  marching 
to  the  front  direct,  each  chief  of  the  former  will  gWe  the  word  Mark  time, 
and  add,  March,  at  the  instant  the  unmasking  is  complete,  in  order  to  wait 
for  the  other  section,  with  which  it  is  to  unite. 

704.  When  that  section  shall  be  nearly  up,  the  chief  of  the  one  nun  king 
time  will  give  the  word  Forward,  and,  at  the  instant  the  two  sections  are 
ready  to  unite,  the  chief  of  the  platoon  will  add,  March,  and  take  post  in 
front  of  his  platoon.  At  the  same  time,  the  second  and  third  lieutenants  re- 
tire to  their  places  in  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

705.  The  column  marching  in  platoons,  right  in  front,  the  instructer  will 
direct  the  captain  to  form  company  :  the  captain  effects  this  by  the  follow- 
ing commands, 

1.  Form  company.     2.  March. 

706.  This  movement  will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles  prescribed 
for  forming  platoons  frbm  section-.;  the  chief  of  the  obliquing  platoon  (in 
this  case  the  captain)  giving  the  word  Forward^  :wu\  the  captain  the  word 
March  ;  the  covering  sergeant  passes  from  the  left  of  the  first  platoon  to 
die  right  of  the  company,  and  the  guide  of  the  left  remains  in  his  place. 

7"7.  Diminishing  and'  increasing  the  front  of  a  column,  left  in  front,  will 
Uc  executi  i  on  tl  e    ame"  principles,  but  by  inverse  means* 

708.  The  instructer  will  also  exercise  the  company  in  diminishing  and 
*  icreaviOg  front,  by  platoons  and  seetidns,  when  marching  by  the  route 
7(5 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   COMPANY— LESSON   VI.  5fi 

step,  which  will  be  effected  by  the  same  commands  and  means,  as  when 
marching  with  the  cadenccd  step,  with  this  difference,  that,  in  the  division 
which  obliques,  each  man  will  half-face  to  the  right,  or  half-face'  to  the 
left,  instead  of  maintaining  the  squareness  of  the  shoulders. 

709.  The  instructer,  who  represents  the  colonel  of  a  battalion,  will  him- 
self sometimes  give  the  general  commands  above,  Break  into  platoons, 
March,  and  Form  company,  March;  as  these  words  would  be  given 
by  the  colonel,  if  all  the  companies  of  the  battalion  were  required  to  exe- 
cute the  movements  indicated  thereby  at  once. 

710.  When  each  company  has  to  break  into  platoons,  or  to  form  up  into 
company,  successively,  on  the  same  ground  on  which  the  leading  company 
executed  the  movement,  then  the  commands  in  question  will  be  given  by 
the  captain  of  the  leading  company,  on  an  intimation  from  a  field-officer, 
and  by  the  following  captains  without  intimation. 

711.  On  the  same  principles,  a  column  of  platoons  will  break,  successive- 
ly, into  sections,  or  a  column  of  sections  will  form,  successively,  into  pla- 
toons, on  an  intimation  given  to  the  chief  of  the  leading  platoon ;  but  if  the 
movement,  in  either  case,  is  to  be  executed  by  all  the  divisions  at  once, 
then  the  commands,  Break  into  sections,  March,  or  Form  platoons, 
March,  will  be  given  by  the  instructer  or  colonel. 


Remarks  on  Diminishing  and  Increasing  Front,  by  Pla- 
toons and  Sections. 

712.  In  both  increasing  and  diminishing,  it  is  necessary  that  the  division 
should  step  out  well  in  obliquing,  to  avoid  losing  ground,  and  in  order  not 

'  to  impede  the  march  of  the  division  which  is  following. 

713.  If,  in  diminishing  front,  the  division  that  is  to  break  off  by  obliquing, 
marked  time  too  long,  it  might  impede  the  following  division  in  its  march, 
and  lengthen  the  column. 

714.  If,  in  -increasing  or  diminishing,  a  division  obliqued  too  long,  it 
would  be  under  the  necessity,  afterwards,  in  order  to  rectify  the  error,  of 
obliquing  in  a  contrary  direction,  and  by  that  means  the  succeeding  divi- 
sion might  be  interrupted  in  its  march. 

715.  If,  in  a  column  of  several  companies,  the  diminishing  take  place  suc- 
cessively, it  is  of  the  last  importance  that  each  division  should  continue  to 
march  at  the  same  rate,  without  stepping  short  or  altering  the  time,  while 
the  preceding  division  is  diminishing,  though  it  should  be  obliged  to  close 
up  entirely  to  the  latter ;  and  this  attention  is  indispensable,  to  prevent  a 
lengthening  of  the  column. 

716.  Errors  of  small  magnitude,  in  a  column  consisting  of  a  few  compa- 
nies, would  be  attended  with  serious  inconveniences  in  a  column  of  several 
battalions;  so  that  the  instructer  ought  to  be  extremely  vigilant  in  causing 
all  the  prescribed  principles  to  be  strictly  observed ;  and,  for  this  purpose, 
he  will  place  himself  on  the  pivot  flank  of  the  column,  in  order  the  better 
to  observe  all  the  movements. 


ARTICLE  FOURTH. 

Countermarch. 


717.  The  company  halted,  and  supposed  to  constitute  part  of  a  column, 
right  in  front,  the  instructer,  to  cause  it  to  countermarch,  will  command, 

1.   Company — countermarch.     2.  Right — face.     3.  By  file  left. 
4.  March. 

718.  (PI.  VII.  Fig.  3.)  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  face 
to  the  right;  the  captain  will  move  to  the  side  of  the  guide  of  the  right; 
aud  the  guii  a  of  the  left  will  face  to  the  right-about. 

G»  T7 


CO  SCHOOL  OF  THE  COMPANY— LESSON   VI. 

71.9.  At  the  word  March,  the  guide  of  the  left  vrill  net  move;  the 
company  will  step  off  smartly;  the  leading  file,  conducted  by  the  captain, 
will  wheel  to  the  left-about,  moving  along  the  front  rank,  vo  as  to  arrive  at 
the  distance  of  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  guide  of  the  left,  who  has  not 
moved;  each  hie  will  wheel,  successively,  en  the  same  ground  as  the 
leading  file,  and  in  the  same  manner:  and,  when  the  leading  file  has  arriv- 
ed i\s  far  as  the  guide  of  the  left,  the  captain  will  command, 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Fno.\T.     4.  Sight — dress. 

720.  The  first  command  will  he  given  when  the  leading  file  i3  within 
two  paces  of  the  point  where  (he  company  is  to  halt; 

721.  At  the  second,  the  company  will  halt  ; 

722.  At  the  third  word,  the  company  will  front  by  facing  to  the  left ; 

723.  At  the  fourth,  the  company  will  move  up  to  the  alignment  marked 
by  the  position  of  the  guide  of  the  left;  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  front 
rank  will  place  himself  to  the  left,  and  by  the  side,  of  the  guide ;  the  cap- 
tain will  place  himself  at  the  distance  of  two  paces  outside  of  the  guide,  in 
order  to  direct  the  alignment;  which  being  effected,  he  will  command, 
Front,  placing  himself  in  front  of  the  centre  of  the  company:  the  cover- 
ing sergeant  will  then  place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank;  and 
the  guide  of  the  left,  who  was  there,  will  move  to  the  left  of  the  front 
rank. 

724.  In  a  column,  left  in  front,  the  countermarch  would  be  executed  on 
the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means;  accordingly,  the  movement 
would  be  made  by  the  right  flank  of  divisions,  if  the  right  were  in  front; 
by  the  left  flank,  if  the  left  were  in  front,  passing  always  by  the  front  rank. 

725.  Finally,  if  it  were  a  column  of  platoons  or  sections,  the  counter- 
march would  be  executed  by  the  same  commands,  and  in  the  same  man- 
ner, as  in  a  column  of  companies. 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 


To  Form  Line  on  the  Right  or  Left,  from  Column  at 
Full  Distance. 

726.  The  company  being  in  open  column  of  platoon?,  right  in  front,  to 
form  on  the  right,  the  instructor  w  ill  command, 

1.   Ga  right  into  line.     2.   Guides  right. 

727.  At  the  second  command,  the  guide  of  each  platoon  will  move  quick- 
ly (o  the  right  Hank  of  his  platoon,  and  the  soldiers  will  touch  elbows  to- 
wards the  right;  the  column  will  continue  to  march  forward. 

728.  The  instructor,  having  given  the  second  command,  will  move  quick- 
ly to  the  point  where  the  right  of  (he  company  is  to  rest  in  line,  and  place 
himself  there,  facing  to  the  left  of  the  new  line. 

729.  The  new  line  ought  to  be  such,  that  each  platoon,  after  having 
turned  to  the  right,  may  have  at  least  four  paces  to  march,  in  order  to  ar° 
rive  on  the  line. 

730.  The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  oeai  !•.  opposite  the  instruct- 
er,  placed  at  the  point  of  appui,  (support,)  the  chief  of  the  first  platoon 
will  command, 

Bight  turn  ; 

731.  And,  when  it  shall  be  opposite,  the  instructor  will  add, 

March. 

732.  At  the  word  March,  he  first  platoon  will  turn  to  the  right,  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  428,  and  then  move  forward;  the  guide 
u-ill  direct  him  lelf  I  o,  that  the  man  of  the  front  rank  next  to  him  shall  ar- 
«'  »  opposite  he  instructor;  the-  captain  will  march  two  paces  in  front  of 

78 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON   VI.  01 

the  centre  of  the  first  platoon,  and,  when  it  arrives  wilhin  two  paces  of  the 
line,  will  command, 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt. 

733.  Al  the  word  Halt,  the  guide  will  move  along  the  new  line  till 
opposite  one  of  the  three  files  on  the  left  of  his  platoon;  he  will  face  to  the 
instructor,  who  will  align  him  on  the  point  of  direction  on  tin;  left ;  the 
captain  will  move,  at  the  same  time,  to  the  point  where  the  right  is  to  rest, 
and  promptly  command, 

Right — dress. 

734.  At  this  command,  the  first  platoon  will  align  itself. 

735.  The  second  platoon  will  continue  to  march  on  until  it  arrives  oppo- 
site to  the  left  flank  of  the  first,  when,  by  command  of  its  chief,  it  will  turn 
to  the  right,  and  move  up  towards  the  line,  the  guide  conducting  his  march 
on  the  left  file  of  the  first' platoon. 

736.  The  second  platoon,  being  arrived  within  two  paces  of  the  line,  will 
be  halted  by  its  chief,  by  the  commands  prescribed  for  the  first. 

737.  At  the  instant  of  halting,  the  guide  will  spring  forward,  placing 
himself  on  the  line,  facing  the  guide  of  the  first  platoon;  the  instructer 
will  direct  him  to  move  to  the  right,  or  left,  till  he  is  on  the  line ;  and  the 
guide  will  take  care  to  be  opposite  to  one  of  the  three  files  on  the  left  of 
his  platoon. 

738.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  seeing  his  guide  established  on  the 
line,  will  command, 

Right — DRESS. 

739.  The  chief  of  the  second  platoon,  Laving  given  this  order,  will  quick- 
ly retire  to  the  rank  of  file-closers,  passing  round  the  left,  and  the  second 
platoon  will  align  itself  on  the  first. 

710.  The  man  of  each  platoon  who  is  opposite  to  the  guide  will,  gently, 
press  his  breast  against  the  arm  of  the  guide. 

741.  The  instructer,  ori  seeing  the  company  aligned,  will  command, 

Guides — posts. 

742.  At  tins  command,  the  covering  sergeant  will  retire  to  h*»  post,  and 
the  guide  of  the  second  platoon  to  the  rank  of  file-closeis. 

743.  A  column  of  platoons,  left  in  front,  will  form  line  on  the  left 
flank,  on  tlie  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means ;  the  captain,  after 
halting  the  first  platoon,  proceeding  to  the  left  of  the  company,  to  align 
both  platoons,  and  shifting  to  his  proper  flank,  when  the  instructer  com- 
mands, Chiides — posts. 

General  Remarks  on  the  School  of  the  Company. 

744.  In  practising  the  four  last  lessons,  the  instructer  will  frequently  or- 
der the  company  to  support  arms,  and  will  accustom  the  men  to  march 
thus,  with  the  same  regularity  and  precision  as  if  arms  were  shouldered, 
which  will  at  once  prevent  fatigue  and  negligence  in  the  position  of  shoul- 
dered arms. 

Instructions  for  Firing  at  a  Target. 

745.  It  is  of  the  first  importance,  that  the  soldier  should  be  instructed  to 
aim  well  and  fire  accurately ;  and  to  ensure  proficiency  in  this,  the  follow 
ing  rules  will  be  rigidly  enforced  by  commanding  and  inspecting  officers. 

746.  Several  targets  will  be  provided  for  each  regiment,  when  embod 
ted,  and  one  for  each  company,  when  detached  on  command  for  any  consid- 
erable time,  of  the  following  description :  five  feet  ten  inches  high,  by 
twenty-two  inches  in  breadth,  and  painted  white ;  it  will  be  marked  by 
three  black  stripes  drawn  horizontally  across,  one  at  the  top,  the  second  at 
the  middle,  and  a  third  >;qui-distant  from  the  first  and  second;  the  centre 

79 


r-2 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON    VI. 


stripe  having  in  its  centre  a  ball's  eye,  eight  inches  in  diameter,  surround- 
ei,  at  two  inches  distance,  by  a  circle  one  inch  broad. 

747.  The  practice  will  commence  at  tbe  distance  of  fifty  yards, by  which 
means  the  soldier,  seldom  missing  his  object,  will  acquire  confidence  in 
greater  ranges.  The  soldier  will  be  gradually  removed  from  the  target  to 
the  distance  of  eighty,  and,  finally,  to  that  of  one  hundred  and  forty  yard-;. 
about  the  point  blank  distance,  or  point  of  second  intersection  of  the  ball 
with  the  line  of  sight,  by  which  lime  the  soldier  will  have  gained  such  a 
knowledge  of  his  musket,  as  will  enable  him  to  fire,  with  considerable  ac- 
curacy, at  an  object  placed  at  its  extreme  range,  by  observing  the  rules 
laid  down  for  aiming  at  an  object  brought  within  the  point  blank  distance. 

748.  Assuming  as  the  point  blank  range  of  a  musket,  about  one  hundred 
and  forty  yards,  in  proportion  as  the  soldier  approaches  the  target  placed 
at  this  distance,  he  slightly  depresses  the  muzzle  belowr  the  object  aimed 
at:  for  example,  to  strike  the  bull's  eye,  he  should  point  slightly  below  it; 
if  further  removed  than  the  point  blank,  he  proportionally  elevates. 

749.  Every  soldier  will  be  instructed  singly,  first  by  aiming  and  firing  at 
will,  and  then  by  command ;  afterwards,  two  in  a  single  rank,  then  in  a 
file,  as  front  and  rear  rank  man. 

750.  Whenever  it  be  convenient  to  increase  the  number  of  targets,  to 
correspond  with  the  number  of  files,  a  company  may  be  made  to  practise 
together,  firing  by  file  and  by  company. 

751.  The  men  must  be  instructed,  in  aiming,  to  hold  the  butt  firm 
against  the  right  shoulder,  to  support  the  firelock  steadily  with  the  left 
hand,  and  to  bring  the  breach,  the  sight,  and  object,  to  coincide  with  tho 
visual  ray. 

752.  To  givcHhem  a  facility  of  aiming  in  the  requisite  direction  with  ac- 
curacy, after  coming  down  quickly  to  an  aim,  they  shall  receive  the  word, 
Recover — arms. 

753.  The  men  must  be  instructed  to  pull  the  trigger  forcibly,  at  Iha 
word  Fire,  without  stirring  the  head  or  altering  the  direction  of  the  firelock. 

754.  To  ensure  the  observance  of  these  essential  rules,  after  firing,  the 
.-.l.iiing  position  must  be  continued  till  the  word  Load  is  given. 

755.  All  the  soldiers,  including  musicians,  shall  practise  target  firing. 
753.  The  result  of  the  target  practice  will  be  carefully  registered  in  a 

company  book,  and  signed  by  the  officer  who  superintends  the   practice. 
The  following  form  will  be  observed: 


|     Report  of  the  Target  Practice  of  Capt. '*  Company,  (B.) 

1]         2d  Infantry,  on  the                        of                        18     . 

r 

i 

2 
8 

4 

Names. 

.5* 

Wis. 

II 

gi 

Remarks. 

~  5 

Up- 
per. 

Low- 
er. 

Cen- 
tre. 

Sergeant  A. 
Corporal   15. 
Drummer  C. 
Private  D. 

130 

1 
1 

2 
1 
2 

2 

1 

2 

3 
3 
2 
5 

3 
3 

1 

1 

b' 
6 
6 
6 

Bull's  eye. 

Total. 

3 

5 

:> 

13 

11 

24 

{Signed,)    P.  II.  G.,  lit.  Lieut. 

757.  Commanding  and  inspecting  officers  will  thus  be  enabled  to  judge 
accurately  of  the  proficiency  of  the  individuals  belonging  to  a  company. 


Manual  of  the  Sergeants. 

751.  Sergeants,  a,  also  all  the  rank  and   file,  will   always   repair   to   tho 
parad**  with  bayonets  fixed. 
P0 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON    VI.  63 

739    All  sergeants,  and  the  color-guard,  shall  carry  their  firelocks  in  the 
position  about  to  be  described. 


Position  of Shouldered  Arms. 

760.  The  firelock  in  the  right  hand,  and  against  the  hollow  of  the  shoul- 
der, the  barrel  perpendicular,  and  to  the  rear,  the  ramrod  to  the  front,  the 
right  arm  almost  at  its  full  extent,  the  right  hand  embracing  the  cock  and 
guard,  the  hutt  flat  along  the  right  thigh,  and  the  left  hand  hanging  by  the 
side  behind  the  sword. 

Present — arms. 

761.  First  Motion.  Carry  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand,  perpen- 
dicularly, opposite  to  the  left  eye,  the  ramrod  to  the  front,  the  cock  as  high 
as  the  lowest  coat  button ;  grasp,  at  the  same  time,  the  firelock  with  the 
left  hand,  the  little  finger  of  that  hand  against  the  hammer-spring,  the 
thumb  extended  along  the  barrel  and  stock,  the  left  fore-arm  close  to  the 
body,  without  constraint,  and  remain  facing  steady  to  the  front. 

762.  Second  Motion.  Grasp  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand,  under 
and  against  the  guard. 

Shoulder — arms. 

763.  First  Motion.  Slip  the  left  hand  as  high  as  the  shoulder,  and 
carry  with  this  hand  the  firelock,  perpendicularly,  against  the  right  shoul- 
der; grasp  with  the  right  hand  the  cock  and  guard, "the  right  arm  nearly 
extended. 

764.  Second  Motion.     Let  the  left  hand  fall  behind  the  sword. 

Order — arms  . 

765.  First  Motion.  Carry,  smartly,  the  left  hand  to  the  centre  band  ; 
detach  a  little,  with  the  right  hand,  the  firelock  from  the  right  shoulder  ; 
quit  hold,  at  the  same  time,  with  the  right  hand;  sink  down  the  firelock 
with  the  left  hand;  seize  it  again  with  the  right  hand  above  the  lower 
band,  the  right  thumb  on  the  barrel,  in  order  to  grasp  it,  the  four  fingers 
extended  on  the  stock,  the  firelock  perpendicular,  the  butt  at  three  inches 
from  the  ground,  the  beak  of  the  butt  over  the  spot  where  it  is  to  rest ;  let 
the  left  hand  fall  behind  the  sword. 

766.  Second  Motion.  By  opening  a  little  the  fingers  of  the  right 
hand,  .ct  the  firelock  slip  through  them,  and  fall  to  the  ground,  in  such  a 
manner,  that  the  beak  of  the  butt  may  rest  at  the  side  of,  and  close  to,  the 
toe  of  the  right  foot. 

Shoulder — a  rm  s 

767.  First  Motion.  Raise  the  firelock  perpendicularly,  with  the 
right  hand,  as  high  as  the  breast,  opposite  to  the  shoulder,  two  inches 
from  the  body,  the  right  elbow  close  to  the  body ;  seize  the  firelock 
with  the  left  hand  under  the  right,  nearly  at  the  lower  band ;  let  fall  the 
right  hand,  and  grasp  the  cock  and  guard,  pressing  the  firelock  against  the 
shoulder. 

768.  Second  Motion.  Let  fall  the  left  arm  behind  the  sword,  the 
right  arm  nearly  extended. 

Support — ARMS. 

769.  First  Motion.  Carry  the  firelock  to  the  front  of  the  body,  per- 
pendicularly, opposite  to,  and  between,  the  eyes,  with  the  right  hand,  the 
ramrod  to  the  front ;  seize  the  firelock  with  ihe  left  hand  at  the  lower  band  ; 
raise  it  as  high  as  the  chin,  and,  at  the  same  time,  grasp  the  firelock  with 
the  right  hand,  four  inches  under  the  lock. 

770.  Second  Motion.  Turn  round  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand, 
the  barrel  to  the  front,  conducting  it,  at  the  same  time,  to  the  left  shoulder; 
pass  the  left  fore-arm  diagonally  across  the  body,  the  cock  supported  on  the 
left  fore  arm,  tie  left  hand  resting  on  the  right  breast. 

81 


54  SCHOOL   OF  THE   COMPANY— LESSON    VI. 

771.  Third  Motion.     Let  the  right  hand  fall  to  the  right  side. 

Carry — arms. 

772.  First  Motion.  Grasp  the  firelock  with  the  right  hand  under, 
and  close  to,  the  left  fore-arm. 

773.  Second  Motion.  Carry  the  firelock,  perpendicularly,  With  the 
right  hand,  against  the  right  shoulder,  the  ramrod  to  the  front;  seize  it 
with  the  left  hand  as  high  as  the  right  shoulder;  turn  the  right  hand,  at 
the  same  time,  and  grasp  the  cock  and  guard,  the  right  arm  extending 
nearly  to  its  full  length. 

774.  Third  Motion.     Let  fall  the  left  arm  behind  the  sword. 

775.  When  the  rank  and  file  carry  arms,  in  paying  compliments,  ser- 
geants, and  such  of  the  corporals  as  shoulder  arms  as  just  above,  shall,  with 
the  inside  of  the  left  hand  extended,  touch  the  ramrod,  at  a  point  opposite 
to  the  right  shoulder,  returning  the  left  hand  to  its  side  position,  after  the 
compliment  is  paid. 

Manual  of  the  Corporals. 

776.  When  corporals  are  in  the  ranks,  they  use  their  arms  in  the  same 
manner  as  the  other  rank  and  file ;  but  should  they  be  in  the  rank  of  file- 
closers,  or  conduct  a  body  of  men,  or  a  relief  of  sentinels,  or  belong  to  the 
color-guard,  they  will  carry  the  firelock  in  the  right  hand,  as  described  in 
the  .Manual  of  the  Sergeants. 


Sword  Manual  of  the  Officers. 


Mode  of  Carrying  the  Sword  in  the  Ranks. 

777.  The  gripe  of  the  sword  in  the  right  hand,  which  ought  to  be  placed 
as  high  as,  and  against,  the  right  haunch,  the  blade  against  the  shoulder. 

773.  When  the  ranks  order  arms,  the  officers  will  drop  the  blade  oi  the 
sword  by  the  right  side,  the  point  a  little  advanced,  and  about  two  inches 
from  the  ground. 

Position  of  the  Sword  out  of  the  Ranks. 

779.  The  gripe  in  the  right  hand,  which  shall  be  placed  in  front  of  the 
right  haunch ;  the  blade  in  the  left  hand,  the  point  a  little  above  the  band ; 
the  thumb  extended  on  the  blade,  the  left  elbow  bent,  the  fore-arm  a  lit- 
tle in  front,  the  left  hand  opposite  to,  and  four  inches  lower  than,  the  left 
shoulder. 

Sword  Salute,  whether  in  or   out  of  the  Ranks,  Halting  or 
Marching. 

780.  First  Motion.  Raise  the  sword  perpendicularly,  the  point  up- 
permost, the  flat  of  the  blade  opposite  the  right  eye,  (he  guard  as  high  as 
the  right  breast,  the  elbow  against  the  body.  It  the  sword  be  in  the  posi- 
tion described  for  carrying  the  sword  when  out  of  the  ranks,  let  fall  smartly 
the  left  hand  by  the  left  side. 

781.  Second  Motion.  Bring  down  the  blade  smartly,  by  extending 
the  arm  in  such  a  manner,  that  the  ii:;bt  band  may  be  placed  at  the  side  of 
the  right  thigh,  and  rest,  in  that  position;  until  the  person  saluted  shall  have 

passed,  or  been  passed,  two  paces. 

782.  Third  Motion.  Raise  the  sword  pin  smartly,  holding  it  as  de- 
scribed at  the  first  motion. 

788.  Fourth  Motiow.  Carrythe  sword  to  the  right  shoulder, if  in  tho 
r^nks,  or  sink  the  blade  into  the  left  band,  if  out  of  the  ranks. 
82 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   COMPANY— LESSON   VI. 


Manual  of  the  Colors. 

784  In  the  ranks,  whether  halting  or  marching,  the  bearer  of  the  col- 
ors w  il  carry  the  bottom  of  the  start  against  the  right  haunch,  the  right 
hand  holding  the  staff  at  about  the  height  of  the  shoulders,  and  the  elbow 
of  the  same  arm  resting  against  the  start".  The  salute  will  be  executed  as 
follows : 

785.  When  within  six  paces  of  the  person  to  be  saluted,  let  the  spear  of 
the  staff  fall  gently  forward,  to  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees,  without  tak- 
ing the  butt  from  die  haunch,  facing  steadily  to  the  front;  raise  up  gently 
the  staff  to  the  shoulder,  when  the  person  saluted  shall  have  passed,  or  been 
passed,  two  paces. 

78G.  If  the  colors  are  to  salute  standing,  they  will  execute  the  same  mo- 
tions at  the  commands,  Prestnt — arms,"  Shoulder — arms.  At  the  com- 
mand, Order — arms  and  Shoulder — arms,  for  the  battalion,  the  colors 
will  also  be  ordered  and  shouldered. 


Instructions  J ?or  the  Drum-Major. 

787.  The  place  of  the  drummers  in  line  has  been  determined  in  the  first 
section. 

783.  In  column  of  manoeuvre,  the  drums  will  march  on  the  reverse 
flank,  abreast  of  the  left  centre  company. 

I    789.  In  column  of  route,  as  also  in  passing  defiles,  they  must  march,  in 
the  interval,  at  the  head  of  their  respective  battalions. 


790.  Signals  of  the  Drum-Major  for  the  various  Beats. 

1.  The  generate.        Extend  the  right  arm,  seize  the  staff  by  the  middle, 

and  raise  the  pommel  as  high  as  the  chin. 

2.  The  assembly.        Extend  the  right  arm,  laise  the  staff  nearly  a  foot 

from  the  ground,  placing--  the  thumb  on  the  pommel. 

3.  The  long  roll.         Put  the  staff  on  the  iib..t  shoulder,  the  ferrule  to  the 

rear. 

4.  The  troop.  Raise  the  arm,  turn  the  wrist  inwards,  so  that  the 

staff  may  be  horizontally  across  the  body  as  high  as  the 
chin. 
6.  To  the  field.  Raise  the  staff  perpendicularly,  the  ferrule  upwards, 

the  arm  extended  as  high  as  the  right  shoulder. 

6.  Quick  time.  Project  the  ferrule  of  the  staff  direct  and  horizontally 

to  the  front,  the  arm  extended. 

7.  The  retreat.  Carry  the  staff  round,  and  hold  it  diagonally  across 

the  back. 

8.  Church  call.  Carry  the  pommel  of  the  staff  on  the  right  shoulder. 

9.  Fatigue.  Take  the  staff  by  the  tassel,  and  extend  the  arm  as 

high  as  the  shoulder. 

10.  To  arms.  Carry  the  staff  on  the  left  shoulder,  the  ferrule  to  the 

rear. 


791.  Signals  for  the  Evolutions  of  Drums. 

1st.  To  march  by  the  right  flank,  take  the  staff  by  the  middle,  and  ex 
tend  the  arm  to  the  right. 

2d.  To  march  by  the  left  flank,  make  the  same  signal,  extending  the  arm 
to  the  left. 

3d.  To  diminish  the  front,  let  the  ferrule  fall  into  the  left  hand,  held  as 
high  as  the  eyes. 

4th.  To  increase  front,  let  the  pommel  of  the  staff  fall  into  the  left  hand, 
held  as  high  as  the  eyes. 


G6  SCHOOL  OF   THE  BATTALION. 

5th.  To  change  direction,  turn  half  round  to  the  drummers,  and  indicata 
to  them,  by  a  movement  of  the  stair,  to  which  side  they  arc  to  wheel  or 
turn. 

6th.  To  oblique  to  the  right,  extend  the  right  arm  as  high  as  the  shoul- 
der, holding  the  staff  slanting,  and  grasping  the  ferrule,  the  left  hand  as  high 
as  the  haunch. 

7th.  To  oblique  to  the  left,  make  the  contrary  signal:  the  pommel  of  the 
staff  will  always  indicate  to  which  side  the  obliquing  is  to  take  place. 


792.    To  Ground  Drums. 

1.  To  put  tip  drumsticks.  Grasp  the   staff  under  the  pommel,  and 

raise  it  as  high  as  the  eyes,  extending  the 
arm  to  the  front. 

2.  To  unsling  drums.  Draw  the  pommel  to  the  breast. 

3.  To  ground  drums.  The  same  signal  as  for  putting  up  drum- 

sticks. 

1.  To  take  up  drums.  C     Make  the  same  signals  with  the  staff  as 

2.  To  suspend  drums.  <  for   putting  up    drumsticks,    for  detaching 

3.  To  draw  out  drumsticks.  (  drums  and  for  grounding  drums. 

796.  Drummers  will  be  designated  as  markers,  and  employed  accord- 
ingly, in  the  evolutions. 


Mode  of  Dismissing  Company. 

Recover — arms. 
Bring  the  firelock  to  the  recover,  by  throwing  it  briskly  out  of  the  left 
hand,  (if  from  shouldered  arms,)  the  guard  to  the  front ;  the  cock  resting 
against  the  left  breast ;  the  left  hand  seizing  the  firelock  above  the  lock, 
and  the  right  hand  the  small. 

Ease — springs. 
Keep  the  firelock  steady  at  *he  recover;  throw  the  pan  open  with  (he 
right  thumb  ;  let  down,  gentlj ,  the  cock  with  the  fore-finger  and  thunib  of 
the  right  hand. 

Right— gA.cv. 
As  in  No.  109. 

Lodge — arms. 
Drop  the  firelock  smartly  to  the  port,  (No.  269,)  the  front  rank  springing 
off  to  the  left,  the  rear  rank  and  file-closers  to  the  right ;  the  whole  quit- 
ting the  parade  without  noise. 

In  turning  in  a  guard,  the  same  mode  will  be  observed,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  easing  springs. 


SECTION  IV. 
SCHOOL    OF   THE   BATTALION. 

797.  THE  School  of  the  Battalion  will  be  divided  into  five  parts. 

798.  The  first  will  "include  the  manner  of  opening  ranks,  and  executing 
the  different  firings ; 

799.  The  second  the  different  methods  of  passing  from  line  into  column. 

800.  The  third  part  will  include  the  march  in  column,  and  various  other 
movements  relating  to  the  column  ; 

801.  The  fourth  the  different  methods  of  passing  from  column  into  line. 

802.  The  tilth  part  will  include  the  march  in  line,  to  the  front  and  rear; 

84 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION.  07 

the  march  by  a  flank  ;  forming  by  file  into  line  ;  the  passage  of  defiles  in 
retiring;  the  passage  of  lines;  the  changes  of  front;  the  column  of  attack  ; 
dispositions  against  cavalry  ;  and  rallying. 

803.  This  school  having  for  its  object  the  instruction  of  battalions,  sepa- 
rately, and  thus  to  prepare  them  for  executing  all  that  can  be  required  in 
line;  and  the  harmony  of  combined  movements  depending  necessarily  on 
the  individual  instruction  of  battalions,  on  the  uniformity  of  words  of  com- 
mand, and  on  the  principles  and  means  of  execution,  the  colonels  will  lit- 
erally conform  to  all  herein  prescribed;  they  will  endeavor  to  cause  all 
the  movements  to  be  executed  with  the  utmost  steadiness,  calmness  and 
regularity.  But  in  all  the  interior  movements  of  the  battalion,  alter  it  b 
well  established  in  marching  in  common  time,  the  word  March  shall  be 
preceded  by  the  word  Quick,  although  the  latter  be  not  found  in  the  text 
or  commands.  a 


Prompt  Formation  of  the  Battalion. 

S04.  Every  colonel  will  exert  himself  to  give  to  his  battalion  the  habit  of 
forming  with  the  greatest  rapidity. 

805.  At  the  first  call,  the  colonel  will  repair  to  the  place  of  assembly 
previously  designated  for  the  battalion,  and  "each  captain  to  that  of  his  com- 
pany. The  other  company  officers,  and  the  non-commissioned  officers, 
will  hasten  to  turn  out,  and  assemble  their  men;  and  the  lieutenant-colo- 
nel and  major  will  superintend  and  quicken  the  formation  of  the  compa- 
nies. 

806.  Each  captain  will  post  his  file-closers,  and  instantly  form  his  com- 
pany with  a  front  not  exceeding  the  number  of  files  previously  indicated 
by  the  adjutant.  The  color  company  will  be  formed  with  a  front  three 
files  less  than  that  number. 

807.  The  adjutant  will,  at  the  same  time,  form  the  color-guard  on  the 
left  of  the  fourth  company,  and  distribute  the  surplus  files  of  the  stronger 
companies  among  the  weaker.  He  will  be  assisted  in  these  duties  by  the 
sergeant-major. 

808.  The  colonel  will  cause  a  roll  of  the  drum  to  be  given,  to  announce 
that  the  companies  ought- to  be  ready  to  unite,  and  afterwards  a  tap  of  the 
drum,  as  a  signal  for  each  company  to  march  and  form  on  the  line  or  com- 
pany previously  designated. 

809.  The  battalion  will  form  line  according  to  the  principles  of  succes- 
sive formations,  which  will  be  herein  prescribed  ;  the  color-bearers  having 
received  the  colors  from  the  colonel,  or  the  sentinel  placed  over  them ;  but 
if  there  be  day-light,  and  sufficient  time,  the  colors  will  be  escorted  as  fol- 
lows : 

Composition  and  March  of  the  Color-Escort. 

810.  When  the  battalion  turns  out  under  arms,  if  the  colors  be  wanted, 
cne  of  the  flank  companies,  in  its  tour,  or,  if  they  be  both  absent,  a  battalion 
company,  will  be  put  in  march,  to  receive  and  escort  the  colors  in  the  fol- 
lowing order : 

811.  The  drum-major,  drummers,  followed  by  the  band  ; 

812.  The  company,  formed  in  column  of  platoons,  right  in  front,  arms 
supported  ; 

813.  The  two  color-bearers,  elbow  to  elbow,  between  the  two  platoons. 
§14.  The  detachment  will  march  in  quick  time,  in  this  order,  without 

the  sound  of  instrument.  Arrived  at  the  quarters  of  the  colonel,  it  will 
form  line,  fronting  the  principal  entrance  ;  the  drums  and  the  band  on  the 
right  of  the  line. 

"815.  As  soon  as  the  detachment  shall  be  in  hue,  the  two  color-bearers, 
preceded  by  (he  first  lieutenant,  and  followed  by  a  sergeant,  will  enter  the 
quarters  to  receive  the  colors. 

H  85 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART   I. 


816.  When  the  color-bearers  come  out,  followed  by  (he  lieutenant  Ami 
sergeant,  they  will  halt  in  front  of  the  entrance. 

817.  At  the  instant  the  colors  are  brought  out,  the  captain  will  order 
arms  to  be  presented,  and  the  drums  will  beat  the  troop. 

818.  After  some  fifteen  or  twenty  seconds,  lie  captain  will  cause  the 
beat  to  cease,  arms  to  be  shouldered,  and  then  break  the  company  into  col- 
umn of  platoons :  the  color-bearers,  first  lieutenant  and  the  sergeant  will 
resume  the  places  before  occupied  by  them  in  the  column. 

819.  The  captain  will  put  the  detachment  in  inarch,  to  the  sound  of  mu- 
sic, in  the  same  order  as  above. 


. 


Honors  Paid  to  the  Colors. 

820.  Whjfe  the  head  of  the  detachment  shall  have  arrived  near  to  one 
of  the  flanks  of  the  battalion,  the  color-bearers  will  file  out  of  the  column  ; 
the  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion  to  carry  arms;  the  music  will  cease 
playing  ;  the  color-beaters  will  march  in  quick  time  down  the  front  of  the 
battalion,  elbow  to  elbow,  at  the  -distance  of  ten  paces  from  the  line,  till 
nearly  opposite  to  the  centre  ;  the  color-bearers  will  then  wheel  to  the  left 
or  right,  and  halt,  firing  the  centre. 

821.  The  colonel,  placed  six  paces  in  front  of  the  color-sergeant,  who  is 
in  the  centre  of  the  line,  will,  as  soon  as  the  color-bearers  halt,  cause  the 
battalion  to  present  arms,  and  then  himself  salute  with  the  sword.  This 
executed,  the  color-bearers  immediately  pass  to  the  right  and  left  of  the 
colonel,  to  take  their  places  in  line,  and' the  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion 
to  shoulder  arms. 

822.  As  soon  as  the  color-bearers  file  out  of  the  column,  the  drum-major, 
drums  and  hand,  without  playing,  as  also  the  company,  march  by  the  rear, 
in  quick  time,  to  take  their  respective  places  in  line. 

823.  The  colors  will  be  escorted  back  to  the  colonel's  quarters,  in  the 
order  prescribed  above. 


PART  I. 

Manner  of  Opening  Ranks  and  Executing  the  Different 

Firings. 


ARTICLE  FIRST. 

To  Open  Banks. 

824.  To  effect  this,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Rear  rank,  open  order.     2.  March. 

825.  At  the  first  command,  all  the  covering  sergeants,  as  also  the  second  I 
sergeant  in  the  rear  rank,  on  the  left  of /he  battalion,  will  step  to  the  rear,  \ 
in  order  to  mark  off  the  .tew  alignment  for  the  rear  rank,  ami  will  align 
themselves  by  the  right,  parallel  to  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

826.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  move  to  the  right  of  the  rank  of  cover- 
ing sergeants,  and  ioc  that  it  is  correctly  aligned,  One  pace  from,  and  par 
allel  to,  the  ran!:  of  file-closer  ■. 

327.  At  (he  word  M  wun,  the  rear  rank,  as  also  the  rank  of  file-closers, 
will  step  back,  in  common  time,  \\  Ithoul  reckoning  the  number  of  steps ; 
the  men  \.-ill  p>  -  -..  little  beyond  their  rank,  halt,  and  place  themselves  ac- 
curately on  th«  align u  of  the  covering  sergeants,  who  will  take  care  t« 

align  them  correctly  in  their  intervals. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALIOM  -PART   I.  69 

828.  The  file-clo3ers  will  place  themselves  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  rear 
rank,  and  align  themselves  by  their  right.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed 
on  the  right  of  this  rank,  will  align  it  on  the  file-closer  of  the  left,  who 
will  take  care  to  place  himself  exactly  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  rear  rank, 
and  to  raise  his  firelock  perpendicularly  between  his  eyes. 

829.  The  colonel,  seeing  the  ranks  aligned,  will  command, 

3.  Front. 


ARTICLE  SECOND. 

Manual  Exercise,  and  Loading  in  Quick  Time. 

830.  Before  the  ranks  are  closed,  the  colonel  will  exercise  the  battalion 
in  the  manual,  and  loading  in  quick  time. 

831.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  exercises  of  the  front  rank,  and 
the  lieutenant-colonel  those  of  the  rear  rank.  The  captains  and  covering 
sergeants,  in  their  respective  ranks,  will  always  half-face  to  the  right  with 
the  men,  in  the  first  motion  of  loading,  and  front  when  <he  man  next  to 
them,  respectively,  in  their  company  casts  about. 


ARTICLE    THIRD. 

Loading  in  Quickest  Time,  and  the  Firings. 

832.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  ranks  to  be  closed  by  the  commands  pre- 
scribed for  the  instructer,  No.  469  ;  and  will  then  cause  the  battalion  to 
load  in  quickest  time. 

833.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion  to  fire  by  company,  by  wing, 
by  battalion,  and  by  file,  by  the  commands  herein  prescribed. 

834.  The  firing  by  company  and  by  file,  will  always  be  direct  to  the 
front ;  and  the  firings  by  wing  or  by  battalion,  may  be  direct  or  oblique. 

835.  When  the  firing  is  to  be  oblique,  the  colonel  must,  each  time,  give 
the  caution  Right  oblique,  or  Left  oblique,  after  the  word  Ready,  and  pre- 
viously to  the  word  Aim. 

836.  Firing  by  company  will  be  executed  by  the  first  and  second  com- 
panies of  each  grand  division,  alternately,  as  if  each  grand  division  were 
isolated  ;  the  first  company  will  fire  first;  the  captain  of  the  second  will  not 
give  the  first  command,  until  he  sees  one  or  two  firelocks  shouldered  in 
the  first,  after  loading  ;  the  captain  of  the  first  company,  in  his  turn,  will 
observe  the  same  rule  in  regard  to  the  second  ;  the  firing  continuing  thus, 
alternately. 

837.  The  colonel  will  regulate  the  firing  by  wing,  in  the  same  manner. 

838.  The  firing  by  file  will  commence  in  all  the  companies  at  the  same 
time,  and  conformably  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  495. 

839.  The  color-guard  will  not  fire,  but  remain  shouldered,  as  in  No.  760, 
during  the  firings. 

840.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  firing  to  cease  by  a  ruffle  followed  by  a 
tap  of  the  drumstick  ;  at  the  signal  of  the  tap,  the  captains,  covering  ser- 
geants, color-rank  and  color-guard  wil!  quickly  resume  their  places  in 
line. 

841.  At  the  instant  when  the  ruffle  commences,  the  soldiers  will  execute 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  496,  and  all  the  officers  and  sergeants  of  the  bat- 
talion will  promptly  repeat  the  words  Cease  firing. 

842.  When  the  battalion  rests,  no  person  will  leave  his  post  without-spe- 
cial permission  :  should  a  captain  or  the  lieutenant  on  the  left  obtain  such 
permission,  he  will  be  replaced  during  his  absence  ;  the  former  by  his  cov- 
ering sergeant,  and  the  latter  by  the  sergeant  on  the, left. 

87 


70  SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION— PART   I. 

843.  The  colouel  will  give  the  commands  for  firing  from  the  rear  of  the 
battalion,  placing  himself  where  he  can  best  be  heard. 

844.  The  Meutcnaiit-colonel  will  take  post,  during  the  firings,  in  rear  of 
the  centre  of  the  right  wing,  and  the  major  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  the  left 
wing,  both  about  ten  paces  from  the  rank  of  file-closers  ;  when  the  bat- 
talion rests,  they  will  report  to  the  colonel  such  faults  as  they  may  have 
observed. 

To  Fire  by  Company. 

845.  To  effect  this,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Fire  by  comjiany.     2.   Commence — firing. 

846.  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  and  their  covering  sergeants 
will  retire,  as  prescribed,  No^.  1S7,  4S3,  and  the  lieutenant  .and  sergeant 
on  the  left  of  the  battalion,  will  retire  to  the  rank  of  file-closers  of  the  left 
company,  the  lieutenant  covering  the  centre  of  the  fourth  section;  the  ser- 
geant, the  second  file  from  the  left  of  the  same  section.  This  rule  will  be 
general  in  all  the  firings. 

847.  The  color-rank  and  the  color-guard  will  retire  in  such  manner,  that 
their  front  rank  may  be  in  the  rear  rank  of  the  battalion. 

848.  At  the  second  command,  the  odd  companies  will  commence  firing  ; 
the  captains  will  give  the  commands  prescribed,  No.  4S9,  taking  care  to 
add  to  the  word  company,  the  designation  of  first,  third,  fifth,  or  seventh, 
according  to  the  number  of  each. 

849.  The  captains  of  the  even  companies  will  give,  in  their  turn,  the 
same  commands,  adding,  likewise,  the  denomination  of  each  company  ;  and 
so  on,  alternately. 

850.  In  order  that  the  odd  companies,  which  commence  the  firing,  may 
not  fire  al!  at  once,  the  captains  will  observe,  (but  for  the  first  fire  only,) 
to  give  the  word  Fire  one  after  another  ;  thus  the  captain  of  the  third 
company  will  not  give  the  words  Aim  and  Fire,  till  he  has  heard  the  fire 
of  the  first  company  ;  and  the  captain  of  the  fifth  will  observe  the  same  rule 
with  respect  to  the  third,  as,  also,  the  captain  of  the  seventh,  with  respect 
to  the  fifth  company. 

To  Fire  by  Wing. 

851.  To  effect  this,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Fireby  loing.      2.  Right  wing.       3.  Ready.      4.  Aim.      5.  Fire. 
6.  Load. 

852.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  wings  to  fire  alternately,  conforming  to 
what  is  prescribed,  No.  837,  in  relation  to  the  intervals  between  the 
firings. 

To  Fire  by  Battalion. 

853.  The  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Fire  by  battalion.     2.  Battalion.      3.  Ready.     4.  Aim.      5.  Fire 
6.  Load. 


To  Fire  by  File. 

854.  To  effect  this,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Fire  by  file.      2.  Battalion.      3.  Ready.       1.   Commence — firing 

855.  In  firing  by  wing,  by  battalion,  and  by  file,  the  captains,  at  the 
first  command  from  the  colonel,  will  retire  one  p. ice  in  rear  of  the  refir  rank, 
each  opposite  his  interval;  and  the  covering  sergeants  will  move,  as  in 
firing  by  company,  into  the  rank  of  file-closers,  each  covering  his  captain. 


Plate  VIII. 


School  of  the  Battalion. 


fllllllllliiiilllltlilliii 


^iiIIiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiihw 


e-~. 


'. 


tjiiiiiiiiii in ii3 


HilMIIIHI Illiljl!, 


Hnl.llilliillll.ilillilllllll 


'«... 


Hi'imi iiii"''ini"i? 


*B^ 


e. 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   BATTALION— PART  II.  71 

856.  The  color-rank  and  guard  will,  at  the  same  command,  place  them- 
selves as  prescribed,  in  firing  by  company. 


To  Fire  to  the  Bear. 

857.  To  effect  this,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Fire  to  the  rear.    2.  Battalion.     3.  About — face. 
85S.  At  the  word  About,  the  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  file-clos- 
ers, will  execute  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  502,  503. 

859.  The  battalion,  thus  faced  to  the  rear,  will  execute  the  firings,  as 
ahove. 

860.  The  wings  and  companies,  though  the  right  has  become  the  left, 
and  vice  versa,  shall  still  retain  their  proper  appellations  of  right  or  left 
wing,  and  first,  second,  Sac.  company. 

861.  Firing  by  file  will  commence  from  the  left  (now 'become  the  right) 
of  companies. 

862.  The  captains,  covering  sergeants,  the  color-rank  and  guard,  occupy 
the  places  prescribed  for  them  when  firing  to  the  proper  front ;  and  move 
to  them,  respectively,  at  the  first  command. 

863.  To  front  the  battalion,  the  colonel  will  order, 

1.  Battalion.     2.  About — face. 

864.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains,  covering  sergeants,  and  file- 
closers,  will  execute  what  is  prescribed,  Nos.  507,  508. 


Remarks  on  the  Firings. 

865.  When  the  hattalion  fires  with  cartridges,  the  colonel  will  sometimes 
order  the  captains  to  inspect  the  arms,  after  firing,  as  prescribed,  No.  515. 

866.  In  firing  by  wing,  the  colonel  will  not  cause  the  left  wing  to  fire, 
till  he  sees  many  firelocks  loaded  in  the  right,  and  so  on. 


PART  II.  . 
Different  Methods  of  passing  from  Line  into  Column. 

867.  The  front  of  the  battalion  column  will  habitually  he  that  of  a  com- 
pany ;  hut  for  passing  defiles  and  for  route  marches,  the  front  will,  more 
frequently,  be  that  of  platoons  or  sections. 

888.  At  the  caution  for  forming  column  of  companies  from  line,  the  first 
lieutenant  of  the  left  company  will  retire  to  the  rank  of  file-closers,  and 
place  himself  opposite  to  the  centre  of  the  fourth  section  of  his  company. 


ARTICLE    FIRST. 

To  Break  to  the  Bight  or  Left. 

869.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  hattalion  to  break  into  column  of  compa- 
nies, by  the  commands  prescribed  for  the  instructer,  No.  597,  suhstituting 
the  word  companies  for  platoons. 

870.  (Plate  VIII.)  What  has  been  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Com- 
pany, for  breaking  into  platoons,  will  be  executed  for  breaking  into  com- 
panies ;  the  captains  will  observe,  in  respect  to  their  companies,  what  is 
prescribed  for:  chiefs  of  platoons  ;  and  the  colonel,  what  is  prescribed  for  the 
instructer. 

871.  The  captains  having  ordered  Front,  no  guide  will  move,  even 

91 


72  SCHOOL  OF   THE   BATTALION— PART   II. 

though  he  should  not  be  in  the  line  of  direction  of  the  guides  in  front  of 
him  ;  in  order  thDt  an  error  of  a  company,  that  has  wheeled  too  much  or  too 
little,  may  not  be  communicated  to  others  ;  and  the  guides  who  are  out  of 
the  direction  will  not  resume  it,  till  the  column  is  put  in  march. 

S72.  If,  however,  the  colonel  wished  immediately  to  form  line,  he  would, 
previously,  rectify  the  positions  of  the  guides,  by  the  means  prescribed,  No 
102S,  and  following. 

873.  When  the  battalion  breaks  by  company,  if  to  the  right,  the  guide 
of  the  right  of  the  company  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the 
right  of  the  front  rank,  atJhe  instant  the  captain  shall  command,  Halt  :  if 
to  the  left,  the  guide  of  the  left  will  place  himself  by  the  side  of  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  his  company,  at  the  instant  the  captain  shall 
command,  Halt  :  thus,  whether  the  right  or  left  be  in  front,  the  front  rank 
of  each  company  will  be  included  between  its  two  guides. 

875.  The  battalion  having  broken  into  column,  the  lieutenant-colonel 
and  major  are  to  take  post  on  the  pivot  flank  of  the  column,  the  former  op- 
posite the  leading,  and  the  latter  opposite  the  rear  division.  The  colonel 
of  a  battalion  receiving  instruction  lias  no  fixed  post,  but  in  columns  of  sev- 
eral battalions,  the  colonel  will,  habitually,  take  post  on  the  pivot  flank  of 
the  column,  eight  or  ten  paces  from  the  guides,  and  opposite  the  centre  of 
the  battalion.  The  adjutant  and  sergeant-major  shall  be  near  the  lieuten- 
ant-colonel and  major,  respectively.     (See  No.  42.) 

876.  (PI.  IX.  Fig,  1.)  When  the  battalion  is  to  prolong  its  direction  to- 
wards the  right  or  left,  or  is  to  march  perpendicularly,  or  diagonally,  to  the 
front  or  rear  of  one  of  its  flanks,  the  colonel  will  cause  it  to  break  to  the 
right  or  left  as  just  prescribed  ;  but,  when  the  battalion  is  to  break  to  the 
right,  in  order  to  march  to  the  left,  or  the  reverse,  the  company  on  the 
flank  will  march  forward  twice  the  extent  of  its  front,  while  the  other  com- 
panion are  wheeling  into  column;  and  for  this  purpose,  the  colonel  will 
command,  Break  to  the  right  to  march  to  the  left ;  or  Break  to  the  left 
to  march  to  the  right,  before  commanding,  Companies — right  (or  left) 
wheel. 


ARTICLE  SECOND. 

To  File  to  the  Bear  into  Open  Columns. 

877.  To  effect  this,  right  in  front,  the  colonel  commands, 

1.  By  right  of  companies,  rear,  into  column.     2.  Battalion, 
right — face.     3.  March. 

878.  {PI.  IX.  Fig.  2.)  At  the  first  word,  the  captains  will  place  them- 
selves ill  front  of  the  centre  of  their  respective  companies,  and  caution 
them  to  face  to  the  right ; 

879.  At  the  second,  the  battalion  will  face  ;  each  captain  will  move 
quickly  to  the  right  of  his  company,  causing  the  two  tiles  on  the  right  to 
disengage  to  the  rear,  the  front  file  to  its  right  the  breadth  of  two  ranks  ; 
the  second  file  advancing  oSu  the  left  shoulder;  which  being  effected. 
each  captain  will  move  opt^sTte  the  left  file  of  the  company,  immediately 
on  his  right,  placing  himself  so  as  to  press  lightly  his  breast  against  the 
left  arm  of  the  front  rank  man  of  that  tile  ;  the  captain  of  the  company  on 

the  right  of  the  battalion  will  place  himself  in  the  Same  manner  as  if  there 
were  a  company  on  his  right,  aligning  himself  on  the  other  captains;  each 
covering  sergeant  will  move  at  the  same  time  to  the  rear  of  his  company, 
and  place  himself  in  front  of  the  front  rank  man  of  the  first  file,  to  con- 
duct it. 

880.  At  the  word  March,  the  first  file  of  each  company  will  wheel  to 
fhc  r'.ght,  the  coveting  sergeant  conducting  it,  perpendicularly  to  the 
rear";  the  following  files  wiil  wheel,  successively,  on  the  sane  ground; 

92 


PiATE  IX. 


School  of  the  Ballaian. 


^iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiniiin^  // 


hi 


■jiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiniiiiifc    c/ 


TMiiHiiyiiiiiiiiiiiiiiHiini^   a/^ 


p'llllllillllllllllligllillflln)     w 


nlllli1lilii!!lliil'i'll:i:i,j-)iU     £/^  Pf.N 


nlllfaillMllllllilllllfiJl'lL        ^J 


^       i  i 


b-J- 


■:$£ 


Jiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii iiiiiniiiu     ^/ 


^|,i:i-,:'|,"-^7 

<?        ':  : 


rr'.-     '      '■  -    ''"%i 

o 


T 
J* 


:        3 


r'-  '  -—-J 


—  ~"\       "I 


J     \: 


c 


4illlliiii,iiliiiiiiiiinliM 


M:i.'-"ii!iiJii:ii'i',P 


£3 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   BATTALION— PART   III.  73 

the  captains   will  not  move,  observing  their  companies  file  before  Jiem, 
and,  at  the  instant  the  last  file  shall  have  wheeled,  will  command, 
1.   Company.     2.  Halt.    3.  Front.     4.  Left— dress. 

881.  At  the  instant  the  company  fronts,  the  guide  of  the  left  will  place 
himself  opposite  the  captain,  against  whose  breast  he  will  press  his  left 
arm,  lightly. 

882.  At  the  fourth  word,  the  company  will  align  itself  on  the  guide  of 
the  left ;  the  captain  will  direct  the  alignment  so  that  the  position  of  the 
company  may  be  perpendicular  to  that  it  occupied  inline;  Cor  this  purpose, 
he  will  move  about  two  paces  without  the  flank,  the  better  to  ascertain  the 
direction. 

8S3.  The  company  being  aligned,_fhe  captain  will  command,  Front, 
and  place  himself  in  front  of  its  centre.     This  will  be  a  general  ruie. 

884.  To  file  into  column,  left  in  front,  the  colonel  wjU  give  the  same 
commands  as  above,  substituting  left  for  right. 

885.  The  movement  is  executed  on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse 
means  ;  the  captain  shifting  to  his  left,  and  the  guide  of  the  left  placing 
himself  in  position  to  lead,  when  the  two  files  break  to  the  rear. 


Remarks  on  Filing  to  the  Rear  into  Open  Column. 

886.  This  manoeuvre  will  be  employed,  when  want  of  room  prevents 
wheeling  forward,  as  prescribed  in  the  preceding  article  ;  and  as  often  as 
the  pivot  flank  of  the  column  is  to  march  on  the  prolongation  of  the  line 
from  which  it  was  formed. 


ARTICLE  THIRD. 

To  form  Close  Column  (or  Mass)  from  Line. 

(Omitted,  because  these  formations  cannot  be  well  executed  without  the 
lock-step,  and  because  the  column  at  half  distance  is  supposed  sufficicrit  in 
an  abstract  of  this  kind.     See  Art.  Sixth,  Part  III.) 


PART  III. 

March  in  Column,  and  various  other  Movements  relating 
to  the  Column. 


ARTICLE  FIRST. 

March  in  Column  at  Full  Distance. 

932.  When  the  colonel  intends  to  put  the  column  in  march,  he  will  point 
out  to  the  leading  guide  two  distinct  objects,  in  front  in  the  line  of  direc- 
tion ;  the  guide  will  immediately  face  towards  these  objects,  taking,  as  a 
point  of  sight,  the  more  remote,  and,  as  an  intermediate  point,  the  nearer 
object. 

933.  If  only  one  distinct  object  offer  in  the  line  of  direction,  the  guide 
will  face  towards  it,  as  before,  choosing,  immediately,  an  intermediate  point 
on  the  ground. 

934.  Finally,  if  no  distinct  object  offer,  the  colonel  will  detach  the  lieu- 
tenant-eolom?1  thirty  or  forty  paces  in  front  of,  and  facing  towards,  the  col- 
umn, and  establish  him,  by  a  signal  with  his  sword,  on  the  line  of  direction. 
The  lieutenant-colonel  being  thus  established,  the  leading  guide  will  face 

35 


74  SCHOOL  OF   THE  BATTALION— PART   III. 

towards  him,  immediately  choosing  two  points  on  the  ground,  in  the  line 
passing  between  his  heels  ;  afterwards  assuming,  successively,  new  points 
on  the  ground,  as  the  column  advances,  as  explained,  No.  522.  (See,  also, 
No.  42.) 

935.  These  dispositions  made,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.   Column— forward.     2.   Guides— left  (or  right.)     3.  March. 

936.  By  marching  always  on  the  prolongation  ot  the  two  points  estab- 
lished, the  leading  guide  is  enabled  to  move  correctly,  on  the  line  of  direc 
tion  ;  if  these  points  be  objects  elevated  above  the  level  of  the  ground,  he 
is  certain  of  being  in  the  true  direction,  when  the  nearest  point  masks  the 
most  distant. 

937.  The  following  guides  will  maintain  the  exact  step  and  distance, 
inarching,  each,  in  the  path  of  the  guide  immediately  preceding  him>  with- 
out attending  to  the  general  direction. 

93?.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  be  near  the  leading  guide,  to  fee  that 
he  does  not  deviate  from  the  direction,  and  that  the  guide  of  the  second  di- 
vision marches  exactly  in  the  trace  of  the  first. 

939.  The  major  will  post  himself  near  the  guide  of  the  rear  division,  and 
should  any  of  the  intermediate  guides  deviate,  sensibly,  from  the  line  of 
direction,  he  will  rectify  (hat  error,  and  prevent  its  being  communicated  ; 
but  such  correction  will  only  take  place  when  it  may  be  necessary  to  pre- 
vent considerable  deviations. 

940.  The  colonel  will  habitually  be  on  the  pivot  flank,  and  see  that  the 
step,  the  distance,  and  all  the  principles  of  marching  in  column,  as  pre- 
scribed in  the  School  of  the- Company,  are  observed. 

941.  These  means,  which  the  practice  of  the  School  of  the  Company 
must  have  rendered  familiar,  will  enable  a  column  to  march  in  a  given  di- 
rection, with  sufficient  accuracy  to  form  line  to  the  front,  or  faced  to  the 

.   or  on  the  >  ight  or  lift ;  or  to  form  close,  from  open  column. 
912.  But  when  a  column,  arriving  in  front  or  rear  of  a  line,  is  to  prolong 
ft   ;    line,  in  order  to  wheel  up  to  the  left,  or  right,  into  it,  it  is  essential 
that  such  column  should  neither  intersect,  or  deviate  sensibly  from  the  new 
line.     To  ensure  this,  the  following  means  will  be  employed  : 

943.  (PI.  X.  Fig.  1.)  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  arrive  in  front  of 
the  nnc  the  guida  of  the  bacung  division  will  airect  'tis  im.-ch  en  the  in 
termediate  point,  previously  established  on  that  line,  in  order  to  indicate 
the  point  where  the  column  is  to  turn  to  the  left,  and  prolong  the  new  di- 
rection ;  the  chief  of  the  leading  division  will  not  cause  it  to  turn,  till  it  has 
passed  four  paces  beyond  the"  line  ;  and,  at  the  instant  i:.  has  turned,  the 
general  guide  of  the  right  will  place  himself  on  the  line  opposite  this  di- 
vision, face  to  the  two  points  of  direction  in  front,  which  the  colonel  and 
lieutenant-colonel  will  point  out  to  him,  and  march,  correctly,  on  the  pro- 
longation of  those  points. 

944.  The  bearer  of  the  regimental*  color  will  place  himself  in  the  same 
manner,  at  the  instant  the  color-division  has  turned  ;  ami  will  march  on  (he 
line  opposite  his  division,  observing  to  carry  the  colors  perpendicularly  be- 
fore the  middle  of  his  body,  and  to  march  exactly  in  the  direction  of  the 
general  guide,  r.  ho  precedes  him,  ami  of  the  point  of  sight  in  from  ;  which 

ited  to  him. 

945.  Finally,  the  general  guide  of  the  left  will  place  him -elf  also  on  (he 
line,  at  the  instant  the  rear  division  Bhall  have  turned,  and  march,  accu- 
rately, in  the  direction  of  the  regimental  colors,  and  general  guide  of  the 
right,  who  precede  him. 

<>l<;.  The  guide  of  the  leading  division  will  always  march  opposite  the 
of  the  right,  and  about  four  paces  inside  of  him;  the  guides 

*  [f  there  be  but  one  color  with  the  battalion,  ihis  might  be  the  state  «o'.or.  (Sp» 
nctu  to   N 

96 


Plate  X. 


School  of  the  Battalion. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART   III.  75 

of  the  following  divisions  will  each  march  in  the  trace  of  the  guide  who 
immediately  precedes,  as  prescribed,  No.  937. 

947.  The  colonel,  placed  on  the  flank,  outside  of  the  general  guides,  will 
see  that  the  column  marches  nearly  parallel  to,  and  about  four  paces  inside 
of,  the  line  of  the  general  guides. 

94S.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will  see  that  the  general  guides 
march,  correctly,  in  the  direction  of  the  two  points  in  front ;  and,  for  this 
purpose,  they  will  sometimes  place  themselves  in  rear  of  the  regimental 
colors,  or  of  the  general  guide  of  the  left. 

951.  (PL  X.  Fig.  2.)  If  the  column,  right  in  front,  arrive  in  rear  of  the 
line,  the  colonel  will  conduct  the  guide  of  the  left  (the  pivot  flank)  of  the 
leading  division,  not  on  the  intermediate  point  situated  on  that  line,  but 
more  to  the  left  by,  at  least,  the  whole  front  of  the  division,  ordering  it  to 
wheel  to  the  right,  in  such  manner  that,  when  the  wheel  is  finished,  the 
guide  may  be  four  paces  within  the  intermediate  point. 

952.  At  the  instant  the  leading  division,  having  wheeled  to  Jie  right, 
shall  continence  marching  parallel  to  the  line,  the  general  guide  of  the 
right  will  place  himself  on  the  line,  directing  himself  on  the  two  points  in 
front ;  the  color-bearer  will  also  place  himself  on  the  line,  when  his  divis- 
ion has  wheeled  ;  and,  lastly,  the  general  guide  of  the  left,  after  the  rear 
division  has  wheeled. 

954.  These  movements  will  be  executed  in  a  column,  left  in  front,  and 
arriving  in  front  or  in  rear  of  the  line,  on  the  same  principles,  by  inverso 
means. 

955.  If,  lastly,  the  column,  instead  of  arriving  in  front  or  in  rear  of  the 
line,  should  arrive  on 'he  right  ©r  left  of  it,  and  has  to  prolong  that  line,  in 
oraer  to  wheel  up  afterwards,  to  the  left  or  right,  into  line,  the  colonel 
would  order  the  general  guides  to  the  flank  of  the  column,  by  the  com- 
mand, General  guides  on  the  line  ;  when  these  guides  would  prolong  the 
line,  as  prescribed  above. 

056.  If,  instead  of  causing  the  column  to  march  with  the  cadenced  step, 
the  colonel  wish  it  to  march  with  the  route  step,  the  word  March  would 
be  preceded  by  Route  step. 

957.  All  that  is  prescribed  above,  for  maintaining  the  direction,  is  equal- 
ly applicable  to  a  column,  marching  with  the  route  step. 


Remarks  on  the  March  in  Open  Column. 

951).  The  march  in  quick  time  will  be  practised,  when  the  soldiers  arc 
well  confirmed  in  the  cadence  of  the  ordinary  step. 

9G0.  Two  non-commissioned  officers,  thoroughly  instructed,  are  to  be 
selected  as  general  guides  ;  they  will  be  particularly  qualified  in  the  ac- 
curacy of  the  step,  and  in  prolonging,  without  deviation,  a  given  direc- 
tion :  these  two  non-commissioned  officers  will  be  placed  in  the  rank  of 
file-closers  on  the  right  and  left  of  their  battalion,  and  be  deemed  in  the 
number  of  the  file-closers  of  the  right  and  left  companies  ;  they  will  be 
distinguished  by  the  appellation  of  general  guide  of  the  right,  and  general 
guide  of  the  left. 

9G1.  When  the  color-bearer  acts  as  a  general  guide,  he  will  carry  his 
colors  perpendicularly  between  the  eyes,  the  heel  of  the  staff  as  high  as 
the  waist;  he  will  be  replaced  in  his  rank  by  his  covering  corporal. 

982.  When  a  column  prolongs  a  line,  it  is  very  important  that  the  gen- 
eral guides  should  march  correctly  on  that  line  ;  it  is,  therefore,  necessary 
that  the  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  and  major,  whose  duty  it  is  to  main- 
tain the  guides  on  the  direction,  should  be  able,  always,  to  see  tho  objects 
on  which  the  march  of  the  general  guide  is  conducted. 

•965.  For  the  direction  of  a  column  of  one  or  two  battalions,  it  will  be 
sufficient  to  employ  men  on  foot,  to  establish  the  line  which  the  general 
guides  are  to  follow,  when  objects  on  the  ground  do  not  offer  themselves 

99 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION  -PART    III. 


ARTICLE    SECOND. 

Column  of  Route. 

966.  To  take  the  route  step  from  tlic  cadenced  step,  or  the  reverse,  the 
colonel  will  give  the  commands  prescribed,  No.  685,  and  following. 

967.  It  is  a  fixed  principle,  that  the  depth  of  an  open  column,  whether 
of  manoeuvre  or  of  route,  shall  be  less  than  the  front  of  its  line,  by  the 
front  of  a  division. 

968.  The  observance  of  this  principle  requires  no  particular  rule  in  a 
column  of  manoeuvre  ;  but,  as  columns  of  route  frequently  meet  with  nar- 
row roads,  bridges,  and  defiles,  which  oblige  them  to  diminish  the  front  of 
divisions,  it  is  necessary  to  point  out  the  method  to  be  pursued  in  such 
cases,  to  enable  the  column  to  march  at  ease  as  long  as  possible,  without 
toe  inCCr.'.'CI:i?r.CC  Ot  len^'-bening  out. 

969.  (PI.  XL  Fig.  1  and  S.)  A  column  cf  route,  as  in  inferior  or  route 
marches,  will  assume,  from  the  commencement  of  each  particular  m&rch, 
that  front,  which  the  nature  of  the  road  or  defile  will  permit  it  to  carry  for 
the  greater  part  of  the  distance  to  be  gained,  from  halt  to  halt. 

970.  If  an  unforeseen  want  of  space,  only,  or  an  occasional  obstruction, 
render  a  diminution  of  front  necessary,  it  will  be  made  by  the  commands 
and  means  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Company. 

971.  Diminutions  of  front  will  be  executed  by  divisions,  successively, 
on  an  intimation  from  the  colonel  or  lieutenant-colonel,  given  to  the  chiet 
of  the  leading  division  ;  each  breaking  on  the  ground  where  the  leading 
one  broke  ;  or  the  colonel  may  cause  all  the  companies  or  platoons  to 
break  at  once,  by  the  commands, 

1.  Break  into  platoons  (or  sections.)     2.  March. 

972.  (PI.  XL  Fig.  3  and  4.)  These  commands  will  also  be  executed,  as 
has  been  presc,;bed,  No.  692,  and  following. 

973.  (PL  XL  Fig.  5.)  The  column  of  divisions  maybe  caused  to  march 
by  a  Hank,  either  successively,  by  divisions,  or  at  once,  by  the  whole  col- 
umn ;  in  either  case,  by  the  means  prescribed,  No.  592,  and  following. 

974.  If  the  column  have  the  left  in  front,  the  captains  and  guides  would 
place  themselves  as  prescribed  for  marching  by  the  left  flank,  No.  1395, 
and  following. 

975.  The  leading  division  will  follow  the  windings  of  the  road,  or  defile  ; 
the  other  divisions,  without  occupying  the  attention  with  the  direction,  will, 
each,  successively  follow  the  preceding.  The  soldieis  will  not  endeavor 
to  avoid  bad  roads,  but  each,  as  much  as  possible,  march  in  his  particular 
line  of  direction. 

976.  When  the  column  marches  by  the  route  step,  changes  of  direction 
take  place  always  without  command;  the  chiefs  of  divisions  need  only  cau- 
tion them,  when  the  change  of  direction  is  considerable  ;  the  rear  rank, 
and  the  files  in  the  rear,  will  change  direction,  successively,  on  the  same 
ground. 

977.  The  front,  in  which  the  column  commenced  the  particular  march, 
having  hern  Iliat  of  company,  when  the  two  leading  platoons  have  passed 
the  obstruction,  the  captain  "will  form  his  company,  it  so  ordered,  and  the 
captains  of  the  companies,  following  in  platoons,  will  execute  the  same 
movement,  successively,  on  the  same  ground. 

978.  If  the  front  of  the  column  had  ''.•en  thai  o£ platoon,  the  chief  of  the 
leading  platoon  would,  in  like  manner.,  form  platoon,  as  soon  as  the  two 
leading -sections  have  |>:i»-,.d  the  obstruction.  The  following  chiefs  of  pla- 
toons would,  without  command,  follow  the  example,  as  above. 

979.  Finally,  the  chief  of  the  leading  division  will  order  up  to  (he  front, 
fi)  M  br  k.n  oil,  as  the  road  or  defile  widens,  on  an  intimation  from 

100 


School  of  the  Battalion. 


fe 


To  face  pact  1&. 


School  of  the  Battalion. 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION— PAKT   III.  77 

officer,  which  would  be  followed  by  the  other  chiefs  on  arriving  on  the 
same  ground. 

981.  The  colonel,  or  lieutenant-colonel,  remains  at  the  head  of  the  bat 
talion,  to  regulate  the  rate  of  march  of  the  leading  division,  and  to  indicate 
to  the  chief  of  that  division  the  instant  at  which  he  is  to  execute  the  vari- 
ous movements  prescribed  above. 


General  Remarks  on  the  Column  of  Route. 

997.  When  the  breadth  cf  the  narrowest  part  of  the  defile  is  previously- 
known,  it  is  preferable  to  diminish  all  the  divisions  of  the  battalion  at  once, 
whether  by  platoons,  sections  or  files;  but  to  increase  front,  it  is  preferable 
that  each  division  should  execute  the  movement  as  it  comes  out  from  the 
defile. 

998.  Divisions  must  step  out  well,  in  obliquing,  when  front  is  diminished 
or  increased  ;  and  files,  in  breaking  off,  or  in  forming  up  again,  must  fol- 
low this  rule.  In  order  to  avoid  an  elongation  of  the  column,  in  diminish- 
ing or  increasing  front,  successively,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance,  that  no 
division  should  march  slower,  or  step  shorter,  while  the  preceding  one  is 
executing  the  movement. 

999.  If  the  battalion  has  to  march  by  a  flank  to  pass  a  defile,  the  march 
will  be  by  the  cadenced  step,  when  great  care  will  be  required  to  prevent 
the  files  from  opening. 

1000.  (PI.  XI.  Fig.  6.)  If  a  column  meet  with  a  pass  so  narrow,  as  to 
require  defiling  with  a  single  man  in  front,  the  commander  will  order  the 
front  rank  man  of  each  file  to  pass  first,  followed  closely  by  his  rear  rank 
man  ;  the  files  to  follow  each  other  in  proper  order,  as  quickly  as  possible; 
the  divisions  to  form  up  as  they  pass,  the  leading  division  marching  for- 
ward, till  a  sufficient  space  be  left,  between  it  and  the  defile,  to  contain 
the  battalion  in  close  column,  when  the  leading  division  will  be  halted. 
The  officers  and  sergeants  will  pass  between  the  tiles,  corresponding  with 
their  respective  places. 


ARTICLE  THIRD. 

To  Change  Direction  in  Column  at  Full  Distance. 

1001.  (PI.  XII.  Fig.  1  and  2.)  The  colonel,  wishing  the  column  to 
change  direction,  will  caution,  to  that  effect,  the  chief  of  the  leading  divis- 
ion, and  repair  in  his  own  person  to  the  spot  where  the  movement  id  to 
commence  ;  he  will  place  himself  there,  whether  the  change  of  direction 
be  on  the  pivot  or  reverse  flank,  (as  represented,  PI.  XII.  Fig.  1  and  2,) 
and  remain  in  that  position  till  the  rear  division  of  his  battalion  arrives. 

1002.  The  guide  of  each  division  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  pass  before, 
and  close  to  the  head  of  the  horse  of  the  colonel ;  and,  when  there,  the 
chief  of  the  division  will  cause  his  division  to  change  direction,  according 
to  the  principles,  and  by  the  commands,  prescribed  No.  623,  and  following. 

1003.  When  the  column  changes  direction  on  the  reverse  flank,  the 
colonel  will  observe  that  the  guide  moves  accurately  on  the  arc.  of  a 
circle. 

1094.  When  there  is  mo  distinct  object  in  the  new  direction,  to  serve  as 
a  point  of  view  to  the  guide  of  the  leading  division,  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  move,  beforehand,  thirty  or  forty  paces  to  the  front,  and  the  leading 
guide,  as  soon  as  he  has  turned,  will  take  points  on  the  ground,  in  the  lino 
passing  from  himself  between  the  heels  of  the  lieutenant-colonel,  who 
will  face  towards  him ;  this  leading  guide  will  assume  new  points  as  he  ad- 
vances.    (See  No.  42.) 

1005.  The  major  will  see  that  the  guides  conduct  their  march  on  the 
colonel,  placed  at  the  wheeling  point,  so  as  to  graze  the  head  of  his  hors?. 
I  "  101 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART  III.       77 

officer,  which  would  be  followed  by  the  other  chiefs  on  arriving  on  the 
same  ground. 

981.  The  colonel,  or  lieutenant-colonel,  remains  at.  the  head  of  the  bat 
talion,  to  regulate  the  rate  of  march  of  the  leading  division,  and  to  indicate 
to  the  chief  of  that  division  the  instant  at  which  he  is  to  execute  the  vari- 
ous movements  prescribed  above. 


General  Remarks  on  the  Column  of  Route. 

997.  When  the  breadth  of  the  narrowest  part  of  the  defile  is  previously- 
known,  it  is  preferable  to  diminish  all  the  divisions  of  the  battalion  at  once, 
whether  by  platoons,  sections  or  files;  but  to  increase  front,  it  is  preferable 
that  each  division  should  execute  the  movement  as  it  comes  out  from  the 
defile. 

998.  Divisions  must  step  out  well,  in  obliquing,  when  front  is  diminished 
or  increased  ;  and  files,  in  breaking  off,  or  in  forming  up  again,  must  fol- 
low this  rule.  In  order  to  avoid  an  elongation  of  the  column,  in  diminish- 
ing or  increasing  front,  successively,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance,  that  no 
division  should  march  slower,  or  step  shorter,  while  the  preceding  one  is 
executing  the  movement. 

999.  If  the  battalion  has  to  march  by  a  flank  to  pass  a  defile,  the  march 
will  be  by  the  cadenced  step,  when  great  care  will  be  required  to  prevent 
the  files  from  opening. 

1000.  (PI.  XI.  Fig.  6.)  If  a  column  meet  with  a  pass  so  narrow,  as  to 
require  defiling  with  a  single  man  in  front,  the  commander  will  order  the 
front  rank  man  of  each  file  to  pass  first,  followed  closely  by  his  rear  rank 
man  ;  the  files  to  follow  each  other  in  proper  order,  as  quickly  as  possible ; 
the  divisions  to  form  up  as  they  pass,  the  leading  division  marching  for- 
ward, till  a  sufficient  space  be  left,  between  it  and  the  defile,  to  contain 
the  battalion  in  close  column,  when  the  leading  division  will  be  halted. 
The  officers  and  sergeants  will  pass  between  the  flies,  corresponding  with 
their  respective  places. 


ARTICLE  THIRD. 

To  Change  Direction  in  Column  at  Full  Distance. 

1001.  (PI.  XII.  Fig.  1  and  2.)  The  colonel,  wishing  the  column  to 
change  direction,  will  caution,  to  that  effect,  the  chief  of  the  leading  divis- 
ion, and  repair  in  his  own  person  to  the  spot  where  the  movement  is  to 
commence  ;  he  will  place  himself  there,  whether  the  change  of  direction 
be  on  the  pivot  or  reverse  flank,  (as  represented,  PI.  XII.  Fig.  1  and  2,) 
and  remain  in  that  position  till  the  rear  division  of  his  battalion  arrives. 

1002.  The  guide  of  each  division  will  direct  himself  so  as  to  pass  before, 
and  close  to  the  head  of  the  horse  of  the  colonel  ;  and,  when  there,  the 
chief  of  the  division  will  cause  his  division  to  change  direction,  according 
to  the  principles,  and  by  the  commands,  prescribed  No.  623,  and  following. 

1003.  When  the  column  changes  direction  on  the  reverse  flank,  the 
colonel  will  observe  that  the  guide  moves  accurately  on  the  arc  of  a 
circle. 

1004.  When  there  is  bo  distinct  object  in  the  new  direction,  to  serve  as 
a  point  of  view  to  the  guide  of  the  leading  division,  the  lieutenant-colonel 
will  move,  beforehand,  thirty  or  forty  paces  to  the  front,  and  the  leading- 
guide,  as  soon  as  he  has  turned,  will  take  points  on  the  ground,  in  the  line 
passing  from  himself  between  the  heels  of  the  lieutenant-colonel,  who 
will  face  towards  him;  this  leading  guide  will  assume  new  points  as  he  ad- 
vances.    (See  No.  42.) 

1095.  The  major  will  see  that  the  guides  conduct  their  march  on  the 
colonel,  placed  at  the  wheeling  point,  so  as  to  graze  the  head  of  his  horsy. 
I*  101 


73  SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION—  PART   III. 

Remarks  on  the  Changes  of  Direction  in  Column  at  Full 
Distance. 

1007.  It  has  beer,  shown,  in  the  School  of  the  Company,  how  important 
it  is,  that  each  division  should  execute,  successively,  its  change  of  direc- 
tion, precisely  on  the  same  ground  where  the  leading  one  effected  it,  and 
arrive  there  at  right  angles  to  the  line  passing  through  the  flank  of  the 
column;  that  the  wheeling  point  should  be  cleared  in  such  manner,  that 
the  wheeling  division  may,  at  no  time,  obstruct  the  movement  of  the  suc- 
ceeding one,  and  that  the  guide  of  each  division  should  neither  step  out, 
nor  step  short,  in  turning:  the  deeper  the  column  is,  the  more  strictly  ought 
these  principles  to  be  observed. 

1008.  In  instructing  bis  battalion  separately,  the  colonel  need  not  post 
himself  at  the  wheeling  point,  where  it  will  be  sufficient  to  station  a  marker. 


ARTICLE  FOURTH. 


Change  of  Direction  in  Column  of  Full  Distance,  by  the 
Prompt  Manoeuvre. 

(Omitted.) 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 

To  Halt  the  Column. 


1026.  The  column  being  in  march,  the  colonel,  wishing  to  halt  it,  will 
command, 

1.   Column.     2.  Halt. 

1027.  At  the  word  Halt,  repeated  promptly  by  the  captains,  the  col- 
umn will  halt;  no  guide  will  move,  although  be  be  not  at  his  proper  dis- 
tance, nor  on  the  line  of  the  guides  preceding,  him. 

1028.  The  column  being  halted,  if  the  colonel  wish  to  form  line,  he  will 
place  himself  a  little  in  front  of  the  leading  guide,  and  face  towards  him  ; 
the  latter  and  the  following  guide  will  fix  their  eyes  on  the  colonel,  in  or- 
der  to  conform  readily  to  the  direction  he  may  indicate  to  them. 

1029.  Should  the  colonel  judge  it  necessary  to  place  the  guides  on  a  gen- 
eral line  of  direction,  be  will  place  the  two  iirst  on  the  line,  and  immedi- 
a  aly  command, 

G uides  on  the  line. 

1030.  At  this  command,  all  the  other  guides  will  promptly  cover  (lie  two 
first,  precisely  a'  w  heeling  distance  from  each  other  ;  the  colonel  will  ver- 
ify :neir  positions,  and  then  command, 

Lift  (or  right) — dress. 

1031.  At  this  command,  each  company  will  align  itself  on  its  guide,  by 
closing  to  the  left  ;  the  captains  will  plan-  themselves  two  paces  without 
their  guides,  promptly  align  their  respective  companies  parallel  to  that  im- 
mediately preceding,  and  then  command,  Front, stepping  quickly  to  their 
places  in  column. 

1032.  Should  the  colonel  deem  it  unnecessary  to  establish  the  guide?  on 
a  general  line,  he  need  only  rectify  the  position  of  those  too  much  within 
or  without  the  line  of  direction,  by  commanding.  (iitsdc  of  such   Company, 

(or  >.'  such  companies,)  to  your  ri^lit,  (or  to  your  hft .-)  at  this,  the  guides 
named  will  piece  them  elves  oh  the  line  of  direction,  all  the  other  guides 
standing  fast 


. 


Tlate  XII. 


School  of  the  Battalion. 


F 


-mm 


I 

J     8 


S'lilni'iiiliilliilii'uiP 


miipi-ii'iiiiiii u» 


ii^llllllllllllllllllllIP 


Hiiiiiiiiiiiiidiiiiiiiiiiin 


& 


103 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART    III.  79 

1033.  If,  finally,  the  general  guides  were  marching  on  the  flank  of  the 
column,  the  colonel,  having  halted  it,  would  place  himself  in  rear  of  the 
color-bearer,  to  ascertain  whether  he  and  the  leading  general  guide  arc 
accurately  on  the  prolongation  of  the  two  points  in  front  on  which  they 
marched  ;  if  not  on  this  line,  the  coloi.el  will  place  them  on  it;  the  major, 
in  like  manner,  will  ascertain,  and  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  position  of  the 
general  guide  of  the  rear,  which  being  accomplished,  the  colonel  will 
command, 

Guides  on  the  line. 

1034.  At  this,  each  guide  on  the  pivot  flank  shall  step  quickly  on  the 
line  of  the  general  guides*  facing  towards  the  head  of  the  column  ;  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel, in  Front  of  the   leading  general  guide,  towards  whom  he 

.faces;  and  the  major,  placed  in  rear  of  the  general  guide  of  the  rear,  shall 
promptly  align  the  guides  of  divisions.  If  the  general  guides  occupy  the 
places  where  the  left  of  the  divisions,  opposite  to  them  respectively,  are  to 
rest,  when  dressed  to  that  flank,  (which  is  supposed  in  Nos.  943,  and  fol 
lowing,)  the  particular  guides  of  these  three  divisions  would  not  place  them- 
selves on  the  alignment,  but  would,  on  the  next  command,  (below,)  fall 
back,  momentarily,  to  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

1035.  The  colonel,  having  verified  the  position  of  the  guides,  will  com- 
mand, 

Left  (or  right) — dress. 

1036.  At  this  command,  all  the  companies  will  incline  to  their  respective 
guides,  and  will  be  promptly  aligned  by  their  chiefs,  who,  for  this  purpose, 
will  place  themselves  two  paces  outside  of  their  respective  guides. 

Remark. 

(Omitted.) 


ARTICLE  SIXTH. 


To  Close  to  Half  Distance  from  Open  Column 

103S.  The  battalion  in  column  of  companies,  at  full  distance,  would  be 
closed  to  half  distance,  by  the  following  commands  from  the  colonel : 
1.   Column,  close  to  half  distance.     2.  March. 

1039.  At  the  word  March,  repeated  by  all  the  captains,  except  the 
leading  one,  the  leading  company,  if  halted,  stands  fast;  its  captain  giving 
the  word,  Left  (or  right) — dress.  But,  if  the  column  be  marchiDg,  the 
captain  of  the  leading  company,  on  a  caution  from  the  colonel,  will  order, 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Left  (or  right) — dress. 

1040.  At  the  word  March,  from  the  colonel,  all  the  companies,  except 
the  leading  company,  will  step  off  together,  each  being  halted  as  above,  by 
its  captain,  when  at  half  distance  from  the  preceding  company. 

1041.  At  the  instant  each  company  halts,  the  guide  of  the  left,  (if  the 
right  be  in  front,)  or  the  guide  of  the  right,  (if  the  left  be  in  front.)  will 
quickly  place  himself  on  the  line  of  the  preceding  guides ;  the  captain 
will  move  two  paces  outside  of  his  guide,  and  command,  Left  (or  right) — 

DRESS. 

1042.  The  company  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  order,  Front,  mov- 
ing two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company. 

1044.  The  colonel,  on  the  pivot  flank  of  the  column,  superintends  the 
execution  of  th  ,  movement,  observing  that  the  Captains  halt  their  compa- 
nies at  half  distance. 

1045.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  post  himself  some  paces  in  front  of 
the  leading  company,  facing  to  its  guide  on  the  pivot  flank ;  and  carefully 

105 


80  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART   III. 

rectify  the  position  of  each  guide,  as  each  places  himself  on  the  line  of  di- 
rection. 

1046.  The  major,  near  the  flank  of  the  rear  company,  will  follow  the 
movement. 


ARTICLE  SEVENTH. 


To  March  in  Column  at  Half  Distance. 

1049.  A  column  at  half  distance  is  put  in  march  from  a  halt  by  the  same 
commands  as  if  it  were  at  full  distance. 

1050.  The  means  of  preserving  the  line  of  direction  of  a  column  at  half 
distance  are  the  same  as  for  a  column  at  full  distance,  with  the  exception 
of  general  guides. 

1051.  When  the  colonel  wishes  to  halt  the  column  at  half  distance,  he 
will  give  the  commands  for  halting  a  column  at  full  distance ;  and  if,  after- 
wards, he  deem  it  necessary  to  establish  the  guides  on  a  general  line,  he 
will  employ  the  command  and  means  prescribed,  No.  1029. 

1052.  In  columns  at  half  distance,  the  captains  will  repeat  the  words 
March,  Halt,  as  in  a  column  at  full  distance. 


ARTICLE  EIGHTH. 

To  Change  Direction  in  Column  at  Half  Distance. 

1053.  (PI.  XIII.  Fig.  1.)  A  column  in  march,  at  half  distance,  changes 
direction  either  on  the  pivot  or  reverse  (lank,  on  the  same  principles,  and 
by  the  same  commands,  as  a  column  at  full  distance,  except  that,  in  chang- 
ing direc'ion  on  the  reverse  flank,  the  pivot  man  of  each  company  will 
take  steps  of  fourteen,  in  lieu  of  seven  inches;  for,  without  this,  the  wheel- 
ing point  would  not  be  cleared  in  time. 


ARTICLE  NINTH. 

To  Change  Direction  in  Close  Column. 

(Omitted.) 


ARTICLE  TENTH. 

Countermarch. 


1081.  If  the  column  be  at  full  or  half  distance,  the  countermarch  will  De 
executed  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed,  Nc.  717,  and  following, 
trie  colonel  substituting  battalion  for  company  ;  and  each  captain  will  put, 
before  the  caution  company,  which  precedes  Halt,  the  appellation  of  First, 
Second,  &c.  according  to  the  number  of  his  company. 

1093.  The  colonel,  on  the  pivet  Bank,  superintends  the  general  execu- 
tion of  the  movement.  The  countermarch  being  executed,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  post  himself  near  the  roar  division,  now  become  the  front,  and 
the  major,  near  the  front  division,  now  become  the  rear. 


ARTICLE  ELEVENTH. 

To  Form  Close  Column  of  Q rand  Division,  from  a  Halt 
ed  Close  Column  of  Companies. 

(Omitted.) 
106 


Plate  XIII. 


School  of  the  Battalion. 


q n...,ja... ... 


\ 


SCHOOL  OF   THE   BATTALION— PART   IV.  t 

PART  IV. 
Different  Methods  of  Passing  from  Column  inio  Line 


ARTICLE  FIRST. 

Manner  of  Determining  tLe  Line. 

I     1119.  The  line  may  be  marked  off  in  three  difft  rent  manners. 

1120.  ]  st.  By  placing  two  markers  in  the  direction  to  be  given  to  thfc 
line. 

1121.  2d.  By  fixing  on  a  point  where  a  flank  is  to  rest,  and  choosing, 
afterwards,  a  second  point  in  the  direction  of  the  opposite  flank ;  by  means 
of  which  two  points,  the  line  is  determined. 

1122.  3d.  In  choosing,  at  first,  the  points  of  direction  of  the  two  flanks, 
and  determining,  afterwards,  by  intermediate  points,  the  line  passing  be- 
tween these  two  points,  both  of  which  may  sometimes  be  inaccessible. 

1123.  In  the  first  case,  the  major,  charged  with  establishing  the  line, 
will  place  two  markers,  forty  or  fifty  paces  from  each  other,  in  the  direc- 
tion previously  indicated  to  him  ;  and  they  will  constitute  the  base  of  the 
general  alignment. 

1124.  In  the  second  case,  the  point  of  appui  (support)  must  be  indicated 
to  the  major,  and  the  point  of  direction  on  the  opposite  flank  ;  the  major 
will  repair  to  the  point  of  appui,  and  fix  two  markets,  distant  from  each 
other  a  little  less  than  the  extent  of  the  front  of  the  lei  ding  division  of  the 
column,  in  the  direction  pointed  out  to  him :  the  first  of  these  markers  wiil 
be  placed  at  the  point  of  appui. 

1125.  In  the  third  case,  where  the  points  of  directiot  of  the  two  flanks 
are  given,  the  line  passing  through  them  is  determined  as  follows : 

1126.  (PI.  XIII.  Fig.  2.)  In  determining  this  line,  two  markers,  or 
mounted  officers  (a  and  b),  will  be  employed. 

1127.  The  two  points  given  being  the  steeple  (d)  to  the  right,  and  the 
tree  (c)  to  the  left,  the  marker  (a)  will  halt  while  the  other  (&),  moving  to 
some  distance  from  him,  towards  the  right,  will  bring  ths  marker  (a.)  and 
the  tree  (c)  into  the  same  line. 

1128.  The  two  markers  then  march,  wheeling  to  the  ?eft  on  the  point 
(c),  as  the  pivot ;  the  marker  (6),  during  the  whole  movement,  will  regu- 
late himself  on  the  marker  (a),  keeping  him  and  the  tree  (c)  always  in  a 
line. 

1129.  The  marker  (a),  during  the  march,  must  keep  his  eyes  fixed  on 
the  marker  (&),  in  order  to  halt  at  the  instant  the  latter  masks  the  stee- 
ple (d). 

1130.  If  the  marker  (b)  conform  exactly  to  the  movement  of  the  other, 
(a),  so  that  the  latter  masks  the  tree  (c),  at  the  moment  the  former  masks 
(d),  both  being  on  the  line  (c  d),  the  intermediate  points  are  determined. 

1131.  The  two  markers,  having  halted,  will  face  towards  each  other;  if 
not  accurately  on  the  line,  the  marker  (a)  will  rectify  the  position  as  fol- 
lows : 

1132.  Suppose  the  marker  (a)  perceive  the  steeple  (d)  to  the  left  of  thfl 
line  :  he  will  incline  a  little  to  the  left;  the  marker  (&),  alwiys  invent  en 
keeping  the  marker  (a)  and  the  tree  (c)  in  a  line,  will  follow  the  move- 
ment of  the  marker  («),  who  will  halt  when  (b)  masks  the  steeple  (<2). 

1133.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  marker  (a)  perceive  the  steeple  (d)  to  hy 
right,  he  would  incline  a  little  to  the  right,  till  the  marker  (b),  who  follow- 
ed his  movement,  masked  the  steeple  (d). 

1134.  These  in  trmediate  points  being  thus  found,  the  line  is  deter-N 
mired. 

K  109 


82  SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION —PART  IV. 

ARTICLE  SECOND. 

Different  Methods  of  Forming  Line  from  Column  at  Full 
Distance. 


1st.  To  the  left,  (or  right,) 

2d.  On  the  right,  (or  lc 

3d.  To  the  front, 

4ih.  Faced  to  the  rear 


SSreS^'^Hio.oBne. 


1,1.)  ) 


1st. —  To  Form  Line  to  the  Left  from  Column  at  Full  Distance, 
Right  in  Front. 

1135.  The  column  is  supposed  halted  ;  the  colonel,  having  rectified  the 
position  of  the  guides,  as  has  heen  heretofore  prescribed,  will  command, 

1.  Left,  into  line  wheel.     2.  March. 

1136.  At  the  first  command,  the  guide  of  the  right  of  the  leading  compa- 
ny will  move,  quickly,  on  the  line  of  the  guides  of  the  left,  facing  towards 
them,  and  placing  himself  so  as  to  be  immediately  in  front  of  one  of  the 
three  files  on  the  right  of  his  company  when  in  line.  The  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  see  that  this  guide  is  properly  placed. 

1137.  At  the  word  March,  briskly  repeated  by  the  captains,  the  man 
on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  each  company  will  face  to  the  left,  pressing 
his  breast  lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  his  guide ;  the  companies  will 
wheel  to  the  left,  conforming  to  the  principles  of  wheeling  on  a  halted 
pivot,  and  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  607.  Each  captain  will  face  about  to 
his  company,  to  conduct  the  movement;  and,  when  the  right  of  his  com- 
pany is  within  two  paces  of  the  line,  will  promptly  command, 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt. 

1138.  The  company  being  Waited,  the  captain  will  place  himself  on  the 
line,  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  company  immediately  on  the 
right,  align  himself  correctly,  and  promptly  command, 

Right — dress. 

3.139.  At  this  command,  the  company  will  move  up  into  the  interval  be- 
tween its  captain  and  the  front  rank  man  on  the  kit ;  the  captain  directing 
the  alignment  on  that  man ;  the  man  of  the  right  of  the  leading  company, 
who  finds  himself  opposite  to  the  guide  of  the  right,  placed  on  the  line, 
will  press  his  breast  lightly  against  his  left  arm. 

11-iO.  Each  captain,  having  aligned  his  company,  will  command,  Front, 
and  the  colonel  will  then  command, 

Guides — posts. 

1141.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  resume  their  places  in  line, 
passing,  each,  through  the  interval  of  the  captain  nearest  to  them;  the  colo- 
nel will,  from  the  right,  judge  of  the  accuracy  of  the  alignment,  causing  it, 
if  necessary,  to  be  rectified  by  the  captains.  If  the  general  guides  be  on 
the  alignment,  they  would,  in  like  manner,  retire  to  their  places  in  line, 
at  the  last  command,  the  corporal  in  the  front  rank,  who  replaced  the 
bearer  of  the  regimental  colors,  stepping  back  to  the  rear  rank  at  the  same 
time. 

11 12.  When  the  companies  arc  formed  in  line,  the  file-closers  will  align 
themselves  correctly,  tWO  paces  in  rear  of  the  rear  raqk. 

II  13.  The  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  if  it  form  a  part  of  a  line  of 
many  battalions^  the  colonel,  lieutenant-colonel,  and  major.  «  ill  occupy  their 

habitual  places  in  line;    but  if  the  battalion  lie  ;il  exercise  separately,  they 

will  move  wherever  their  presence  may  be  required:  this  rule  will  be 
general,  after  all  formation*  in  line. 


Plate  XIV. 


School  of  the  Battalion. 


M 


.:.-■•        C 

'lik'.-i-1..-    ■'     ~P 


"■■■■F 


^^- 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   BATTALION— PART   IV.  33 

1144.  If  the  column  had  the  left  in  front,  it  would  form  line  to  the  right, 
according  to  the  same  principles ;  the  guide  of  the  left  of  the  leading  com- 
pany would  execute,  at  the  first  command,  what  is  prescribed  for  the  guide 
)f  the  right  of  the  leading  company,  No.  1136;  and  the  captains  will,  at 
the  command,  Guides — posts,  shift  to  the  right  of  their  companies. 


Inversion. 

1145.  The  colonel,  supposing  sometimes  the  necessity  of  forming  line  to 
the  reverse  flank,  and  wishing  to  effect  this  movement  in  the  readiest  man- 
ner, will  command,  when  the  right  is  in  front, 

1.  By  inversion,  right  into  line  wheel.     2.   Column,  guides  right. 

1146.  At  the  first  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  a 
little  in  front  of,  and  facing,  the  guide  of  the  right  of  the  leading  company, 
and  the  major  a  little  in  rear  of  the  guide  of  the  right  of  the  rear  compa- 
ny; the  guide  of  the  left  of  the  leading  company  will  place  himself,  at 
the  same  time,  on  the  line  of  the  guides  on  the  right  of  the  column,  facing 
towards  them,  and  posting  himself  as  prescribed,  No.  1136. 

1147.  At  the  second  command,  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will,  as 
quickly  as  possible,  align  the  guides  of  the  right  of  the  column. 

1148.  The  colonel  will  then  command, 

3.  March. 

1149.  At  this  word,  the  man  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  each  com- 
pany will  face  to  the  right,  pressing  his  breast  lightly  against  the  left  arm 
of  his  guide ;  and  the  column  will  form  line  to  the  right,  according  to  the 
prescribed  principles,  which  being  executed,  the  colonel  will  command, 

Guides — posts. 

1150.  At  this  command,  the  captains  will  shift  to  the  right  of  their  re- 
spective companies. 

2d. —  To  Form  Line  on  the  Right  from  Column,  Right  in  Front. 

1151.  (PI.  XIV.)  When  the  column  at  full  distance,  right  in  front,  is  to 
form  line  on  the  right,  the  colonel  will,  beforehand,  point  out  to  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel where  the  right  is  to  rest,  as  also  the  point  of  direction  on 
the  left;  the  major,  accompanied  by  two  markers,  will  proceed  to  establish 
them  in  the  line  of  direction  as  follows : 

1152.  The  first  will  be  posted  at  the  point  of  appui,  (support,)  and  mark 
the  place  where  the  front  rank  man,  on  the  right  of  the  battalion,  is  to  rest 
in  line  ;  the  second  will  be  placed  on  the  line,  so  as  to  be  immediately  in 
front  ef  one  of  the  three  files  on  the  left  of  the  leading  company ;  they  will 
be  established,  so  as  to  present  the  right  shoulder  to  the  battalion  when 
formed. 

1153.  The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  nearly  at  the  point  where 
the  colonel  wishes  the  right  to  rest,  he  will  command, 

1.   On  right,  into  line.     2.   Column,  guides  right. 

1154.  At  ihe  second  command,  the  men  will  touch  elbows  towards  the 
right;  the  guide  of  the  right  of  the  leading  company  will  march  straight 
forward  to  the  point  where  this  company  is  to  turn  to  the  right. 

1155.  The  following  guides  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  guide  who 
precedes  them. 

1156.  The  leading  company  having  arrived  nearly  opposite  the  first 
marker,  it«  captain  will  command, 

Right  turn  ; 
11  "7.  And,  when  the  company  has  its  right  precisely  opposite  the  marker, 
he  will  add, 

March. 
K*  IIS 


84  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART    IV. 

1158.  At  the  word  March,  the  company  will  turn  (o  the  right,  Mj  tho 

guide  of  the  right  will  direct  his  march  so  as  to  conduct  the  man  next  to 
aim  against  the  marker  of  the  right. 

1159.  The  company  being  arrived  near  the  two  markers,  its  captain  will 
promptly  command, 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Bight — dress. 

1160.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt; 

1161.  At  the  third,  the  company  will  align  itself;  the  two  front  rank 
men,  who  are  opposite  the  markers,  will  press  their  breasts  lightly  against 
their  right  arms,  respectively;  the  guide  of  the  left  will  retire  to  the  rank 
of  file-closers ;  the  captain  will  move  to  the  right  of  his  front  rank,  and  di- 
rect the  alignment  on  the  two  men  whose  breasts  touch  the  right  arms  of 
the  markers:  this  rule  will  he  general  in  all  successive  formations. 

1162.  The  second  company  will  continue  to  march  straight  forward,  and, 
when  arrived  opposite  the  left  flank  of  the  first, it  will  turn  to  the  right, by 
command  of  its  captain,  as  above,  marching  afterwards  towards  the  line  ; 
the  guide  of  the  right  will  conduct  the  march  so  as  to  arrive  by  the  side  of 
t>.e  left  hand  man  of  the  first  company. 

1163.  When  the  company  shall  have  arrived  within  two  paces  of  the 
line,  the  captain  will  bait  it,  as  prescribed  above,  and  move  quickly  to  the 
left  of  the  first  company,  aligning  himself  accurately  on  the  front  rank  of 
that  company. 

1164.  The  guide  of  the  left  will,  at  the  same  time,  move  to  the  front  of 
one  of  the  three  files  on  the  left  of  his  company;  and,  facing  to  the  right, 
place  himself  in  the  line  of  the  two  markers  of  the  first  company. 

1165    The  captain  of  the  second  company  will  then  promptly  command, 
Bight — DRESS. 

1166.  The  second  company  will  move  up  to  the  line,  and  the  captain 
will  direct  the  alignment  on  the  man  of  his  front  rank,  whose  breast  presses 
lightly  against  the  right  arm  of  his  guide  of  the  left. 

1167.  The  succeeding  companies  will  arrive  thus,  one  after  the  other, 
into  line,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  second  company  ;  and, 
when  the  whole  battalion  is  correctly  in  line,  the  colonel  will  command, 

Guides — posts, 

1168.  At  this  command,  the  guides  will  retire  to  their  places  in  line,  and 
the  markers,  in  front  of  the  first  company,  will  also  retire  :  the  same  will 
take  place  after  all  formations  in  line  ;  the  guides  will  always  pass  throjgh 
the  interval  of  the  nearest  captain. 

1169.  The  colonel  will  follow  up  the  successive  formation  along  the  front 
of  the  line,  and  always  opposite  to  the  company  about  to  turn,  in  order  to 
move  up  to  the  line;  whence  he  can  best  see  and  rectify  any  error  arising 
from  a  command  given  too  soon,  or  too  late,  to  the  preceding  company. 

1170.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will,  with  the  utmost  care,  rectify  the  po- 
sition of  the  guides  as  they  arrive  on  (he  line, placing  himself,  for  this  pur- 
pose, some  paces  in  rear  of  them  on  the  line  :  this  rule  will  be  general  in 
all  successive  formations. 

1171.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  form  line  on  the  left  by  inverse 
means.  The  captains  will  move  to  the  left  of  their  companies,  in  order  to 
align  them;  and  at  the  command,  Guides — POSTS,  they  will  resume  their 
places  in  line  ;  and  this  v.  ill  always  be  tho  case  when  a  column,  left  in 
Front,  forms  line. 


i 


Remarks  on  Forming  Line  on  the,  Right  or  Left. 

1172.  In  order  that  this  movement  may  be  executed  with  greater  regu- 
larity, the  line  will  be  so  established,  that  each  company,  after  turnklg, 
may  have  at  least  four  paces  to  march,  to  arrive  on  the  line. 

1173.  In  the  first  lessons,  the  line  will  be  established  parallel,  or  nearly 

111 


SCHOOL  OF  THE   BATTALION— PART    IV.  85 

so,  to  the  direction  of  the  column ;  but  when  the  captains  and  guidts  un- 
derstand the  mechanism  of  the  movement,  the  colonel  will  choose  oblique 
directions,  in  order  to  habituate  the  battalion  to  form  line  in  any  direction 

1174.  (PL  XIV.)  When  the  direction'of  the  line  forms  a  sensible  angle 
with  that  of  the  march  of  the  column  (d  e),  the  colonel  will  point  out  to 
the  guide  of  the  leading  company,  previous  to  commencing  the  movement, 
an  object  in  front  (/),  in  a  direction  nearly  parallel  to  the  line  ;  the  lead- 
ino-  guide  will  immediately  conduct  his  march  on  this  point,  a.id  his  com- 
pany will  conform  to  the  new  direction,  at  the  command  or  caution  of  its 
captain ;  each  of  the  following  companies  will,  successively,  as  it  arrives 
on  the  same  ground,  execute  the  same  movement ;  by  this  means,  all  the 
companies  arriving,  each  at  the  point  where  it  is  to  turn,  to  place  itself  on 
the  line,  will  have,  after  turning,  nearly  the  same  number  of  steps  to  take 
to  arrive  on  the  line. 

1175.  The  captains  will  not,  after  placing  themselves  on  the  line,  com- 
mand dress,  till  their  guides  are  accurately  established  on  the  line  by  the 
lieutenant-colonel:  this  rule  will  be  general  in  ali  successive  formations. 


3d. To  Form  Line  to  the  Front,  from  Column  at  Full  Distance. 

Right  in  Front. 

1176.  The  column  supposed  to  arrive  right  in  front,  in  rear  of  the  right 
of  the  line  on  which  the  formation  is  to  take  place,  the  colonel  will  indi- 
cate, beforehand,  to  the  major,  the  point  where  the  right  is  to  rest,  as  also 
the  point  of  direction  on  the  left,  and  the  major  will  immediately  establish 
the  markers  on  the  line,  as  prescribed,  No.  1152. 

1177.  The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  at  about  the  distance  of 
the  front  of  a  company  from  the  two  markers  established  on  the  line,  the 
colonel  will  halt  the  column,  and  command, 

1.   To  the  front  into  line.     2.   Column,  guides  right. 
3.   Companies,  left  wheel.     4.  March. 

1178.  At  the  word  March,  the  leading  company  will  march  up,  and 
be  established  on  the  markers ;  all  the  other  companies  will  wheel  to  the 
left  on  a  halted  pivot.  When  the  colonel  judges  that  the  wheel  is  nearly 
completed,  according  to  the  direction  of  the  line  to  be  formed  on,  he  will 
order, 

5.  Forward; 

1175).  And,  at  flic  instant  when  he  deenja  the  wheel  to  be  sufficient,  he 
will  add, 

6.  March.         n 

1180.  (PI.  XV.)  At  the  last  word,  (March,)  the  guide  of  the 
right  of  the  company,  nearest  the  line,  ceasing  to  turn,  will  march  for- 
ward. #  • 

1181.  At  the  same  word,  the  guide  of  the  right  of  the  following  compa- 
ny, ceasing  also  to  turn,  shall  march  straight  forward,  preserving,  between 
his  company  and  the  preceding,  the  distance  which  separated  them,  when 
the  word  March  was  given. 

1182.  The  guide  of  the  right  of  each  of  the  following  companies  will  ob- 
serve what  has  just  been  prescribed  for  that  of  the  preceding  company. 

1183.  At  the  instant  the  guide  of  the  right  of  each  company  arrives  op- 
posite the  left  file  of  the  company  which  immediately  precedes  his  own  in 
line,  the  captain  will  command, 

1.  Right  turn.     2.  March. 

1184.  These  two  commands  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  above,  foi 
forming  line  oil  the  right. 

1185.  Each  company  will  be  halted  by  its  captain  two  paces  from  the 
line;  the  grade  of  the  left  of  each  will  promptly  place  himself  on  the  line, 
in  front  of  cae  of  the  three  hies,  on  the  left  of  his  company,  and  the  lieu- 

117 


86  SCHOOL   OF   THE   13ATTALION— PART  IV. 

tenant -colonel  will  establish  them  on  the  direction;  which  being  execu- 
ted, the  captain  (having  placed  himself  on  the  left  of  the  company  on  his 
right)  will  promptly  command, 

Might — DRESS. 

1186.  The  formation  being  effected,  the  colonel  will  command, 

Guides — posts. 

1187.  With  the  left  in  front,  this  formation  will  be  executed  by  inverse 
means. 

1188.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will,  in  these  formations,  each 
discharge  the  duties  prescribed  for  them,  Nos.  1169,  1170. 


Remarks  on  Forming  Line  to  the  Front,  from  Column  at  Full 
Distance. 

1189.  The  precision  of  this  movement  depends  on  the  direction  which 
the  companies  may  be  in,  at  the  moment  the  colonel  commands  March  ; 
he  will  judge  of  the  moment  of  giving  this  word,  by  considering,  that  if 
the  direction  of  .the  line  form  with  that  of  the  column  a  right  angle,  the 
companies  must  wheel  the  half  of  this,  and  that  the  more  acute  the  angle 
is,  which  these  two  directions  form  with  each  other,  so  much  the  more 
ought  the  companies  to  wheel,  before  they  move  forward. 

1190.  (PL  XV.)  It  is  essentially  important  that  each  company  should 
so  conduct  its  march,  as  to  turn  at  the  point  (e)  opposite  the  place  where 
its  captain  is  to  move  up  on  the  line.  If  a  company  turned  too  soon,  it 
would  be,  in  part,  masked  by  that  which  preceded  it  on  the  line,  and 
would  be  obliged  to  unmask  itself  by  the  oblique  step ;  if  it  turned  too 
late,  it  would  pass  beyond  the  flank  of  the  preceding  company  in  line,  and, 
to  repair  this  error,  would  be  obliged  to  oblique  in  moving  up  on  the  line. 

1191.  In  both  cases,  the  faulfuf  one  company,  leading  the  next  into  er- 
ror, might  communicate  itself,  successively,  as  far  as  the  last  company. 

1192.  The  guide  of  each  company  must  turn,  so  that  his  company "may 
arrive  square  on  the  line. 

1193.  If  the  angle  formed  by  the  line  with  the  original  direction  of  the 
column  were  so  acute  that  the  companies,  in  arriving  opposite  to  their 
respective  places  in  line,  should  be  almost  parallel  to  the  line,  the  captains 
would  not  give  the  command,  Right  (or  left)  turn,  but  would  halt  their 
companies  two  paces  from  the  line,  and,  from  this  position,  would  command, 
Right  (or  left) — dress. 

1194.  If,  on  the  contrary,  the  angle  which  the  line  forms  with  the  origi- 
nal direction  of  the  column,  be  sensibly  more  than  a  right  angle,  the  for- 
mation would  not  be  executed  to  the  front,  but  on  the  right,  (or  left,)  ac- 
cording to  the  principles  prescribed  for  these  formations. 

1195.  If  a  company  meet  with  an  obstacle  opposing  the  march  to  the 
front,  it  would  face  to  the  right  or  left  in  marching,  and  follow  in  file  the 
preceding  company;  and  when  the  obstacle  is  cleareil.it  would  re-form  on 
the  march,  by  command  of  its  captain.  . 


« 


4th. —  To  Form  Line  faced  to  the  Rear,  from  Column  at  Full  Dis- 
tance, Right  in  Front. 

1196.  The  column  being  supposed  to  arrive,  right  in  front,  in  front  of  the 
right  of  the  line,  the  colonel  will  previously  indicate  to  the  major  the  point 
where  the  right  is  to  rest,  as  also  the  point  of  direction  on  the  lefl  ;  the  ma- 
jor will  immediately  proceed  to  establish  two  markers  on  the  line,  as  pre- 
scribed for  forming  line  on  the  right. 

1197.  The  head  of  the  column  having  arrived  at  about  the  distance  of  a 
company  from  the  two  markers  established  on  the  line,  the  colonel  will 

hall  the  colui and  order  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  to  establish 

it,  faced  to  the  rear,  on  the  line,  close  to  the  markers;  the  company  will 

118 


Plate  XVI. 


School  of  the  Battalion. 


j £.._D.  .-/,•' -J- 


d 


a* 


/ 

/ 


/    / 


/  / 


/// 


y 


•      SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART   IV.  87 

face  to  the  right,  and  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  by  command  of  its  captain, 
pass  the  I'Ak ,  and,  when  the  leading  file  has  passed  two  paces,  will  wheel 
again  to  the  left,  in  order  to  march  in  rear  of  the  markers,  where,  when  ar- 
rived, its  captain  will  front,  and  align  it  by  the  right. 

1198.  In  this  position,  the  leading  company  will  be  faced  towards  the 
column,  and,  as  soon  as  it  is  established  on  the  line,  the  colonel  will  com- 
mand, 

1.  Into  line  faced  to  the  rear.     1.   Column,  right — face.    3.  Makch. 

1199.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies,  except  that  established 
on  the  line,  will  face  to  the  right,  and  the  captains  will  place  themselves 
by  the  side  of  their  guide  of  the  right. 

1200.  {PI.  XVI.)  At  the  word  March,  all  the  companies  which  have 
faced  to  the  right  will  step  off  together;  the  guide  of  the  left  (d)  of  the 
company  nearest  to  the  line  will  spring  forward,  to  mark  off  the  line ;  he 
will  place  himself  as  already  prescribed  for  successive  formations,  and  will 
thus  indicate  to  his  captain  the  point  near  which  he  is  to  cross  the  line, 
(two  paces,)  in  order  to  wheel  by  Ale  to  the  left,  so  as  to  conduct  his  com- 
pany parallel  to  the  line,  as  in  (/). 

1201.  As  soon  as  the  leading  file  of  this  company  shall  have  arrived  near 
the  left  file  of  the  company  already  formed  on  the  line,  the  captain  will 
command, 

1.   Company.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.     4.  Right — dress. 

1202.  The  first  command  will  be  given  when  the  company  is  within  two 
paces  of  the  place  where  it  is  to  be  halted. 

1203.  At  the  second  command,  the  company  will  halt;  and,  if  there  be 
openings  between  the  files,  they  must  close  quickly. 

1204.  The  third  command  being  given,  the  captain  will  immediately  place 
himself  by  the  side  of  the  man  on  the  left  of  the  company  on  his  right,  and 
ilign  himself  on  the  front  rank  of  that  company. 

1205.  All  the  following  companies  will  come  on  the  line,  as  has  just  been 
prescribed,  each  regulating  itself  on  that  which  immediately  precedes ;  the 
guides  of  the  left  (e)  will  each  spring  forward,  when  his  company  is  about 
twelve  paces  from  the  line,  and  place  himself  on  it  opposite  to  the  point, 
where  one  of  the  three  files  of  the  left  will  rest  in  line. 

1206.  The  line  being  formed,  the  colonel  will  command, 

Guides — posts. 

1207.  This  formation  will  be  executed,  left  in  front,  by  inverse  means. 

1208.  The  colonel  and  lieutenant-colonel  will  discharge  the  same  duties, 
in  these  formations,  as  have  been  prescribed  for  them  in  forming  on  right 
into  line. 

1209.  If  it  were  desired  to  form  line  from  column  on  the  rear  division, 
the  colonel  would  caution  that  division  to  stand  fast,  and  order  the  remain- 
ing divisions  to  countermarch,  whence  they  would  file  into  line  as  above, 
faced  to  the  rear. 

1210.  Lastly,  if  a  central  division  were  selected,  this  would  be  counter- 
marched and  established  on  the  new  line ;  the  divisions  in  front  of  this 
would  be  countermarched  and  ordered  to  the  front  into  line,  and  the  re- 
maining divisions  would  be  ordered  into  line,  faced  to  the  rear. 


Remarks  on  Forming  Line,  faced  to  the  Rear,  from  Column  at 

Full  Distance. 

1211.  When  the  companies  march  towards  the  line,  the  capiains  will  s& 
direct  the  march  as  to  cross  the  line  a  little  in  rear  of  their  guide  ;  ao'L 
therefore,  each  guide  ought  to  quit  his  company  in  sufficient  time  to  ue 
correctly  established  on  the  line,  before  his  company  arrives  opposite  to 
him,  to  cross  it, 

L  121 


88  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART   IV. 

ARTICLE  THIRD.  • 

Formation  in  Line  by  two  Movements. 

1212.  A  column,  right  in  front,  arriving  in  rear  of  the  line,  and  prolong- 
ing itself  upon  that  line,  will  be  halted  by  the  colonel,  if  he  see  it  expedi- 
ent to  form  line,  before  the  three  (or  any  other  number  of)  rear  companies 
have  entered  the  new  direction ;  and,  after  rectifying  the  position  of  the 
guides  on  the  line,  he  will  command, 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.    2.  Three  rear  companies,  to  s\e  front  into 
line. 

1213.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  of  the  three  rear  companies 
'  will  command,  Guide  right,  and  the  captains  of  the  two  last  will  add,  Left 

wheel.     The  colonel  will  then  command, 

3.  March. 

1214.  At  the  word  March,  repeated  quickly  by  the  captains,  the  five 
first  companies  will  form  line  to  the  left ;  the  three  rear  companies  will 
form  line  to  the  front,  respectively,  by  the  means  prescribed  for  these  two 
formations. 

1215.  The  captains  of  each  of  the  two  rear  companies  will  command 
Foncard,  and  march,  when  their  companies  have  sufficiently  wheeled. 

1216.  If,  instead  of  arriving  in  rear,  the  column  arrive  in  front,  of  the 
line,  the  colonel  would  command, 

1.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     2.  Three  rear  companies  into  line,  faced  to 
the  rear. 

1217.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  cf  each  of  the  three  rear 
companies  will  command,  1st.  Company;  2d.  Right — face.  The  colonel 
will  then  command, 

3.  March. 

1218.  At  the  word  March,  from  the  colonel,  and  briskly  repeated  by 
the  captains,  the  five  companies  will  form  line  to  the  left,  and  the  three 
rear  companies  wiUform  line  faced  to  the  rear,  respectively,  by  the  means 
prescribed  for  these  two  formations. 

1219.  These  various  >novements  would  be  executed  by  a  column,  left  in 
front,  according  to  the  same  principles. 


ARTICLE  FOURTH. 


Different  Methods  of  Forming  Line  from  Column  at  Half 
Distance. 

1st.  By  forming  line  to  the  left  or  right,  after  the  companies  have  taken 
wheeling  distances  by  the  head  of  the  column. 
2d.  By  forming  line  on  the  right  or  left. 
Sd.  By  forming  line  to  the  front. 
4th.  By  forming  line  faced  to  the  rear. 


1st. —  To  Form  Line  to  the  Left,  from  Column  at  Half  Distance, 
Right  in  Front,  by  previously  taking  wheeling  Distances  by 
the  Head  of  the  Column. 

1220.  It  is  supposed  that  the  column  is  prolonging  the  line  to  be  formed 
on ;  when  the  rear  company  arrives  at  the  point  where  the  left  is  to  rest, 
the  colon3l  will  halt  the  column,  and  command, 

Column,  take  wheeling  distance. 
122 


Plate  XVII. 

School  oftht 

Battalion. 

1 

■ 

/                 :               "O-... 

'       1 

0-, 

Fig.2 

i 

.i 

i 

: 

.; 

1 
j 

i 
j 

| 

I 
i 

i 
j 

fc 

L 

i 

\ 

.I- 

.s? 

Ei&l 

i 

&    d 

4 

.fb 

H                    H      " 

■™n 

H                   H 

H              fr 

'li 

:=3 

•I 

£ 

124 


SCHOOL   OF   THE  BATTALION— PART   V.  89 

122 '.  He  will  order  the  captain  of  the  leading  company  to  put  it  in 
march  ;  the  captain  will  immediately  command, 

1.   Company,  forward.     2;  Guide  left.     3.  March. 

1222.  The  captain  of  the  second  company,  perceiving  that  it  is  nearly  at 
its  proper  distance,  will  command,  Company ,  forward — Guide  left,  and 
then,  March,  at  the  moment  he  sees  his  company  at  the  proper  distance 
from  the  first:  this  will  be  executed  successively,  by  the  companies,  to 
the  rear  of  the  column,  each  taking  up  the  step  from  the  one  preceding. 

1223.  If  the  colonel  wish  to  formaline  to  the  left,  he  will  halt  the  column 
at  the  instant  the  rear  company  has  its  distance. 

1224.  These  movements  would  be  executed  in  the  same  manner  in  close 
column ;  and,  if  the  column  have  the  left  in  front,  they  would  be  executed 
by  inverse  mebns. 

1225.  The  colonel  will  see  that  each  company  steps  off  the  instant  it  has 
its  wheeling  distance. 

1226.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  be  at  the  liead  of  the  column,  and  di- 
rect the  march  of  the  leading  guide. 

1227.  The  major  is  posted  near  the  guide  of  the  rear  company. 


2d. —  To  Form  Line  on  the  Right  or  Left,  from  Column  at  Half 
Distance. 
122S.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  for  a  column  at 
full  distance. 


3d. —  To  Form  Line  to  the  Front,  from  Column  at  Half  Distance. 
1229.  This  movement  cannot  be  executed  at  half  distance,  because  the 
distance  between  the  companies  will  not  admit  of  a  whesl  of  forty-five  de- 
grees ;  it  is  therefore  necessary  that  the  column  take  wheeling  distances 
as  prescribed  above,  unless  it  may  be  deemed  more  eligible  to  form  close 
column  and  deploy. 

4th. —  To  Form  Line,  faced  to  the  Rear  from  Column  at  Half  Dis- 
tance. 
12-30.  This  movement  will  be  executed  as  prescribed  for  a  column  at  full 
distance. 


ARTICLE  FIFTH. 

Deployment  of  Close  Column. 


(Omitted.) 


PART  V. 

To  March  in  Line. 


ARTICLE  FIRST. 

To  Advance  in  Line. 

1281.  Taa  battalion  being  correctly  aligned,  and  supposed  to  be  tLe  reg- 
ulating battalion,  the  colonel,  wishing  it  to  advance,  will  previously  inti- 
mate the  same  to  the  lieutenant-colonel;  and  will  himself  move  about  forty 
paces  in  rear  of  the  color-sergeant,  and  face  towards  the  battalion. 

12S2.  (PI.  XVII.  Fig.  1.)  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  move  an  equal 
distance  in  front  of  the  color-sergeant,  facing  towards  the  colonel,  who  will, 
L*  125 


90  SCHOOL   OF   THE  BATTALION— PART   V. 

by  a  signal  of  his  sword,  establish  him  opposite  the  color-sergeant,  perpen- 
dicular" to  the  front  of  the  battalion,  and  then  take  a  point  of  direction  on 
the  ground,  to  the  front,  if  such  distinct  point  offer  itself,  which  may  be 
exactly  in  the  prolongation  cf  the  line  of  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  the  col- 
or-sergeant. 

128:?.  The  colonel  will  then  move  about  sixty  paces  in  rear  of  the  line, 
and  place  two  markers  (a  and  //)  on  the  prolongation  of  the  line  of  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel and  color-sergeant;  these  markers  will  face  to  the  rear;  the 
first  (a)  will  he  placed  about  twenty-five  paces  in  rear  of  the  battalion,  and 
the  second  (b)  at  the  same  distance  from  the  first. 

1284.  The  color-sergeant,  so  soon  as  the  lieutenant-colonel  is  established 
oa  the  perpendicular,  v.  ill  assume  two  points  on  the  ground,  in  the  line 
passing  from  himself,  between  the  heels  of  the  lieutenant-colonel ;  the 
nearest  of  these  points  will  be  taken  at  the  distance  of  fifteen  or  twenty 
paces  from  the  color-sergeant. 

1285.  These  arrangements  made,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Battalion, forward. 

1286.  At  this  command,  the  color-rank*  will  move  six  paces  to  the  front, 
in  common  time,  and  ihc  color-guard  will  replace  them  in  the  front  rank; 
the  two  general  guides  (/,  g)  will  move  out,  at  the  same  time,  six  paces; 
that  (/)  opposite  the  captain  of  the  company,  on  the  right;  the  other,  (jg,) 
opposite  the  lieutenant,  en  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion. 

12S7.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  establish,  correctly,  the  color-sergeant 
between  himself  and  liie  centre  corporal  of  the  color-guard,  and  then  post 
himself  as  prescribed,  No.  1295. 

12S3.  The  major  will  post  himself  at  the  distance  of  some  paces  on  cither 
flank  of  the  color-rank. 

1289.  The  colonel  will  then  command, 

2.  March. 

1290.  At  .this  word,  the  battalion  will  step  off  smartly;  the  color-ser- 
geant, who  is  answerable  for  the  direction,  will  carefully  observe  the  ca- 
dea.ee  and  length  cf  the  ordinary  step,  and  march,  accurately,  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  two  points  which  he  had  taken  on  the  ground,  between 
himself  and  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and  will  take,  successively,  others,  as 
ho  advances,  by  the  means  prescribed,  No.  522.  The  two  color-bearers, 
placed,  the  one  on  his  right  ami  the  other  on  his  left,  will  carry  the  colors, 

on  the  haunch,  and  march,  without  turning  the  head  or  shoulders, 
by  the  same  step  as  the  color-sergeant. 

1291.  Ke  two  general  guides  will  march  the  same  step  as  the  color- 
rank,  and  will  march  nearly  aligned  on  this  rank,  without  attending  to  each 
other. 

1292.  The  color-guard,  now  placed  in  the  front  rank,  in  the  centre  of 
the  battalion,  will  march,  well  aligned,  elbow  to  elbow,  the  face  direct  to 
the  front,  and  without  deranging  the  Kne  of  their  shoulders;  the  centre 
corpora.!  will  follow,  accurately,  the  trace  of  the  color-sergeant;  and  main- 
tain tba  same  cadence  and  length  of  step,  without  stepping  out,  or  stepping 
short,  but  by  a  caution,  even  though  he  should  find  himself  more  or  less 
than  «X  paces  from  the  color-rank. 

12!).'?.  The  captain  of  the  fifth  con. p;my  (s)  will  march  on  the  same  line 
with  the  color-guard,  touching  lightly  the  elbow  of  the  corporal  next  to 
him,  and  keeping  his  face  direct  to  the  front, 

1291.  The  captains  of  the  fourth  and  sixth  companies,  constituting,  with 
the  color-guard,  the  base  of  alignment,  will  march  with  the  same  step  as 
the  color-sergeant,  keening  their  shoulders  square ;  for  this  purpose  they 
will  keep  the  head  direct,  only,  occasionally  casting  their  eyes  towards  the 
color-guard,  and,  if  they  perceive  themselves  either  too  much  or  too  little 
advanced,  they  will  lengthen  or  shorten  the  step  gradually,  bo  as  to  regain 

*  Suu  Notes  to  Nos.  S3.  54  ajid  'J  11 
12<S 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART  V.  91 

(he  alignment  in  the  course  of  several  steps,  in  order  to  avoid  sudden  tran- 
sitions, which  would  necessarily  produce  floating. 

1295.  The  lieutenant-colonel  (e),  placed  twelve  or  fifteen  pace3  to  the 
right  of  the  captain  of  the  fourth  company,  will  keep  this  captain,  and  that 
of  the  sixth,  in  line  with  the  color-guard  :  and,  for  this  purpose,  he  will  cau- 
tion them  to  step  out  o.  step  short,  which  will  be  executed  gradually,  as 
just  explained. 

1296.  The  other  captains,  and  the  lieutenant  on  the  left,  will. march  stead- 
ily on  the  prolongation  of  this  base  ;  and,  for  this  purpose,  they  will  look  to- 
wards the  centre,  without  turning  the  head  too  much,  and  without  derang- 
ing the  shoulders. 

1297.  The  captains  and  the  lieutenant  on  the  left  wiH,  each,  superintend 
the  marching  of  the  company  next  to  him  towards  the  centre ;  and  will 
prevent  the  men  from  being  too  far  advanced :  they  will  not  correct  faults, 
nor  even  cause  the  men  to  step  out,  or  step  short,  except  it  may  be  evi- 
dently necessary  ;  because  an  over  attention  in  rectifying  small  errors,  some- 
times produces  greater,  and  disturbs  steadiness,  silence  and  equality  of  step, 
which  it  is  so  important  to  maintain. 

1293.  The  men  will  always  keep  the  face  direct  to  the  front,  preserve 
the  light  touch  of  the  elbow  towards  the  centre,  resist  pressure  from  the 
flanks,  pay  the  utmost  attention  in  preserving  the  shoulders  square,  and 
keep,  in  a  very  small  degree,  in  rear  of  the  line  of  captains,  in  order  never 
to  mask  from  them  the  base  of  alignment;  the  men  will  glance,  from  time 
to  time,  to  the  color-rank,  or  to  one  of  the  general  guides,  in  order  to  march, 
constantly,  with  the  same  step  as  the  latter. 

1299.  (PL  XVII.  Fig.  1.)  The  line  of  direction,  determined  by  the  two 
markers  (a  and  b),  will  be  prolonged,  during  the  march,  by  placing,  a3 
the  battalion  advances,  a  third  marker  (?)  about  twenty-five  paces  in  rear 
of  the  first  (a) ;  the  marker  (6)  will  then  post  himselfthe  same  distance  in 
rear  of  the  marker  (i) ;  the  marker  (a),  in  his  turn,  will  do  the  same;  and 
this  will  be  repeated  daring  the  march  of  the  battalion  to  the  front.  The 
markers,  as  they  succeed  each  other,  face  to  the  rear,  and  correctly  cover 
the  markers  already  established;  the  adjutant,  or  sergeant-major,  who  will 
always  be  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in  rear  of  the  marker  farthest  from  the 
battalion,  will  caution  each  when  he  is  to  quit  his  place,  and  then  estab- 
lish him  on  the  line  tit'  direction,  which  the  colonel  will  have  indicated  to 
him. 

1300.  The  colonel  will,  habitually,  be  fiftesn  or  twenty  paces  in  rear  of 
the  centre  of  his  battalion,  placing  himself  so  as  not  to  mask  from  the  ma- 
jor (k)  the  markers;  if,  by  the  indications  noticed  No.  1310, 1311, he  judge 
that  the  direction  of  the  color-sergeant  is  not  perpendicular  to  the  line,  he 
will  quickly  command,  Point  of  direction  more  to  the  right  (or  left.) 

1301.  At  this  command,  the  major  will  move  quickly  thirty  or  forty  parr* 
in  front  of  the  color-rank,  face  the  colonel,  and  place  himself  on  the  line  of 
direction  vhich  the  colonel  will  indicate  to  him  by  signal  of  his  sword;  the 
centre  corporal  will  then  direct  his  march  on  the  major,  on  a  caution  from 
the  colonel,  advancing  the  opposite  shoulder;  and  the  corporals  on  his  right 
and  left  conform  to  his  direction. 

1302.  The  color-sergeant  will  also  direct  his  march  on  the  major,  ad- 
vancing the  opposite  shoulder  ;  and  the  latter  will  direct  him,  by  signal, 
to  incline  to  the  right  or  left,  till  he  covers,  accurately,  the  centre  cor- 
poral. 

1303.  The  two  general  guides  will  conform  to  the  new  direction  of  the 
color-rank. 

1304.  The  adjutant  or  sergeant-major,  charged  with  placing  the  markers 
in  rear  of  the  centre,  will,  quickly,  establish  them  on  the  new  line  of  di- 
rection, passing  through  the  color-sergeant  and  centre-corporal ;  the  colonel 
win  verify  the  direction  of  the  markers. 

1305.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  as  in  No.  1295,  will  carefully  see 
(hat  the  fourth  and  sixth  companies,  and  the  others,  successively,  conform 

127 


92  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART    V. 

to  the  new  direction  of  the  centre,  but  without  hurry  or  disorder ;  and  will 
endeavor,  afterwards,  to  maintain  this  base  of  alignment,  perpendicular  to 
the  line  of  direction  on  which  the  color-sergeant  marches. 

1306.  He  will  observe  the  march  of  the  wings  of  the  battalion ;  and,  if 
he  see  that  the  captains  neglect  to  conform  to  the  base  of  alignment,  he  will 
command,  Captain  of  (such)  company,  or  Captains  of  (such)  companies, 
on  the  Hue  ;  but  without  being  too  particular  in  corrocting  small  faults. 

1307.  The  major,  placed  habitually,  during  the  march,  near  the  flank  of 
the  color-rank,  will,  fie  /lently,  move  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  in  front  of 
this  rank ;  he  will  face  to  the  rear,  and  place  himself  correctly  on  the  pro- 
longation of  the  markers,  in  order  to  ascertain  whether  the  color-sergeant 
marches  exactly  on  that  line;  and,  if  necessary,  rectify  the  position  of  this 
sergeant,  who  will,  immediately,  take  two  new  points  on  the  ground  be- 
tween himself  and  the  major. 

1308.  All  the  principles  of  the  march  in  line  are  the  sains  for  the  subor- 
dinate battalions  as  for  the  regulating  battalion  ;  but  when  the  battalion  is 
supposed  subordinate,  markers  are  not  required. 


Remarks  on  the  March  in  Line. 

1309.  If,  in  the  elementary  exercises,  the  officers,  non-commissioned 
officers,  and  soldiers,  be  not  confirmed  in  the  position  under  arms,  and  in 
the  length  and  cadence  of  the  step,  the  march  in  line  will  be  floating  and 
unconnected. 

1310.  (PI.  XVIII.  Fig.  1.)  If,  for  example,  the  color-sergeant,  advanc- 
ing the  left  shoulder,  pursued  a  direction  more  or  less  to  the  right  of  the 
perpendicular,  the  right  wing  would  be  obliged  to  step  short,  the  left  to 
step  out;  the  a-lignrnent  would  be  lost;  crowding  would  take  place  in  the 
right  wing,  and  opening  of  files  in  the  left:  similar  consequences  would 
happen,  if  the  color-sergeant,  advancing  the  right  shoulder,  pursued  a  di- 
rection to  the  left  of  the  perpendicular. 

1311.  The  same  consequences  would  also  take  place,  if  the  base  of  align- 
ment were  not  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  direction ;  if,  for  example,  the 
captain  of  the  fourth  company,  instead  of  keeping,  accurately,  aligned  on 
the  color-guard,  were  in  rear  of  the  line  of  its  front,  and  if  the  captain  of 
the  sixth  company  were  in  advance  of  that  line,  the  left  wing  would  be 
forced  to  step  out,  and  the  right,  to  step  short. 

1312.  It  is,  therefore,  of  the  utmost  importance,  that  the  color-sergeant 
should  march  perpendicularly  to  the  front ;  and  that  the  base  of  the  align- 
ment be  always  perpendicalar  to  the  line  of  direction. 

1313.  After  the  battalion  marches  a  few  paces,  the  colonel  may  easily 
judge,  from  the  indications  mentioned  above,  whether  the  color-sergeant  is 
inarching  on  a  line  perpendicular  to  the  original  front. 

1314.  It  will  be  also  easy  for  the  lieutenant-colonel,  placed  twelve  or 
filteen  paces  to  the  right  of  the  captain  of  the  fourth  company,  to  perceive 
whether  the  captains  of  the  fourth  and  sixth  companies  are  in  front  or  in 
rear  of  the  line  of  the  color-guard,  by  observing  whether  (he  captains  in 
the  wings  are  compelled  to  step  out,  or  step  short;  by  this  attention  he  will 
be  enabled  to  maintain  the  base  of  alignment  perpendicularly  to  the  line  of 
direction,  and  thus  to  prevent  floating  in  the  lino. 

1315.  If  openings  take  plact",  if  the  files  crowd,  or  if  any  disorder  arise, 
the  remedy  must  be  applied  as  speedily  as  possible,  but  with  calmness  and 
steadiness. 

1316.  The  general  guides  serve  to  indicate  to  the  companies  towards  the 
flanks,  the  cadence  and  length  of  Step  of  the  centre,  and  afford  a  facility  to 
these  companies  to  re-establish  themselves  on  the  direction  of  the  centre  ; 
these  guides  should,  therefore,  maintain  the  same  cadence  and  length  of 
step,  and  march,  very  nearly,  as  far  advanced  as  the  color-rank,  which 
v.  ill  he  easy  In  ell'ect,  by  glancing,  from  time  to  time,  towards  that  rank. 

1318.  Should   a  battalion   lose   the   step,  the   colonel    would   command, 
128 


Plate  XVIII. 


School  of  the  Battalion. 


Plate  XIX. 


School  of  the  Battalion. 


I 


it 
'■{  '  l  I ill!     Infill 

Ail  iiif 

SI 


Wilt  gj/ii 
1  Ll-#i  'Mil1 


132 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART    V.  93 

Step  ;  at  which  the  captains,  lieutenant  on  the  left,  and  the  men,  glance  to 
the  color-rank,  or  to  one  of  the  general  guides,  and  promptly  resume  the 
step. 

1319.  In  fine,  it  is  of  the  utmost  importance,  with  respect  to  the  march 
in  line,  to  accustom  the  battalion  to  execute  with  regularity  and  facility 
the  movements  prescribed,  No.  1301,  and  following,  in  order  to  rectify  a 
false  direction;  the  colonel  ought  to  acquire  the  aptitude  of  judging  at 
a  glance  (coup  d' 'ceil)  the  direction  which  he  ought  to  give  to  the  battalion. 

1320.  When  a  battalion  or  line  advances  to  the  charge,  at  the  distance 

of paces  from  the  enemy,  the  colors,  general  guides  and  staff,  if  in 

front,  will  be  ordered  to  resume  their  places  in  line.     (See  Nos.  466,  467.) 


ARTICLE  SECOND. 

Passage  of  Obstacles,  Advancing  or  Retiring  in  Line. 

1321.  The  battalion  advancing  in  line,  when  a  company  is  to  practise 
the  passage  of  a  supposed  obstacle,  the  colonel  will  command,  (Such)  com- 
pany, pass  obstacle. 

1322.  The  captain  of  the  company  will  move  two  paces  to  the  front,  face 
to  his  company,  ami,  if  of  the  right  wing,  command, 

1.  (Such)  company,  by  the  left  flank.     2.  By  file  right.     3.  March. 

1323.  (PI.  XIX.)  At  the  word  March,  the  company  will  face  to  the 
left  in  marching,  wheel  by  file  to  the  right,  and  will  follow,  at  the  distance 
of  one  or  two  paces,  the  two  files  on  the  right  of  the  company  on  its  left;  the 
company  having  its  left  thus  conducted,  the  captain  will  not  lead  the  front 
file,  but  march  by  the  side  of  his  covering  sergeant,  (in  the  rear,)  who 
will  step  into  the  front  rank. 

1324.  If  the  company  belong  to  the  heft  wing,  it  would  face  to  the  right, 
wheel,  by  file,  to  the  left,  and  follow  the  two  files  on  the  left  of  the  com- 
pany immediately  on  its  right;  the  captain  will,  in  this  instance,  conduct 
the  leading  file,  by  marching  by  the  side  of  his  covering  sergeant. 

1325.  The  obstacle  being  supposed  past,  the  colonel  will  command, 
(Such)  company  into  line.     The  captain  will  command, 

1.  Into  line.     2.  March. 

1326.  At  the  word  March,  the  files  will  move  up,  successively,  in 
quick  time,  into  line,  as  prescribed,  No.  576,  and  following;  the  captain, 
if  his  company  march  by  the  left  flank,  will  resume  his  place  in  line  with 
the  last  file. 


Remarks  on  the  Passage  of  Obstacles. 

1327.  In  the  right  wing,  the  guide  of  the  left  of  the  company  which  is 
immediately  on  the  right  of  that  executing  the  passage  of  the  obstacle, 
moves  up  to  the  front  ran'k  of  the  left  of  his  company,  and  preserves  be- 
tween himself  and  the  right  flank  of  the  company,  in  rear  of  which  the 
company  marches  by  a  flank,  the  space  requisite  to  contain  it  in  line  ;  m 
the  left  wing,  the  captain  of  th#  company  which  is  immediately  on  the  left 
of  that  in  file,  will  observe  what  is  just  prescribed  for  the  guides  of  the 
left,  in  the  right  wing. 

1328.  When  the  color-company  has  to  pass  an  obstacle,  the  color-rank 
wi'l  retire  to  its  place  at  the  moment  the  company  faces  ;  the  major  will 
tase  post  six  paces  in  front  of  the  company  in  rear  of  which  the  color-com- 
pany marches,  when  he  will  take  up  the  step  of  the  battalion,  and  be  re- 
sponsible for  the  step  and  direction. 

1329.  When  the  color-company  moves  into  line,  the  color-rank  will 
mai-eh  quickly  forward  six  paces,  taking  up  the  step  from  the  major,  who 
will  spring  fifteen  or  twenty  paces  ip  front  of  the  colors,  and  face  the 
colonel   in    he   rear:  the  latter  wiH  establish  him  on  the  perpendicular, 

M  133 


94  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART    V. 

which  being  executed,  (he  color-sergeant  will  instantly  take  two  points  on 
the  ground,  between  himself  and  the  major. 

1330.  When  more  than  ono  company  has  to  pass  an  obstacle,  they  will 
form  open  column  in  rear  of  the  company  nearest  to  them  towards  the  cen- 
tre, by  command  from  the  colonel,  as  will  be  explained.  Let  it  be  sup- 
posed, that  an  obstacle  covers  the  four  companies  on  the  left;  when  tho 
battalion  has  arrived  at  somewhat  more  than  the  front  of  a  company  from 
the  impediment,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Four  left  companies,  by  the  right  flank.     2.  In  rear  into  column. 
3.    Quick — MARCH. 

1331.  (PL  XX.)  At  the  first  command,  the  captains  of  the  named  com- 
panies will  place  themselves  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their  respective  com- 
panies, and  caution  them  to  face  to  the  right. 

1332.  At  the  word  march,  the  named  companies  will  face  to  the  right, 
in  marching;  each  captain  of  a  company  will  cause  its  head  to  disengage 
to  the  rear,  and  then  conduct  it,  in  quick  time,  by  the  right  flank,  in  rear 
of  the  fourth  company,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the  prompt 
manoeuvre ;  as  each  company  arrives  in  rear  of  the  fourth,  its  captain  will 
command,  Halt,  Front,  and  follow  the  preceding  company  in  common 
time.  The  four  companies  on  the  left  will  thus  follow,  in  open  column, 
the  fourth  company  ;  when  the  rear  company  of  this  column  shall  have 
passed  the  obstacle,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Rear  companies  into  line. 

1333.  At  this  command,  the  captain  of  each  of  these  companies  will 
command,  1st.  Guide  right ;    2d.  Company,  left  wheel. 

1334.  The  colonel  will  then  command, 

2.    Quick — MARCH. 

1335.  At  the  word  march,  repeated  by  each  captain  of  the  four  com- 
panies of  the  left,  each  of  these  companies  will  wheel  to  the  left,  and  march 
towards  the  line,  at  the  words,  Forward — M  vrch.  given  by  the  captain, 
when  he  judges  that  his  company  has  sufficiently  wheeled  ;  each  company 
will  form  in  line,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed  for  forming  line  to 
the  front ;  as  the  companies  move  up,  the  captains  will  take  their  place* 
in  line,  commanding,  Step  ;  the  company  will  then  take  the  step  from  the 
color-sergeant,  or  from  the  major,  if  the  former  have  not  resumed  his  place 
in  front. 

1336.  In  retiring  in  line,  tihese  different  methods  of  passing  obstacles 
are  executed  on  the  same  principles. 

1337.  If  a  battalion,  advancing  in  line,  find  it  necessary  to  retire,  when  a 
company,  which  had  met  with  an  obstacle,  is  marching  by  a  Hank,  as  pre- 
scribed, No.  1322,  and  following;  and  if  the  ground  will  not  admit  of  mov- 
ing up  into  line,  it  will  halt  with  the  battalion,  but  will  not  face  about  ;  the 
tWo'files  of  the  battalion  in  front  of  this  company  "ill  face  to  the  right,  ^or 
left,)  on  a  caution  from  the  file-closer  nearest  to  them,  at  the  same  lime 
that  the  battalion  faces  to  the  right-about,  ;>nd  will  afterwards  wheel,  by 
file,  in  order  to  follow  the  two  next  files,  when  the  battalion  is  put  in 
march,  rear  rank  leading;  and  these  two  files  will  be  followed  by  the  com- 
pany, en  potence,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  for  passing  a  defile. 
No."  1499. 

L8S8.  By  means  of  this  movement,  the  company  which,  in  advancing, 
was  in  file  ID  rear  of  (be  rear  rank,  will,  when  the  battalion  is  retiring,  be 
arranged  in  (he  same  order  in  rear  of  the  front,  now  become  (he  rear,  rank 

1889.    If  a   battalion    were    advancing    in   line,  and   obliged   to  halt,  face 

about',  and  retire,  when  Some  of  the  companies  were  in  open  column  in  the 
rear,  these  companies  would  halt,  face  about,  and  he  put  in  march  to  the 

h  the  battalion  preceding^  in  this  maimer,  the  rear  rank  of  the  bat- 
talion become  the  front  rank  ;  and  these  comoanies  would  afterward*  ob- 
;.  t'  >  line,  as  the  ground  may  admit. 
131 


Plate  XX. 


School  of  the  Battalion. 


^g 


/ 


135 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART    V. 
ARTICLE  THIRD. 

To  Change  Direction  Marching  in  Line. 

(Omitted.     Jce  Article  Eleventh,  Part  V.) 


ARTICLE  FOURTH. 

Oblique  March  in  Line. 

(Omitted.     See  Article  Eighth,  Part  V.) 
ARTICLE  FIFTH. 

To  Halt  the  Battalion  Advancing  in  Line,  and  to  Align  it. 

1366.  To  halt  the  battalion,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt. 

1367.  At  the  second  word,  the  battalion  will  halt;  the  color-rank  and 
the  general  guides  will  remain  in  front,  unless  the  colonel  give  the  word, 
Colors  and  guides — posts  ;  and  this  order  will  be  given  when  the  battal- 
ion is  not  to  resume  the  march  to  the  front,  nor  to  undergo  a  general  align- 
ment. 

1363.  When  the  colonel  does  not  wish  to  give  the  battalion  a  general 
alignment,  he  will,  if  he  think  proper,  cause  the  alignment  to  be  rectified  ; 
he  will,  in  this  case,  command,  Captains,  rectify  the  alignment ;  the  cap- 
tains will  immediately  turn  their  eyes  towards  the  centre,  arrange  them- 
selves on  the  base  of  alignment  which  the  lieutenant-colonel  has  carefully 
preserved  in  a  good  direction,  and  promptly  align  their  respective  compa- 
nies. The  lieutenant-colonel  will  caution  the  captains  who  are  not  accu- 
rately on  the  alignment,  Captain  of  (such  a)  company,  or  Captains  of  (such) 
companies,  move  up,  or  fall  back. 

13S9.  (PI.  XVII.  Fig.  2.)  When  the  battalion  requires  a  general  align- 
ment, either  parallel  or  oblique,  the  colonel  will  place  himself  outside  of 
one  of  the  general  guides,  ordering  them  and  the  bearer  of  the  regimentaj 
colors  to  face  towards  him,  and,  by  a  signal  of  his  sword,  will  promptly  es- 
tablish them  on  the  new  line.  The  bearer  of  the  national  colors,  and  the 
color-sergeant,  will  retire  to  their  places  in  line,  and  the  color-guard  to  the 
rear  rank. 

1370.  If  the  new  direction  carry  the  position  of  one  or  more  companies 
of  a  wing  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  will,  at  first,  cause  these  companies  to 
march  to  the  rear,  either  by  the  back  step,  or  by  facing  them  to  the  right- 
about, according  as  the  direction  may  be  more  or  less  in  rear  of  that  wing ; 
he -will  then  establish  the  color-bearer  and  the  general  guides,  as  just  ex- 
plained. 

1371.  This  arrangement  made,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.   Guides — on  the  line. 

1372.  At  this  command,  the  guide  of  the  right  of.  each  of  the  companies 
of  the  right  wing,  and  that  of  the  left  of  each  of  the  companies  of  the  left 
wing,  will  place  themselves  in  the  line  of  the  color-bearer  and  general 
guides ;  they  will  face  to  the  color-bearer,  and  take  their  stations  on  the 
line,  each,  at  the  distance  of  the  front  of  his  company  from  the  guide  who 
is  immediately  before  him. 

1373.  The  captains  of  the  right  wing  will  move  to  the  left  of  their  re- 
spective companies,  except  the  captain  of  the  fourth,  who  will  remain  ov. 
the  right  of  his  company,  and  place  himself  in  the  rear  rank. 

1374.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  promptly  rectify,  if  necessary,  the  po- 
rtion of  the  guides  of  the  right  wing;  and  the  major,  that  of  the  guides  d 

M*  127 


90  SCHOOL   OF  THE   BATTALION— PART   V. 

the  left  wing ;  the  colonel,  having  verified  the  position  of  the  guides,  will 
command, 

2.   Centre — dress. 

1375.  At  this  command,  trie  companies  will  step  off  together,  in  common 
time,  in  order  to  move  up  to  the  guides,  where  having  arrived,  each  cap- 
tain will  align  his  own  company  according  to  the  prescribed  principles;  the 
lieutenant-colonel  will  align  the  company  of  the  colors 

1376.  If  the  alignment  be  oblique,  the  captains  will  direct  their  compa- 
nies accordingly,  in  conducting  them  towards  the  line  of  the  guides. 

1377.  The  battalion  being  aligned,  the  colonel  will  command, 

3.   Colors  and  guides — posts. 
137S.  At  this   command,   the   color-bearer,   the   general   and   company 
guides,  as  also  the  captains  of  the  right  wing,  resume  their  places  in  line. 


ARTICLE  SIXTH. 

To  Retire  in  Line. 

1379.  The  colonel,  having  halted  the  battalion,  in  order  to  cause  it  to  re 
tire,  will  command, 

1.  Battalion — about — face. 

13S0.  The  moment  the  battalion  has  faced  about,  the  color-rank  and  the 
general  guides,  if  in  front,  will  resume  their  places  in  line;  the  co'.or-rank 
will  take  post  in  the  rear  rank,  become  the  front;  the  corporals  of  the  color- 
guard  will  half- face  to  the  right,  to  allow  the  passage  of  the  color-rank  be- 
tween them  ;  the  colonel  moves  in  rear  of  the  front,  become  rear  rank  ;  and 
the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  proceed  to  the  front  of  the  rear,  become 
front  rank. 

1381.  If  the  battalion  be  the  regulating  one,  the  markers  will  be  p'aced 
in  the  same  manner  as  for  advancing,  except  that  they  will  face  to  the 
battalion  ;  the  colonel  will  move  about  forty  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  cmor- 
scrgeant,  and  place  the  markers,  if  they  be  not  already  established  ;  or,  i! 
established,  the  adjutant  or  sergeant-major  charged  with  superintending 
them,  will  c.use  them  to  face  about,  so  soon  as  the  battalion  has  faced  to 
the  rear. 

13S2.  If  it  be  a  subordinate  battalion,  the  colonel  will  post  himself  as 
just  explained  ;  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  place  himself  about  forty  paces 
in  front  of  the  rank  of  file-closers,  opposite  to  the  color-sergeant,  and  the 
colonel  will  establish  him  on  the  line  of  direction,  as  prescribed  for  advanc- 
ing in  line. 

1383.  TV.c  arrangements  being  made,  the  colonel  will  command, 
2.   Battalion— -forward. 

13S4.  At  this  command,  the  color-rank  will  march  eight  paces  forward, 
snd  its  place  will  be  occupied  by  the  Color-guard  ;  the  two  general  guides 
will  move  out  in  line  with  the  color-rank  ;  the  covering  sergeants  will  step 
forward  i-ito  the  rank  of  tile-closers,  and  the  captains  occupy  their  places 
in  the  rear  rank,  become  front ;  the  three  tile-closers  nearest  to  the  centre 
of  the  battalion,  Will  unite  in  rear  of  the  color-rank,  in  order  to  serve  as  a 
base  of  alignment  for  the  rank  offile-clo  ers, 

1385-  The  colonel  will  then  command, 
3.  March. 

138(i.  The  battalion  will  march  with  the  rear  rank  leading,  on  the  same 

principles  as  when  the  front  rank  leads:  if  it  be  a  regulating  battalion, 

the  color-sergeant  win  direct  his  march  on  the  markers,  who  will  them- 

iiccefsively,  move  to  the  rear  (if  the  most  distant  marker,  as  the 

approaches  them  ;  the  adjutant  or  sergeant-major  superintending 

tli  em  will  see  that  they  place  themselrea  correctly  on  the  line  of  diree 

188 


SCHOOL   OF   THE    BATTALION— PART   V.  97 

tion;  if  the  battalion  be  subordinate,  the  color-sergeant  will  march  on  the 
perpendicular,  by  means  of  points  taken  on  the  ground,  and  the  cemre  file- 
closer  of  the  three  united  in  rear  of  the  color-rank,  will  exactly  follow  his 
trace. 

13S7.  The  colonel  and  major  act  as  when  the  battalion  is  advancing  in 
line. 

1388.  The  lieutenant-colonel,  placing  himself  outside  of  the  file-closers 
of  the  fourth  company,  will  carefully  maintain  the  file-closers  constituting 
the  base  of  alignment  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  direction  ;  the  other 
file-closers  will  align  themselves  on  that  base. 


ARTICLE  SEVENTH. 

To  Halt  the  Battalion  Retiring  in  Line,  and  to  Front  it. 

1389.  The  colonel,  having  halted  the  battalion,  and  wishing  to  front  it, 
will  command, 

1.  Battalion,  about — face. 

1390.  At  this  command,  the  color-rank,  general  guides,  captains  and 
covering-sergeants,  will  resume  their  places  in  line  ;  the  color-rank  will 
repass  to  the'front  rank. 

1391.  If  the  colonel  intend  to  give  a  general  alignment  to  the  bat-talion, 
he  will  cemmand, 

2.   Colors  and  general  guides — on  the  line. 

1392.  At  this  command,  the  colors  and  the  general  guides  will  move  in 
front,  and  face  the  colonel,  who  is  either  on  the  right  or  left ;  and  he,  after 
establishing  them  on  the  line  which  he  intends  giving  the  battalion,  will 
command, 

„3.   Guides — on  the  line.     4.   Centre — dress. 


ARTICLE  EIGHTH. 

To  March  by  a  Flank. 

1353.  The  colonel  will  sometimes  exercise  the  battalion  in  marking 
time,  and,  when  it  is  confirmed  in  the  cadence  and  length  of  the  step  in 
common  time,  he  will  change  to  quick  time  ;  he  will  also  exercise  the  bat- 
talion in  marching  by  a  flank,  and,  to  effect  this,  will  command, 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Right — face.     3.  Forward — march. 

1394.  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  and  covering  sergeants  will 
place  themselves,  as  prescribed,  No.  557  The  lieutenant  and  sergeant  on 
the  left  flank  face  and  march  in  their  respective  ranks. 

1395.  But,  when  the  battalion  marches  by  the  left  flank,  the  captains 
and  covering-sergeants  will  face  and  march  in  their  respective  ranks  ;  the 
sergeant,  who  was  on  the  left  of  the  line,  will  place  himself  in  front  of  the 
front  rank,  and  the  lieutenant,  who  was  on  the  same  flank,  will  place  him- 
self by  the  right  side  of  this  sergeant,  to  conduct  the  march. 

139*6.  Whether  the  battalion  march  by  the  right  or  left,  the  lieutenant- 
colonel  will  take  post  opposite  the  leading  file,  and  the  major,  opposite  the 
colors  ;  and  both  on  the  front  rank  side  of  the  battalion,  removed  from  it 
about  six  paces. 

1397.  At  the  third  command,  the  battalion  will  step  off  smartly;  the  ser- 
geant, placed  in  front  of  the  leading  file,  will  preserve  the  exact  length 
and  cadence  of  the  step,  and  march  straight  forward. 

1398.  The  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  will  march  always  the  same  step 
as  the  head  of  the  battalion,  and  these  give  the  step  to  the  battalion. 

1399    The  captains  and  file-closers  will  vigilantly  observe,  that  the  files 


98  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION-PART   V. 

neither  open  nor  crowd,  and  that  they  regain  their  distances,  insensibly, 
should  they  have  lost  them. 

1400.  To  wheel  Dy  file,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  By  file,  right  (or  left.)     2.  March. 

1401.  The  files  will  wheel,  conforming  to  the  principles  prescribed, 
No.  563. 

1402.  The  colonel  will,  in  this  lesson,  cause  the  battalion  to  wheel  to  the 
right  and  left  in  such  manner,  that  it  may  exhibit  different  divisions  wheel- 
ing at  the  same  time,  some  to  the  right,  and  some  to  the  left,  without  any 
alteration  of  the  step,  or  loss  of  the  lock-step. 

1403.  This  lesson  is  one  of  the  best  that  can  be  given  to  confirm  the  bat- 
talion in  the  cadence  and  lock-step. 


ARTICLE   NINTH. 


To  Form  Line  by  File  on  the  Left  or  Right. 

1404.  If  the  battalion,  marching  by  the  left  flank,  is  to  form  line  on  the 
left,  the  colonel  having  determined  the  Una,  the  lieutenant-colonel  will 
place  two  markers  on  it,  distant  from  each  other  about  the  front  of  a  com- 
pany, and  so  situated  as  to  present  the  left  shoulder  to  the  battalion,  when 
m  line. 

1405.  The  head  of  the  battalion  having  arrived  nearly  opposite  to  the 
first  marker,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.   On  left,  by  file,  into  line.     2.   Captains,  heads  of—  companies. 
3.  March. 

1406.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  captains  place  themselves  on  the 
right  of  the  leading  file  of  their  respective  companies,  except  the  captain 
of  the  left  company,  who  takes  the  place  of  the  lieutenant  on  the  left;  the 
latter  will  move  to  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

1407.  At  the  word  March,  the  sergeant  on  the  left  of  the  front  rank  of 
the  battalion  win"  turn  to  the  left,  and  press  his  breast  against  the  left  arm 
of  the  first  marker  on  the  line  ;  the  battalion  will  form,  successively,  by 
file,  on  the  left,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in  the  School  of  the  Com- 
pany ;  each  captain  will  piacc  himself  on  the  line,  at  the  same  time  with 
the  front  rank  man  on  the  left  of  his  company,  posting  himself  on  the  left 
of  that  man. 

1408.  The  guide  of  the  right  of  each  company,  except  that  of  the  com- 
pany of  the  left,  will  place  himself  on  the  line  of  the  markers,  opposite  to 
the  right  of  his  company,  at  the  instant  when  that  file  arrives  on  the  line. 

1409.  The  colonel  will  then  command, 

Guides — posts. 

1410.  At  this  command,  the  captains,  (he  lieutenant  on  the  left,  and  the 
guides,  wiil  resume  their  places  in  line  ;  the  two  markers  will  retire. 

1411.  If  the  battalion  lie  marching  by  (lie  right  Hank,  the  movement  will 
be  executed  by  inverse  means,  the  second  command  being  omitted. 

1412.  The  two  markers,  placed  previously  on  the  line,  will  have  their 
i':ht  shoulders  nearest  to  the  battalion  when  formed. 

1113.  The  guide  of  the  left  of  each  company,  except  that  of  the  company 
on  the  right,  will  place  himself  in  the  line  of  the  markers,  at  the  instant 
■when  the"  last  tile  of  the  company  arrives  on  the  line,  posting  himself  in 
front  of  that  file. 

1414.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  successive  formation  of  the  com- 
panies, following  up  each  as  it  forms. 

1115.  The  lieutenant-colonel  «ill  regulate  the  positions  of  the  guides, 
and  will  prevent  the  men  of  the  front  rauk,  in  dressing  up  to  the  line,  from 
passing  it. 

149 


Plate  XXI. 


School  of  the  Battalion- 


Fi£.l 


pH 


k^r^y^y^  ^,  r=^,J=5,  =^%» 


Fi£3i 


*  ri 

?^ia  am 
a  a  a 
3        Mo 


u    a      I  a    a 


!Fi£2j 

fe«^ iiRiiimiiinniimp0 

;W.  —    -    4.    ''     4,--;;    / 


SCHOOL   OF   THE  BATTALION— PART  V. 
ARTICLE  TENTH. 

Passage  of  Lines. 


Movement  of  the  First  Line,  retiring. 

1416.  (PI.  XXI.  Fig.  1.)  The  battalion  being  supposed  of  the  first 
line,  retiring  in  line,  and  about  to  pass  through  the  second  line;  whea 
about  twenty  paces  from  it,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Battalion,  by  the  left  flank.     2.   Companies,  by  file  right. 
3.  March. 

1417.  At  the  word  March,  the  battalion  will  face  to  the  left,  in  march- 
ing ;  the  head  of  each  company  will  disengage,  and  wheel  to  the  right; 
immediately  the  color-rank  and  the  general  guides  will  resume  their  places ; 
the  covering  sergeant  of  each  company,  placed  before  the  leading  file  of 
his  company,  and  the  captain,  placed  by  his  side,  will  direct  their  march 
towards  the  respective  openings  made  in  the  second  line  for  their  passage.  - 

1418.  The  intervals  between  the  companies,  marching  by  the  flank, 
will  be  preserved  by  the  left,  as  well  as  the  alignment  of  the  heads  of 
companies. 

1419.  The  colonel,  after  passing  about  one  hundred  paces  beyond  the 
second  line,  will  command, 

1.  Battalion.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.     4.  Left — dress. 
5.  Left  into  line,  wheel.     6.  March. 

1420.  (PI.  XXI.  Fig.  2.)  At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  all  the 
captains,  the  battalion  will  halt ; 

1421.  At  the  third,  the  captains,  placed  by  the  side  of  their  guide  of  the 
right,  will  each  move  to  the  front  of  the  centre  of  his  company  ;  the  colonel, 
placed  before  the  guide  of  the  left  of  the  first  company,  will  rectify  the  po- 
sition of  the  guides,  previous  to  giving  the  fourth  command. 

1422.  At  the  fourth  word,  given  when  the  guides  are  correctly  estab- 
lished, each  captain  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  in  No.  1031. 

1423.  At  the  moment  the  first  company  has  passed  the  second  line,  the 
colonel,  placing  himself  in  rear  of  its  captain,  will  indicate  to  him  a  point 
of  direction  in  front,  if  any  offer;  the  captain  will  immediately  take  inter- 
mediate points,  or  the  lieutenant-colonel  will  proceed,  quickly,  thirty  or 
forty  paces  in  front  of  the  captain,  who  will  take  two  points-on  the  ground, 
between  himself  and  the  lieutenant-colonel,  and,  successively,  new  points, 
as  he  advances. 

1424.  The  colonel  will  see  that  order  is  preserved,  and  the  company  dis- 
tances maintained,  and  that  the  first  company  marches  accurately  in  the 
direction  given. 

1425.  The  lieutenant-colonel  (b),  placed  a  few  paces  on  the  left  of  the 
first  company,  and  the  major  (k),  placed  also  on  the  right  of  the  left  com- 
pany, will  see  that  the  leading  flanks  of  the  companies  march  well  aligned. 


Movement  of  the  Second  Line  in  the  Passage  of  Lines. 

1426.  The  battalion  being  supposed  of  the  second  line,  and  that,  from  a 
halt,  platoons  are  to  double,  in  order  to  open  passages  for  the  first;  the 
colonel  will,  in  sufficient  time  not  to  retard  the  movement  of  the  battalion 
of  the  first  line,  command, 

1.  Battalion,  double  platoons.      2.  Second  platoons.     3.  Pig  it — facb. 
4.  March. 

1427.  A4  the  first  command,  all  the  captains  will  step  quickly  in  front  of 
the  centre  of  their  respective  companies. 

1428.  (PI.  XXI.  Fig.  3.)  At  the  second  command,  each  will  caution  th« 
first  platoon  to  stand  fast,  and  the  second  to  face  to  the  right ; 


100  SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART   V. 

1429.  At  the  third,  the  second  platoon  of  each  company  will  face  to  (he 
right;  the  captain  will  cause  immediately  the  two  files  on  the  right  to  dis- 
engage to  the  rear ; 

1430.  At  the  fourth,  the  second  platoon  of  each  company  will  march  hy 
the  right  flank  in  rear  of  the  first,  at  the  distance  of  one  pace  from  the  rear 
rank  "and  will  be  halted  by  its  chief,  who,  from  the  rear,  will  command, 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.     4.  Left— dress.     5.  Front. 

1431.  At  the  last  word,  the  officers  of  each  company  will  arrange  them- 
selves a?  follows :  the  captain  and  second  lieutenant  on  the  right  and  left, 
respectively,  of  the  front  rank  of  the  first  platoon;  the  ensign  and  third 
lieutenant  on  the  right  and  left,  respectively,  of  the  rear  rank  of  the  second 
platoon  ;  and  the  other  file-closers,  in  rear  of  the  second  platoon,  equi-dis- 
taiit  from  each  other. 

1432.  If  the  number  of  company  officers  be  not  complete,  flanks  must  be 
covered  by  substituting  sergeants.  This  arrangement  has  for  object  to 
prevent  the  first  line,  should  it  pass  in  disorder,  from  deranging  the  second. 

1433.  The  battalion  of  the  first  line  having  passed,  the  colonel  of  the 
second  line  will  command, 

1.  Second  platoons,  into  line.    2.  Left— -face.    3.  March. 

1434.  At  the  word  March,  the  second  platoons  will  march  hy  the  left 
flank,  and,  when  unmasked,  their  chiefs  will  command, 

1.  Platoon.     2.  Halt.     3.  Front.     4.  Right— dress. 

1435.  At  the  instant  the  second  platoons  march,  conducted,  each,  hy  its 
first  lieutenant,  the  other  company  officers,  who  had  shifted,  resume  their 
habitual  places  in  line. 

1436.  This  arrangement  for  the  passage  of  lines,  which  has  been  consid- 
ered here  as  applicable  to  retiring,  may  be  equally  applied  to  offensive 
operations,  to  replace  the  first  line  by  fresh  troops  of  the  second. 

1437.  In  this  last  case,  the  battalion  of  the  second  line  will  advance,  in 
iine,  in  order  to  approach  the  first;  and  the  colonel,  in  sufficient  time  not 
to  interfere  with  the  movement  about  to  be  executed  by  the  first  line,  will 
command, 

1.  Battalion,  double  platoons.  2.  Second  platoons— -march. 
1433.  At  the  second  command,  the  second  platoon  of  each  company  will 
nark  time;  as  soon  as  the  first  platoon  shall  have  cleared  its  flank,  the 
second  will  oblique  to  the  right,  in  order  to  double  in  rear  of  the  first ;  these 
movements  must  be  executed  on  a  caution  from  the  chief  of  the  second 
platoon,  in  the  rank  of  file-closers  ;  the  officers  will  post  themselves  as  in 
No.  1431,  and  the  battalion  will  continue  to  advance  in  this  order. 

1439.  The  second  lieutenants,  placed  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoons, 
will,  in  the  right  wing,  preserve  platoon  distances  between  themselves  and 
the  captain  of  the  company  next  to  them,  on  the  left. 

1440.  The  second  lieutenant,  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon  of  the  color- 
ed;, ipanv,  will  march  in  the  trace  of  the  bearer  of  the  regimental  colors, 
whom  the  major  will  cause  to  incline  to  the  right,  so  as  to  cover  the  second 
lieutenant  on  a  line  perpendicular  to  the  front. 

1441.  The  captains  of  the  left  wing  will  preserve  platoon  distance  be- 
tween  themselves  and  the  second  lieutenant  on  the  left  of  the  first  platoon 
of  the  company  next  on  their  right. 

1 142.  The  color-guard  will  double  with  the  platoon  to  which  it  belongs, 
but  the  color-rank  and  general  guides  will  remain  in  front. 

1443.  The  colonel  of  the  battalion  in  the  first  line,  seeing  the  second  line 
ar-ived  within  about  twenty  paces  of  him,  will  command, 

1.  By  right  of  companies,  rear.     2.  Battalion,  right— iaci. 
3.  March. 

1444.  The  battaliou  of  the  first  line  will  tile  through  the  second,  halting 

144 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART   V.  101 

at  the  distance  which  may  be  prescribed ;  and  then  form  line  as  explained 
above. 

1445.  As  soon  as  the  first  line  has  passed,  the  colonel  of  the  battalion  of 
the  second  will  command, 

1.  Second  platoons,  into  line.     2.  March. 

1445.  At  the  word  March,  the  second  platoons  will  oblique  to  the  left 
the  officers  will  resume  their  places  in  line,  and  the  first  platoons  continue 
to  march  steadily  forward. 

1447.  As  soon  as  the  second  platoons  are  unmasked,  the  chief  of  each 
will  command, 

1.  Forward.     2.   Quick — march. 

1448.  The  second  platoons  will  move  up  to  the  line,  taking,  of  their  own 
accord,  the  step  and  alignment. 

144#.  The  colonel  of  the  battalion  of  the  second  line  may  halt  it  as  socn 
as  the  first  has  passed  ;  the  second  platoons  will  then  quickly  deploy  into 
line,  at  the  command,  Second  platoons,  into  line;  or  the  battalion  may 
continue  to  advance  for  some  time  previous  to  halting. 


General  Remarks  on  the  Passage  of  Lines. 

1450.  It  is  supposed,  in  this  article,  that  the  companies  retiring  march 
by  the  right  flanks ;  but  the  colonel  of  the  battalion  of  the  first  line  may 
cause  the  movement  to  be  executed  by  the  left  of  companies ;  in  this  case, 
the  companies  will  preserve  distances,  and  alignment  of  leading  flanks,  by 
the  right,  (the  proper  left,)  and  form  line  to  the  right. 

1451.  In  order  to  execute  the  various  moveirjei^ts, e :;plajned  in  this,  art',-, 
cle,  the  colonel  will  sometimes  suppose  the  batfilipij/of  ijhe.flfst,  and'sctifo- 

■  times  of  the  second  line.  ...•.,      ,     ,  • ,«    , 

1452.  If  the  front  of- companies  be  not  lesytlian-twjn'.yrriight.filp?,  giving 
to  sections  a  front  of  seven  files,  it -will  be  'Dre/crat-l-i  to  liable  fcuw'fii  sfjcr 
tions  in  rear  of  third  sections,  in  the  passage  of  line's!  "  '.*...".,, 

1453.  In  this  case,  the  colonel,  in  the  commands,  would  substitute  see 
tions  for  platoons,  and  the  movement  be  executed  on  the  principles  above 
the  fourth  sections  would  double  in  rear  of  the  third  sections,  and  form  uj 
into  line  by  command  of  the  chiefs  of  the  former,  (fir  jt  lieutenants,)  who 
will  also  substitute,  in  the  commands,  sections  for  platoons,  and  the  compa- 
ny officers  arrange  themselves  as  followTs  : 

1454.  Captains  and  second  lieutenants  place  themselves  on  the  right  an(. 
left,  respectively,  of  the  front  rank  of  companies  ;  that  is,  of  the  three  sec- 
tions in  line ;  third  lieutenants  on  the  left  of  fourth  sections  in  the  rear 
rank  ;  the  other  file-closers  in.  the  rear  of  the  first,  second  and  fourth  sec- 
tions. 


ARTICLE  ELEVENTH. 

Change  of  Front. 

1455.  The  battalion  being  in  line,  the  colonel,  wishing  it  to  change  front 
will  place  two  markers  on  the  new  direction,  distant  from  each  other  some- 
thing less  than  the  front  of  a  company,  and  in  front  of  that  which  is  to  be 
the  base  of  alignment. 

1458.  It  is  supposed  here,  that  the  colonel   wishes  to  change  front  for- 
ward on  the  first  company;  he  will  place  two  markers  as  just  explained, 
and  will  direct  its  captain  to  establish  it  close  to,  and  in  rear  of,  the  markers 
when  tl>'.&  is  effected,  the  colonel  commands, 

1.   Change  front,  forward,  on  first  company. 

2.   Companies,  right — wheel.     3.  March. 

4.  Forward — march.     5.   Guides  right. 

N  146 


102  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART    V. 

1457.  (PI.  XXII.  Fig.  1.)  At  the  second  command,  the  captains  will 
move  in  front  of  the  centre  of  their  companies  ; 

145S.  At  the  third,  the  companies  v." ill  commence  wheeling  to  the  right 
on  a  halted  pivot ;  when  the  colonel  perceives  that  they  have  sufficiently- 
wheeled,  he  will  give  the  two  last  commands. 

1439.  At  the  fourth  command,  the  companies  will  cease  wheeling,  and 
will  march  straight  forward  ; 

1460.  At  the  tilth,  they  will  touch  elbows  towards  the  right ;  and  the 
whole  will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  1181,  and  following. 

1461.  The  formation  being  accomplished,  the  colonel  will  command, 

Guides — posts. 

1 162.  To  change  front  to  the  rear  on  the  first  company,  the  colonel,  after 

having  caused  this  company  to  be  established  on  the  new  direction,  and  a 

marker  to  be  placed  in  front  of  the  file  on  the  right  and  left,  will  coinjaand, 

1.  Change  front,  to  the  rear,  on  first  company. 

2.  Battalion,  about — face.     3.  Companies,  left — wheel. 

4.  March.     5.  Forward — march.     6.  Guides  left. 

1463.  (PI.  XXII.  Fig.  2.)  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies, 
except  tiie  first,  will  face  about; 

1464.  At  the  third,  the  captains  of  the  companies  which  have  faced  about, 
move  in  rear  of  the  centre  of  their  companies,  two  paces  from  the  front 
(become  rear)  rank. 

1465.  At  the  fourth  word,  the  companies  will  commence  wheeling  on  a 
halted  pivot. 

146G.  At  the  fifth  command,  they  will  cease  wheeling,  and  move  straight 
f">rw.ai-,d  towards  the- new  line; 

1487.  At  the' sixth,  they.' will  touch  elbows  to  the  left,  and  the  guide 
placed  on  the  right  flank,  of. each  (become  the  left)  .will  conform  to   what 

I;  j);vs;-.;iln;d„No/l46p.  ' 

1 488'.  flic  right  (Lc-comt  the  left)  of  the  second  company  having  arriv- 
ed opposite  to  the  left  of  the  first,  already  established  on  the  new  line,  the 
captain  of  the  second  will  command, 

1.  Left  turn.     2.  March. 

1469.  The  second  company  will  turn  to  the  left,  march  forward,  and  be 
halted  by  its  captain,  when  arrived  at  the  rank  of  file  closers  of  the  first 
company;  the  captain  will  then  cause  the  second  company  to  face  about, 
and  will  alien  it,  as  already  prescribed  in  successive  formations. 

1470.  AU  the  other  companies  w  ill  execute  what  has  been  prescribed  for 
the  second  company. 

1471.  The  formation  being  effected,  the  colonel  will  command, 

Guides — posts. 

1 172.  The  colonel  will  cause  the  battalion  to  change  front  forivard,  or 
to  the  rear,  on  left  company,  on  the  same  principles. 

1  !7:;.  The  colonel  will  superintend  the  general  execution  of  the  move- 
ment. 

1474.  The  lieutenant-colonel  will  correct,  if  necessary,  the  position  of 
the  guides  as  they  come  on  the  line,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  in 
Successive  formatii  n  . 

1475.  The  colonel  may  cause  the  battalion  to  change  front  on  any  cen- 
tral company,  and  at  any.  required  angle.  In  this  case,  one  of  the  winga 
will  change  frohl  forward,  and  the  other  to  the  rear,  both  conforming  to 
what  has  been  prescribed. 

1  176.  If,  for  instance,  the  change  of  front  Is  to  be  executed  on  the  fifth 
company,  as  I  if  the  left  wing  is  to  be  thrown  forward,  and  the  right  to  the 
;•..'•.  the  i  lone!  will  place  two  markers  on  the  new  direction,  in  front  of 
the  fifth  company,  and  will  order  its  captain  to  establish  it  on  the  markers. 

1477.  The  6fth  company  being  thus  established  in  the  new  direction, 
the  fourth  company  is  to  be  formed  vn  tbe  new  alignment,  by  command 
116 


Plate  XXII. 


School  of  the.  Battalion. 


147 


Plate  XXIII. 


School  oflhc  Battalion. 


W\       i!l 


I 


b 


:__ 


a  glo  go 


SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART   V.  183 

from  its  captain  ;  and  the  guide  of  the  right  of  the  fourth  company  will  im- 
mediately station  himself  before  the  file  on  the  right  of  his  company,  and 
covering  the  markers  placed  before  the  fifth ;  the  colonel,  having  verified  the 
position  of  this  guide,  will  command, 

1.   Change  front  on  fifth  company — left  wing  forward. 

2.  Right  wing,  about — face.      3.   Companies,  right — wheel. 

4.  March.      5.  Forward — march.      6.   Guides  right. 

1478.  (PI.  XXIII.  Fig.  1.)  At  the  second  command,  all  the  companies, 
to  the  right  of  the  fourth,  will  face  to  the  right  about. 

1479.  The  movement  will  be  executed  a^ording  to  the  principles  pre- 
scribed above. 

1480.  When  the  movement  is.  a  central  one,  as  in  this  instance,  the  lieu- 
tenant-colonel rectifies  the  position  of  the  guides  of  the  right  wing,  as  they 
come  up  on  the  line ;  and  the  major  will  correct,  if  necessary,  the  position 
of  those  of  the  left  wing. 


Remarks  on  Changes  of  Front. 

1481.  When  the  new  direction  is  nearly  at  right  angles  to  that  of  the 
battalion,  the  companies  wheel,  about  the  eighth  of  the  circle,  before  they 
march  forward ;  but,  when  the  two  lines  are  oblique  to  each  other,  the  less 
the  angle,  so  much  the  less  ought  the  companies  to  wheel  previous  to 
marching  forward ;  and,  when  the  angle  is  very  acute,  the  colonel  will 
cause  the  companies  to  wheel  only  as  much  as  will  disengage  them  from 
each  other. 

1482.  The  precision  of  the  movement  depends  on  the  colonel's  aptitude 
of  judging  by  the  eye,  (coup  d'ceil,)  relative  to  the  instant  at  which  he 
ought  to  give  the  words,  Forward — march. 

1483.  If  the  new  line  form  a  very  acute  angle  with  the  battalion,  the 
companies  will  arrive  on  the  line,  nearly  parallel  to  it,  without  any  neces- 
sity for  the  word,  Right  (or  left)  turn,  when  the  companies  have  arrived 
opposite  to  their  respective  places. 


General  Remarks  on    Successive  Formations,  whether 
from  Column  or  Line. 

1484.  It  is  of  the  utmost  importance,  that  the  divisions  be,  as  they  suc- 
cessively come  up,  rapidly  and  accurately  aligned. 

1485.  The  markers  of  the  leading  or  directing  divisions  ought  to  be  es- 
tablished on  the  new  line,  in  some  five  or  seven  seconds,  by  the  proper 
field  and  staff  officers,  and  the  column  or  line  put  in  motion  as  quickly  as 
the  commands  can  be  repeated. 

I486'.  A  well  instructed  captain  will,  at  the  word  Halt,  given  to  his 
division  preparatory  to  dressing  up,  have  already  reached  the  flank,  by 
which  his  division  is  to  align  itself;  in  an  instant  more,  he  will  place  him- 
self in  line,  his  shoulders  square  to  the  front,  his  person  erect,  and  his  eyes 
turned  towards  his  division. 

1487.  As  soon  as  he  perceives  the  guide  (or  marker)  of  the  opposite 
flank  on  the  alignment,  he  will,  to  fix  attention  on  himself,  command, 
Right,  (or  left,)  and,  after  a  pause  of  a  second,  loudly  add,  dress  ;  from. 

1488.  If  the  formation  be  made  on  a  central  division,  it  is  obvious  that 
its  captain  ought  to  be  exceedingly  prompt  in  dressing  it,  and  placing  him- 
self, momentarily,  between  its  ranks,  as  another  captain  will  have  to  dress 
another  division,  from  the  same  interval. 

1489.  If  the  successive  formation,  by  company,  for  example,  be  made 
within  reach  of  the  enemy's  fire,  the  colonel  may,  as  soon  as  he  sees  the 
leading  or  directing  company  established  on  the  markers,  command, 

1.  Fire  by  company. 

151 


104  SCHOOL   OF   THE   BATTALION— PART   V. 

1490.  At  this,  the  captain  of  that  comoany  will  retire,  as  prescribed, 
No.  48" 

1491.  Each  of  the  remaining  captains  will,  on  coming  on  the  line,  place 
both  of  his  guides  on  the  base  of  the  alignment,  in  a  manner  corresponding 
with  the  markers  in  front  of  the  directing  company,  and  each  captain,  after 
giving  the  command  for  eyesfroni,  wili  retire  as  above. 

1492.  As  soon  as  the  colonel  perceives  two  companies  established  on  the 
line,  he  will  add, 

2.   Commence — firing. 

1493.  This  will  be  executed  as  has  been  prescribed  in  No.  4S9,  and  fol- 
lowing, for  odd  and  even  companies;  and,  at  the  word  (Such)  company, 
given  by  each  captain,  the  guides  or  markers  in  its  front  shall  retire. 

1494.  If,  under  the  same  circumstances,  the  formation  be  by  grand  di- 
visions, the  two  markers  would  be  placed  in  front  of  the  odd  company  of 
the  directing  grand  division,  and,  on  marching  up  to  the  markers,  the  two 
guides  of  the  even  company  would  place  themselves  in  its  front,  on  the 
base  of  the  alignment,  (at  the  first  command  given  by  the  colonel  as  above,) 
when,  also,  both  captains  of  the  grand  division  retire. 

1495.  The  front  of  each  of  the  other  grand  divisions  would  be  marked  by 
its  fou-r  guides.  < 

1496.  On  seeing  the  first  grand  division  established  on  the  line,  the 
colonel  would  give  the  second  command,  Commence — firing,  which  would 
be  executed  as  has  been  just  prescribed. 


ARTICLE  TWELFTH. 

Passage  of  a  Defile,  in  Retiring,  from  either  Wing. 

1497.  The  battalian  being  in  line,  and  the  colonel  supposing  the  defile 
in  rear  of  the  left  fiank,  he  will  command, 

To  rear,  by  the  right,  pass  defile. 

1498.  (PI.  XXIII.  Fig.  2.)  The  captain,  on  the  right  fiank,  will  imme- 
diately command, 

1.   Company.     2.  Bight — face.     3.  March. 

1499.  At  the  word  March,  the  first  company  will  step  off;  the  leading 
file  will  wheel. to  the  right,  march  four  paces  to  the  rear  of  the  rank  of 
file-closers,  wheel  again  to  the  right,  and  inarch  towards  the  left  wing  ; 
all  the  other  files  of  this  company  will  wheel,  successively,  on  the  same 
ground. 

1500.  The  second  company  will  be  put  in  motion,  in- its  turn,  by  com- 
mand of  its  captain,  who  will  ca,use  it  to  face  to  tin-  right,  when  the  lead- 
ing file  of  the  first  company  has  arrived  opposite  to  him,  and  give  the  word 
March,  so  that  the  leading  tile  of  the  second  company  may  follow  imme- 
diately the  rear  file  of  the  first,  but  without  effort  to  take  up  the  Btep  of 
the  preceding  company;  the  leading  tile  of  the  second  company  will 
wheel  to  the  right,  and  all  the  other  til.-  v.  ill  wheel,  successively,  on 
the  same  ground. 

151)1.  The  succeeding  companies  will  execute,  each  in  turn,  what  has 
been  prescribed  for  the  second. 

1502.  The  lirs«.  file  of  the  first  company,  having  arrived  opposite  the  de- 
file, supposed  in  rear  of  the  left  Hank  of 'the  battalion,  will  wheel,  by  tile, 
to  the  left,  in  order  to  enter  the  defile;  and  all  the  following  tiles  will 
wheel,  each  en  ihe  same  ground. 

L50S.  The  companies  pass  the  denle,  marching  by  the  flank;  or,  as  the 
defile  widens,  sections,  platoons  m- companies  will  be  formed,  as  may  be 
ordered,  according  to  the  principles  prescribed. 

1504.  If  it  be  Bupposed  thai  the  defile  is  In  rear  of  the  right  wing,  it 
would  be  passed  on  the  same  principles,  but  by  Inverse  mean-;  the  colonel, 
152 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION— PART   V.  105 

in  his  command,  substituting  left  for  right,  and  captains  shifting  to  the  left 
of  their  companies. 

1505.  As  soon  as  the  first  company  shall  have  passed  the  defile,  if  the 
right  be  in  front,  the  head  of  the  column  may  change  direction  to  the  left, 
in  order  to  be,  afterwards,  wheeled  up  into  line;  or  the  head  of  the  column 
may  wheel  to  the  right,  in  order  to  form  line  on  the  right. 


ARTICLE  THIRTEENTH. 

Column  of  Attack. 

(Omitted,  because  its  formation  and  deployment  are  made  on  the  principles 
of  other  close  columns.) 


ARTICLE  FOURTEENTH. 

Dispositions  against  Cavalry. 

(Omitted.) 
ARTICLE  FIFTEENTH. 

Dispersing  and  Rallying. 

1564.  The  battalion  being  in  line,  the  colonel  will  cause  the  pioneers' 
march  to  be  beat :  and,  on  this  signal,  the  battalion  will  break  and  disperse. 

1565.  When  the  colonel  wishes  to  re-assemble  it,  he  will  place  two 
markers  and  the  colors  on  the  line  on  which  the  battalion  is  to  assemble 
and  form ;  after  which,  he  will  order  the  assembly  to  beat. 

1566.  Each  captain  will  assemble  his  officers,  non-commissioned  officers 
and  soldiers,  about  six  paces  in  the  rear  of  the  place  which  they  are  to  oc- 
cupy in  line. 

1567.  The  colonel  will,  quickly,  cause  the  color-company  to  be  formed 
on  the  line,  close  to  the  markers;  each  company,  by  order  of  its  captain, 
will  move  up,  immediately,  on  the  alignment  of  the  color-company,  and 
will  be  dressed  on  the  line,  according  to  prescribed  principles. 


SCHOOL  OF  THE  BATTALION, 
Arranged  in  Lessons ;  for  the  Exercise  of  a  Battalion. 

Lesson  I. 
1st.  To  open  ranks. 

2i.  Manual  exercise,  and  loading  in  quick  time. 
3d.  To  close  ranks. 
4th.  Loading  in  quickest  time,  and  the  firings. 


Lesson  II. 

1st.  To  break  to  the  right  or  left,  into  column. 

2d.  To  march  in  open  column,  with  the  cadenced  step,  for  a  considera 
blc  time,  the  guide  at  the  head  directing  the  march  on  two  objects  taken 
on  the  ground;  to  change  direction  on  the  pivot  flank,  and  on  the  reverse 
flank ;  and  to  form  platoons,  sections  and  companies,  by  doubling  and  form- 
ing up  on  the  march. 

3d.  To  countermarch,  and  repeat  the  same  movements. 

4th.  To  change  direction  by  the  prompt  manoeuvre.     (Omitted.) 

5th.  To  assume  the  route  step  ;  to  form  platoons  and  sections ;  to  gt> 
through,  in  succession  0>3  various  movements  detailed  in  the  article  of 
Column  of  Route. 

15S 


06  SCHOOL  OF   THE  BATTALION— PART   V. 

4>th.  To  halt  the  column,  and  to  wheel  to  the  left,  or  right,  into  line. 
7th.  To  wheel  into  line,  by  inversion. 


Lesson  III. 


1st.  To  form  open  column  of  companies,  right  or  left  in  front,  by  filing 
to  the  rear. 

2d.  To  form  line,  to  the  front,  and  faced  to  the  rear,  from  column. 

3d.  To  form  line,  from  open  column,  on  the  right  or  left  flank. 

4th.  To  march  by  a  flank,  and  to  form  companies,  platoons  or  sections  on 
the  march. 

5th.  To  prolong  the  march  of  the  column,  in  front  or  rear  of  the  line, 
and  to  wheel  it  to  the  left,  or  right,  into  line. 

6th.  To  change  front  forward,  and  to  the  rear,  on  the  right  or  left  flank, 
perpendicularly  and  obliquely. 

7th.  To  change  front  on  a  central  company,  by  throwing  forward  the 
left  or  right  wing,  perpendicularly  and  obliquely. 

Lesson  IV. 

1st.  From  line,  to  form  close  column  of  grand  divisions  or  companies,  oa 
the  right  or  left  division,  and  in  front,  or  rear  of  it,  or  on  a  central  division, 
with  either  right  or  left  in  front.     (Omitted.) 

2d.  To  change  direction  in  close  column.     (Omitted.) 

3d.  To  countermarch  the  column. 

4th.  To  march  in  close  column.     (Omitted.) 

5th.  To  open  out  from  the  head  of  the  column. 

6th.  To  close  to  half  distance,  and  change  direction;  to  close  the  col- 
umn, halt,  form  column  of  grand  divisions  from  a  halt,  and  deploy  into  line. 
(Partly  omitted.) 

7th.  To  form  and  deploy  the  column  of  attack,  and  to  practise  the  differ- 
ent manoeuvres  of  this  column,  including  the  dispositions  against  cavalry. 
(Omitted.)  

Lesson   V. 

1st.  To  march  in  line,  advancing  and  retiring;' and  to  execute  the  pas- 
sage of  obstacles. 

2d.  To  change  direction  in  line.     (Omitted.) 

3d.  To  march  obliquely.     (Omitted.) 

4th.  Passage  of  lines,  as  a  battalion  of  the  first,  and  as  a  battalion  of  the 
second  line. 

5th.  To  march  by  a  flank ;  to  wheel  successively  by  file ;  and  to  form 
line,  on  the  right  or  left  by  file. 

6th.  To  pass  a  defile  retiring. 

1th.  To  cause  the  battalion  to  disperse  and  to  re-assemble. 


Remarks  on  this  Division  of  the  School  of  the  Battalion 
into  Lessons. 

1568.  The  first  lesson,  which  includes  the  loadings  and  firings ;  the  sec- 
ond, which  inclodes  the  inarch  in  column,  and  all  that  relates  to  it;  the 
fifth,  which  comprehends  the  march  in  line,  and  the  various  movements 
connected  with  it,  being  the  most  essential  parts  of  this  instruction,  are, 
therefore,  those  that  should  be  most  dwelt  on,  in  the  exercises  of  the  battalion. 

1569.  The  battalions  which  are  expert  in  the  execution  of  the  second 
and  fifth  lessons  will,  in  a  very  short  time,  attain  perfection  in  the  execu- 
tion of  the  third  and  fourth. 

1570.  In  marching  in  line,  the  men  will  not  be  allowed  to  support  arms, 
until  they  arc  thoroughly  confirmed  in  the  habit  of  marching  frith  arms 
carried 

164 


LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.  107 

1571.  The  quick  step  will  not  be  used  in  the  instruction  of  battalions  sepa- 
rately, either  in  marching  in  line,  or  in  column,  or  in  formations,  until  they 
are  thoroughly  confirmed  and  grounded  in  the  cadence  of  the  ordinary  step. 

1572.  The  non-cadenced,  or  route  step,  will  not  be  used  In  this  school, 
except  to  repeat  the  movements  relating  to  a  column  of  route. 


EXERCISES   AND   MANOEUVRES 

FOR. 

&mMT-XWT!&MT%LT£  and  RXFKEM&ar.- 

1573.  BATTALIONS  of  infantry  will  be  required  to  execute  the  light 
manoeuvres  both  in  closed  and  extended  order;  for  this  purpose,  and  in  or- 
der that  any  battalion,  or  company  of  a  battalion,  may  act  as  light  troops, 
colonels  will  cause  their  battalions  to  be  principally  instructed  in  the  exer- 
cises and  movements  of  light-infantry  and  riflemen. 

1574.  When  the  commander  intends  to  manoeuvre  as  light-infantry,  he 
will  cause  the  battalion  to  unfix  bayonets,  and  command,  1.  As  light-in- 
fantry ;    2.  Shoulder — arms.     (See  No.  1585.) 

1575.  The  men  and  officers  are  always  to  understand,  when  this  order  is 
given,  that  they  are  to  manoeuvre  as  light-infantry. 

1576.  The  object  of  light-infantry  and  riflemen,  whether  in  battalion  or 
company,  is  to  protect  the  advance  or  retreat,  and  to  cover  and  assist  the 
manoeuvres  of  large  bodies ;  and  these  particular  instructions  are  laid  down 
to  establish  uniformity  of  movement,  and  to  afford  such  details  as  will,  un- 
der all  circumstances,  contribute  to  produce  unity  of  action. 

1577.  The  first  principle  essential  to  this  object  is,  the  utmost  rapidity 
of  movement  consistent  with  order  and  regularity.  When  shifting  from 
one  position  to  another,  the  officers  will  always  move  in  double  quick  time  ; 
and,  when  no  particular  time  is  specified,  all  light-infantry  movements  in 
close  order,  except  formations  from  file,  will  be  in  quick  time,  (of  one  hun- 
dred and  twenty  paces  per  minute.)  All  formations  from  file,  and  from  ex- 
tended order,  and  all  extensions,  will  be  executed  in  double  quick  time,  (of 
one  hundred  and  sixty  paces  per  minute.)  A  just  discretion,  however,  is 
necessarily  vested  in  every  commanding  officer  on  actual  service;  when 
the  double  quick  time  must  be  sparingly  used.  In  broken  grounds,  or  when 
rapidly  advancing  to  seize  an  advantageous  point,  or  in  cases  of  great  dan- 
ger in  retreating  or  assembling,  it  may  always  be  resorted  to;  hut  for  com- 
mon skirmishing,  it  is  liable  to  exhaust  the  men.  Whenever  the  company 
or  battalion  is  to  be  put  in  motion  in  double  quick  time,  or  when  double 
quick  time  is  to  be  assumed  on  the  march,  the  previous  order  to  trail  arms 
will  be  understood,  and  arms  trailed  accordingly. 

1573.  The  organization  and  habitual  formation  of  light-infantry  and  rifle 
companies  will  be,  in  all  respects,  the  same  as  of  companies  of  the  line,  sub- 
stituting only  two  buglers,  in  lieu  of  a  drummer  and  a  fifer,  to  each. 

1579.  The  files  will  be  numbered  from  right  to  left,  and  the  men  partic- 
ularly instructed  to  recollect  their  respective  numbers.  The  right  and  left 
files  of  platoons  and  sections  will  be  particularly  designated  as  such. 

1581.  The  same  order  of  instruction  will  be  observed  as  prescribed,  Sec- 
tion II. 

1582.  The  bayonets  of  light-infantry  companies  will,  when  acting  in  close 
order,  be  fixed  by  command,  Nos.  267,  Sec. ;  in  open  order,  whenever  the 
soldier  finds  it  necessary  for  attack  ox  defence,  at  his  discretion. 

1583.  Every  officer  will  make  himself  perfectly  acquainted  with  the  bu- 
gle signals,  and  it  is  suggested  that  all  officers,  serving  with  light  corps, 
should, by  practice,  enable  themselves, if  necessary,  to  sound  them.  Every 
soldier  will  be  carefully  instructed  in  the  use  and  application  of  the  sig- 

155 


108  LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.— COMPANY. 

nals,  and  in  all  their  combinations;  and  should  any  one,  after  being  thus  in- 
structed, forget  or  be  unmindful  of  them,  he  will  merit  the  severest  repre- 
hension. 

1584.  The  buglers  of  each  regiment  or  corps,  under  the  direction  of  the 
adjutant,  will  be  carefully  taught  to  sound  and  explain  the  signals,  with 
all  theip  combinations.  As  a  neglect  or  disobedience  of  the  above  may  in- 
volve the  most  serious  consequences,  too  much  care  cannot  be  bestowed 
on  these  injunctions. 


Manual  Exercise. 


Shouldered  Anns. 

1555.  The  firelock  in  the  right  hand,  nearly  against  the  point  of  the 
shoulder  ;  the  barrel  perpendicular,  and  to  the  rear ;  the  ramrod  to  the  front ; 
the  right  arm  almost  at  its  full  extent,  the  right  hand  embracing  the  cock 
and  guard ;  the  butt  flat  along  the  right  thigh,  and  the  left  hand  hanging  by 
the  left  side. 

Present — arms. 

1556.  One  Motion.  The  firelock  is  raised  with  the  right  hand,  oppo- 
site to  the  centre  of  the  body,  the  ramrod  (o  the  front,  the  cock  as  high  as 
the  lowest  coat  button;  at  the  same  time,  the  firelock  is  grasped  with  the 
left  hand,  so  that  the  little  finger  may  touch  the  hammer-spring,  the  ihumb 
upwards  along  the  stock,  the  fore-arm  kept  close  to  the  body  without  con- 
straint ;  and  the  soldier  remains  steady  to  the  front,  with  the  right  hand 
grasping  the  small. 

Shoulder — a  rm  s\ 
1587.    First  Motion.    The  firelock  is  brought  quickly  across  the  body 
to  the  right  side,  the  left  hand  seizing  the  firelock  smartly  as  high  as  the 
shoulder  ;  the  right,  slipping  round  into  the  original  position  when  shoul- 
dered. 

1588.-  Second  Motion.  The  left  hand  quits  the  firelock,  and  is  prompt- 
ly brought,  as  before,  upon  the  left  thigh. 

Order — arms. 

1589.  First  Motion.  The  left  hand  seizes  the  firelock  even  with  the 
right  shoulder,  and  raises  it  by  the  right  hand  about  two  inches. 

1590.  Second  Motion.  The  righi  hand  quits  its  hold,  grasps  the  fire- 
lock round  the  muzzle,  and  brings  it  gently  to  the  ground,  the  beak  even 
with  the  toe  of  the  right  foot,  the  wrist  pressing  against  the  side,  and  el- 
bows close  to  the  body. 

Slioulder — a  r  us. 

1591.  First  Motion.  The  firelock  is  thrown  at  once  to  the  right 
shoulder,  by  a  jerk  of  the  right  hand;  the  left  catches  it  till  the  right  seizes 
the  firelock  at  ilio  proper  place. 

L592.  Si  C<  N  :)  Motion.  13ring  the  left  hand  quickly  to  its  position  on 
the  left  thigh. 

Support ARMS. 

1593.    One  Motion.    The   firelock   is  brought  (by  bending  the  right 
arm)   across  the  body  with  the  guard  upward,  and  opposite  tin'  I 
the  body;  the  barrel  resting  in  the  joint  6f  the  right  elbow  ;   the  left  h;wJ 
laid  across  the  1 1 

'    try — arms, 
1591.    One  Motion.    The  firelock  is  brought  smartly  to  (he  right  side, 
the  left  hand  to  its  position. 

Trail —  arms. 
1595.    One  Motion.    The  lefl  hand  Beizes  the  firelock  at  the  second 
pipe;  the  eight  sei/.e^  it  about  si\  inches  above  the  lock,  and  trails  it  to  thu 
right  side  ;il  arm's  length,  the  butt  a  little  lower  than  the  muzilc. 
156 


LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.— COMPANY.  109 

Order — arms. 

1596.  First  Motion.  Raise  the  muzzle  till  the  firelock  is  nearly  per- 
pendicular. 

1597.  Second  Motion.  Let  it  slide  gently  through  the  right  hand  to 
the  ground ;  slip  up  the  right  hand  to,  and  seize  it  by,  the  muzzle. 

Trail — arms. 

1598.  First  Motion.  The  right  hand  seizes  the  firelock  as  low  as 
possible,  without  constraint,  then  raises  and  catches  it  about  six  inches 
above  the  lock. 

1959.  Second  Motion.  Raise  the  butt  till  the  firelock  is  nearly  horizontal. 
Shoulder — arms. 
|    1600.  First  Motion.  Raise  the  muzzle  till  the  firelock  is  perpendicular 

1601.  Second  Motion.  The  firelock  is  thrown  at  once  into  the  right 
shoulder,  by  a  jerk  of  the  right  hand  ;  the  left  catches  it  till  the  right  seizes 
the  firelock  at  the  proper  place. 

1602.  Third  Motion.  Bring  the  left  hand  quickly  to  its  position  on 
the  left  thigh.  " 

To  Load  as  Riflemen. 

1603.  The  instructer  will  command, 

Load  by  eight  commands. 
1.  Load. 

1604.  One  Motion.  Carry  back  the  right  foot,  making  a  half-face  to 
the  right,  turning  on  the  left  heel ;  let  fall  the  firelock,  seizing  it  with  the 
left  hand  at  the  swell,  the  elbow  resting  against  the  left  side ;  the  right 
hand  quits  its  hold,  placing  the  thumb  against  the  top  of  the  hammer.      : 

2.   Open — pan. 

1605.  One  Motion.  The  pan  is  pushed  open  with  the  right  thumb  , 
the  right  hand  seizes  the  cartridge  with  the  three  first  fingers,  carries  it  to 
the  mouth,  which  tears  off  the  end,  whence  it  is  brought  close  to  the  pan. 

3.  Prime. 

1606.  One  Motion.  The  priming  is  shaken  into  the  pan ;  the  pan  i3 
shut  by  the  third  and  little  finger  ;  the  right  hand  then  slides  behind  the 
cock,  and  holds  the  small  of  the  stock  between  the  third  and  little  finger 
and  ball  of  the  hand. 

4.   Cast — about. 

1607.  First  Motion.  The  soldier  fronts,  bringing  the  right  foot  to  its 
original  position ;  the  rifle  is  brought,  with  the  barrel  outwards,  (sliding  it 
with  care  through  the  left  hand,)  to  the  ground,  the  butt  placed  between 
the  heels,  the  barrel  between  the  knees,  which  must  be  sufficiently  bent 
for  that  purpose  ;  the  left  hand  takes  hold  near  the  muzzle,  the  thumb 
stretched  along  the  stock. 

1608..  Second  Motion.    The  cartridge  is  put  into  the  barrel,  and  the 
ramrod  seized  with  the  fore-finger  and  thumb  of  the  right  hand. 
5.  Draw — ramrod. 

1609.  One  Motion.  The  ramrod  is  drawn  by  the  right  hand  ;  the  left 
quits  the  rifle  and  grasps  the  rod,  the  breadth  of  a  hand  from  the  boito;n, 
which  is  sunk  one  inch  into  the  barrel. 

6.  Ram — cartridge. 

1610.  One  Motion.  The  cartridge  is  forced  down  by  both  hands ;  ths 
left  then  seizes  the  rifle  near  the  tail-pipe  ;  the  soldier  stands  upright,  and 
seizes,  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger,  the  small  end  of  the  rod, 

7.  Return — ramrod. 

1611.  One  Motion.  The  rod  is  drawn  out,  and  returned  by  the  right 
hand,  which  remains  with  the  ball  resting  on  the  head  of  the  ramrod — el- 
bow square. 

0  157 


110  LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.— COMPANY. 

8.   Shoulder — arms. 

1612.  First  Motion.  The  left  hand  carries  the  rifle  to  the  right 
shoulder,  turning  the  guard  outwards,  the  right  receiving  it  in  its  proper 
position  at  the  small. 

1613.  Second  Motion.  The  left  hand  is  carried  quickly  to  the  left 
thigh.  

To  Load  as  Light-Infantry. 

1614.  The  instructer  will  command, 

Load  by  eight  commands. 
1.  Load.     2.   Open— pan.     3.  Prime. 

1615.  These  commands  will  be  executed,  respectively,  as  prescribed, 
Nos.  1604,  1605  and  1606. 

4.   Cast — about. 

1616.  One  Motion.  Without  moving  the  shoulders  or  feet,  press  down 
the  butt  of  the  firelock,  letting  it  slide  through  the  left  hand,  to  the  ground, 
the  heel  of  the  butt  resting  on  a  line  with  the  left  toe,  the  ramrod  towards 
the  body,  and  the  muzzle  inclined  towards  the  rear,  and  opposite  the  right 
shoulder;  the  right  hand  carried  as  high  as,  and  opposite  to,  the  muzzle  ; 
enter  the  cartridge,  and  seize  the  ramrod  with  the  thumb  and  fore-finger. 

5.  Draw — ramrod. 

1617.  One  Motion.  Draw-  the  ramrod,  extending  the  right  arm  ;  seize 
it  at  the  middle,  turn  it  into  the  barrel,  as  far  as  the  hand. 

6.  Ram— cartridge.     1.  Return— ramrod. 

1618.  These  commands  will  be  executed,  respectively,  as  prescribed, 
Nos.  189,  190,  191. 

8.  Shoulder — arms. 

1619.  First  Motion.  Raise  the  firelock  (with  the  left  hand  as  high 
as  the  shoulder)  to  the  right  side  ;  seize  it  with  the  right,  as  prescribed  for 
Shouldei-—A-RMs,  turning,  at  the  same  time,  on  the  left  heel,  and  bringing 
the  right  foot  in  position. 

1620.  Second  Motion.    Carry  the  left  hand  quickly  to  its  place. 

1621.  After  the  company  shall  be  fully  acquainted  with  the  mechanism 
of-loading,  the  instructer  will  cause  it  to  execute  the  whole  in  quickest 
time,  by  the  command  prescribed,  No.  28S. 

Filings. 

1622.  The  instructor  will  cause  the  company  [afire  by  company,  bythe 
commands  and  means  prescribed.  No.  486,  and  following,  and  by  fie,  as 
prescribed,  No.  -192,  and  following. 

1623.  Light-infantry  and  rifle  companies  will  be  particularly  instructed 
in  file-firing,  as  in  open  order,  as  this  will  be  the  mode  usually  adopted  by 
them  in  the  field.  In  this  fire,  the  soldier  will  not  be  required,  as  hereto- 
fore prescribed,  to  aim  direct  to  the  front,  but  will  be  allowed  to  select  bit 
object  to  the  right,  left  or  front.     The  instructer  will  command, 

1.   Comp>any  {platoons  or  sections.)     2.   Fire  by  file,  m-  in  open  order. 
3.  Commence — FIRING. 

1624.  At  the  third  command,  the  right  file  of  the  company  (or,  it  may 
he,  the  right  files  of  each  platoon  or  section)  will  take  three  paces  to  the 
front;  the  rear  rank  man  Of  the  file  will  take  the  last  Btep,  obliquely,  to 
the  right:   each  man  will  then  raise  the  firelock  by  the  righl  hand,  in  trout 

of  the  centre  of  the  body;  with  the  left,  seize  it,  so  that  the  little  finger 
will   rest  upon  the  hammer-spring,  the  thumb  extended  along  the  stock, 

and  as  high  as  the  mouth;  the  right  thumb  on  the  cock,  and  the  fingers 
under  the  guard. 

1625.  when  cocked,  (which  must  he  done  gently,)  the  right  hand  will 
irrxsp  tie  small;   the  soldier  will  hall-face  to  the  right,  and  place  the  butt 

168 


LIGHT-INFANTRY    AND    RIFLE.— COMPANY.  Ill 

in  the  hollow  of  the  right  shoulder,  move  the  right  foot  about  eighteen 
inches  in  rear  of  the  left,  the  left  knee  bent,  the  body  brought  well  for- 
ward;  the  left  hand,  without  having  quitted  its  hold,  supporting  the  fire- 
lock near,  and  in  front  of,  the  lock ;  the  right  elbow  raised  even  with  the 
shoulder  ;  the  fore-finger  on  the  trigger  ;  the  head  bent  forward,  and  tho 
cheek  resting  against  the  butt ;  the  left  eye  shut,  the  right  taking  aim 
through  the  sight :  as  soon  as  the  soldier  has  fixed  upon  his  object,  he  will 
fire,  without  waiting  for  any  command. 

162(5.  When  the  soldier  has  fired,  he  will  bring  the  firelock,  steadied  by 
the  left  hand,  to  the  position  of  Shoulder — arms  ;  and,  facing  to  the  right- 
about, resume  his  place,  and  front ;  he  will  then  bring  the  firelock  into  the 
position  to  load,  half-cock  and  proceed  to  load,  as  prescribed  above. 


To  Fire  and  Load,  Kneeling  and  Lying. 

1st.  Kneeling. 

1627.  The  instructer  will  cause  this  to  be  executed  by  the  commands 
prescribed,  No.  1G23,  substituting  for  the  second  command,  therein  direct- 
ed, 2.  Fire  and  load,  kneeling. 

1628.  At  the  third  command,  the  right  file  (or  files)  will  step  forward,  as 
indicated,  No.  1624,  and  assume  the  kneeling  position,  as  in  No.  211,  ex- 
cept that,  instead  of  placing  the  piece  on  the  ground,  it  will  be  raised  in 
front  of  the  centre  of  the  body,  as  prescribed,  No.  1624. 

1629.  Each  will  then  aim,  bringing  the  body  well  forward,  and  fire,  con- 
forming to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  1625. 

1630.  After  firing,  the  soldier  (remaining  on  his  knee)  will  bring  the 
piece,  supported  by  the  left  hand,  to  the  right  side ;  the  left  elbow  resting 
on,  and  the  barrel  in  a  line  with,  the  left  thigh  ;  he  will  half-cock,  and  then 
open  pan  and  prime,  as  prescribed,  Nos.  1605,  1606  ;  bring  round  the  fire- 
lock with  the  left  hand  to  the  left  side,  the  butt  well  to  the  rear,  the  barrel 
between  the  left  arm  and  the  body,  and  held  thus,  (or  by  the  left  hand,  as 
circumstances  require,)  the  muzzle  as  high  as  the  breast,  and  three  inches 
in  rear  of  the  left  knee  ;  he  will  then  insert  the  cartridge  with  the  right 
hand,  draw  ramrod,  as  prescribed,  No.  1617,  and  ram  forcibly  home,  with 
one  or  both  hands,  as  he  finds  necessary;  after  which  he  will  return  ram- 
rod, as  prescribed,  No.  1611,  and  quickly  assume  the  position  prescribed, 
No.  1623  :  this  file  will  then  rise,  face  about,  and  resume  its  place  in  line. 

1631.  The  second  file  will  then  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  above,  and 
so  on,  throughout  the  company,  (platoons  or  seGtions.) 


2d.   Lying. 

1632.  To  cause  the  company  to  fire  lying,  the  instructer  will  give  tho 
commands  prescribed,  No.  1623  ;  substituting  for  the  second  command, 
therein  directed,  2.  Fire  and  load,  lying. 

1633.  At  the  third  command,  the  first  file  will  step  forward  as  prescribed 
above  ;  and  each  man  of  that  file  will  place  himself  lying  fiat  on  his  belly, 
his  feet  to  the  rear ;  in  this  position  he  will  cock  his  firelock,  holding  it 
(with  his  left  hand)  diagonally  across  and  under  his  breast,  aim  and  fire. 

1634.  So  soon  as  he  has  fired,  he  will  turn  upon  his  left  side,  and  rest 
upon  his  left  elbow  ;  bringing  back  his  piece  with  both  hands  until  the  lock 
be  opposite  his  breast,  the  butt  resting  on  the  ground  ;  in  this  position  he 
will  half-cock,  take  out  his  cartridge  with  his  right  hand,  prime,  and  shut 
pan ;  he  will  then,  still  holding  the  piece  with  his  left  hand,  turn  upon  hi* 
back,  and  throw  it  to  the  rear,  placing  the  butt,  between  his  heels,  with  the 
barrel  up,  and  the  muzzle  raised  above  a  horizontal  position.  During  this 
time,  he  will  hold  the  cartridge,  with  the  utmost  care,  in  the  right  hand ; 
he  wi'l  now  put  it  into  the  barrel,  draw  ramrod,  ram  home  with  the  right 
v~<id   ant',  re  Airn  ramrod.     After  this,  he  will  resume  his  former  position, 

159 


112  LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.— COMPANY. 

lying  on  his  belly,  and  resting  on  both  elbows,  again  prepared  to  fire.    This 
file  will  then  quickly  spring  up,  face  about,  and  resume  its  place  in  line. 

1635.  The  second  file  shall  then  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  the 
first,  and  so  on,  successively,  through  the  company,  (platoons  or  sections.) 


Remarks  on  Firing  as  in  Open  Order. 

1636.  In  the  above  cases  of  firing  as  in  open  order,  the  men  will  only 
fire  and  load  once  at  the  command  ;  but,  when  they  shall  have  been  taught 
to  extend,  the  instructor  will  info.m  the  company  that  they  are  to  tire 
(after  extending)  either  standing,  kneeling  or  lying  :  he  will  then  cause 
the  signal  to  extend  to  be  given  (see  No.  1722)  ;  after  which,  that  to  fire; 
and  the  men  (thus  extended)  will  commence  and  continue  firing  and  load- 
ing, as  directed  by  the  instructor,  until  the  signal  to  cease  firing. 

1637.  In  all  firings  in  extended  order,  whether  at  a  halt,  advancing  or 
retreating,  the  firelock  will  be  brought  to  the  position  to  cock  it,  from  a 
trail. 


File  Movements. 


To  March  by  a  Flank,  to  the  Right  or  Left ;  to  Change  Direc 
Hon,  Marching  by  a  Flank;  to  Halt  the  Company,  Marching 
by  a  Flank ;  to  Front,  and  Align  it. 

1638.  These  will  severally  be  executed,  as  prescribed  Nos.  556  and  fol- 
lowing, 562  and  following,  and  565  and  following. 

To  Advance  by  Files  from  the  Right  or  Left. 

1639.  To  effect  this,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.  Advance  by  right.     2.   Company,  right— face.     3.  March. 

1640.  (PI.  XXIV.  Fig.  1.)  At  the  second  word,  the  company,  except 
the  first  file,  (the  rear  rank  man  of  which  will  step  obliquely  to  the  right 
and  front,  placing  himself  on  the  right  of  his  file-leader,)  will  face  to  the 
right ;  the  captain  will  place  himself  on  the  left  of  his  first  sergeant,  who 
will  step  in  front  of  the  leading  man  of  the  front  rank. 

1641.  At  the  third  word,  the  whole  will  step  off  together,  each  file  chang- 
ing direction  on  the  same  ground ;  the  captain  will,  unless  otherwise  or- 
dered, be  careful  to  lead,  so  that  the  new  direction  may  be  at  right  angles 
with  the  original  line. 

1612.  To  advance  by  file  from  the  right  of  platoons,  or  sections,  would 
be  performed  on  the  same  principles;  the  instructor  commanding, 
1.  Advance  by  right  of  platoons  (or  sections.) 
2.   Company,  7nght—  face.     3.  March. 

1643.  At  the  second  wi>nl,  the  captain  will  place  himself  as  prescribed 
in  advancing  from  the  right  of  company,  and  each  chief  of  the  other  named 
divisions  win  pass  i<>  Ore  front,  by  the  right  of  his  own  division,  through  the 
interval  occasioned  by  the  right  file  disengaging  to  the  front,  and  place  him- 
self on  the  left  of  his  guide  of  the  right,  who  will  have  followed,  and  taken 
po<t  in  front  of  the  leading  front  rank  man  of  the  division. 

Kilt.  At  the  word  March,  the  whole  will  Btep  off  together ;  each  divi- 
sion, led  by  its  chief,  aligning  its  head  by,  and  preserving  distance  from,  the 
right  ;  and  conforming  to  what  has  been  prescribed  for  the  whole  compa- 
sy,  N..s.  L689,  Hi  I".  ' 

16 15.  Advancing  by  file  from  the  left  of  company,  platoons  or  sections, 
ViIii  be  executed  bj  Inverse  rheane.  In  all  cases,  the  heads  of  divisions  will 
align  themselves  by  the  proper  right  of  the  whole. 


Plate  XXIV. 


Light- Infantry  and  Rifle. — Company. 


o*    <?     o* 


4\ 


2T 


UMM 


161 


LnHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.— COMPANY.  113 

To  Retire  by  File,  from  the  Right  or  Left. 

1646.  T  i  effect  this,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.  Retire  by  right.     2.   Company,  right — face.     3.  March. 

1647.  (PI.  XXIV.  Fig,  2.)  At  the  second  command,  the  company,  ex- 
cept {he  first  file,  will  face  to  the  right ;  both  men  of  the  first  file  will  face 
to  the  right-about;  the  rear  rank  man  will  disengage,  and  the  front  rank 
man,  by  an  oblique  step,  will  place  himself  on  his  left ;  the  covering  ser- 
geant will  place  himself  in  front  of  this  latter,  and  the  captain,  on  the  left 
of  the  covering  sergeant,  to  lead. 

1648.  At  the  word  March,  the  whole  will  step  off  together  5  the  cap- 
tain leading  the  company  directly  to  the  rear,  and  each  file  following  and 
changing  direction  on  the  same  ground. 

1649.  Retiring  by  file  from  the  right  of  platoons  or  sections,  would  be 
executed  on  the  same  principles;  the  instructer  substituting  the  commands, 

1.  Retire  by  right  of  platoons  (or  sections.) 
2.  Company,  right — face.     3.  March, 

1650.  Each  named  division  will  execute  precisely  what  has  been  pre- 
scribed above  for  the  whole  company,  and  each  chief  and  guide  of  division 
will  conform  to  the  instructions  for  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant. 

1651.  Retiring  by  file  from  the  left  of  company,  platoons  or  sections,  will 
be  executed  by  inverse  commands  and  means ;  the  captain  always  proceed- 
ing by  the  rear  to  the  left  of  his  company  or  division. 

To  Form  Single  File. 

1652.  The  company  supposed  marching  by  a  flank,  to  form  single  file, 
the  instructer  will  command, 

1.  Single  file.     2.  March. 

1653.  At  the  second  word,  each  rear  rank  man,  by  an  oblique  (or  side) 
step,  will  cover  his  proper  file-leader. 

1654.  If  the  company  were  at  a  halt,  and  the  instructer  wished  to  put  it 
in  march  by  single  file,  on  the  above  command,  the  whole  would  face  to 
the  right:  at  the  word  March,  rear  rank  men  would  conduct  themselves 
as  prescribed  above. 

1655.  To  resume  the  .order  of  double  files,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.  Double  file.     2.  March. 

1656.  At  the  word  March,  the  rear  rank  men  will  advance  the  left 
shoulder,  and  move  up,  in  double  quick  time,  till  abreast  of  their  respec- 
tive file-leaders. 

Remarks  on  Single  File. 

1657.  (PI.  XXV.  Fig.  2.)  If  a  company,  advancing  from  the  right  or 
left  in  single  file,  were  ordered,  as  will  be  hereafter  prescribed,  1.  Into 
line;  2.  March;  the,  first  file  would  halt;  each  man  would,  in  succes- 
sion, move  on  in  the  track  of  the  first ;  when  arrived  tc  within  one  or  two 
paces  of  that  file,  turn  at  right  angles  to  the  left,  move  on  till  opposite  his 
place  in  line,  then  face  to  the  right  or  left,  and  move  up  to  his  rank  in  line, 
thus  forming  line  of  battle  in  two  ranks  from  the  march  in  single  file.,  the 
rear  rank  men  taking  special  care  to  cover  their  file-leaders. 

1658.  The  company  will  also  be  practised,  when  advancing  and  retiring 
by  single  file,  to  form  in  line  of  single  rank;  in  winch  case,  the  instructer 
will  command,  1.  In  single  rank ;  2.  Into  line ;  3.  March  ;  and  it 
will  be  executed  on  the  same  principles,  except  that  each  proper  rear  rank 
man  takes  his  place  in  the  single  rank  on  the  left  of  his  proper  file-leader. 

1659.  It  will  be  observed,  that  the  above  movements  are  intended  to  be 
executed  in  thick  woods,  narrow  paths,  or  marshy  and  difficult  ground. 
Whenever  the  gr  >und  admits,  and  the  intention  is  to  form  line  in  two  ranks, 

163 


114  LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.-  COMPANY. 

the   files  will   first  be  doubled,  and,  at  the  command,  Into  line — march, 
each  file  will  move  up  in  echellon,  as  prescribed,  No  1661,  and  following. 

Formations  in  Line  from  File. 

To  the  Front. 

1660.  The  company  marching  by  the  right  flank,  the  instructer  will 
command, 

1.  Into  line.     2.  March. 

1661.  (PI.  XXIV.  Fig.  10  The  front  rank  man  of  the  leading  file  will 
halt ;  the  man  of  the  rear  rank  will  cover  him  by  a  side  step  to  the  left  and 
rear  ;  the  other  files  will  advance  the  right  shoulder,  and  form  upon  the 
leading  file,  moving  over  the  shortest  space  to  the  new  line. 

1662.  The  captain  will  shift  to  the  right,  and  his  first  sergeant  will  cover 
him  ;  the  former  will  correct  the  alignment  of  each  file  as  it  comes  on  the 
line,  adding  the  command,  Front. 

1663.  Forming  line  to  the  front  (the  company  marching  by  the  left  flank) 
would  be  executed  by  inverse  means  ;  the  captain  resuming  his  place  on 
the  right,  on  commanding  Front. 


On  the  Right. 

1664.  The  company  marching  by  the  right  flank,  and  the  instructer 
wishing  it  to  form  line  on  the  right,  he  will  command, 

1.   On  light  into  line.     2.  March. 

1665.  At  this  word,  the  captain  and  covering  sergeant  will  turn  quickly 
to  the  right,  advance  two  paces,  and  halt,  the  latter  stepping  in  the  rear, 
so  as  to  cover  the  former.  Each  file  will  turn  in  succession  to  the  right, 
advance  two  paces,  and  align  itself  on  the  men  who  preceded  them. 

1666.  The  whole  being  aligned,  the  captain  will  command,  Front. 

1667.  The  company,  marching  by  the  left  flank,  would  form  line  on  the 
left  by  inverse  commands  and  means ;  the  captain  shifting  to  the  right 
after  giving  the  last  command. 

Faced  to  the  Rear. 

1668.  The  company,  marching  by  the  right  flank,  would  be  formed  facing 
to  the  then  rear,  by  the  commands, 

1.  Rear  into  line.     2.  March. 

1669.  At  the  second  word,  the  front  rank  man  of  the  loading  file  will 
halt,  and  face  to  the  left-about ;  his  rear  rank  man  will  wheel  to  the  left- 
about,  and  cover  him. 

1670.  The  other  files  will  advance  the  left  shoulder,  and  pass  over  the 
shortest  space  to,  and  cross  the  new  line  ;  halt,  and  turn  to  the  left-about, 
cast  their  eyes  to,  and  dress  by,  the  right. 

1671.  The  captain  will  shift  to  the  right,  superintend  the  alignment,  and 
add,  Front. 

1672.  (PL  XXIV.  Fig.  2.)  Marching  by  the  left  flank,  this  movement 
would  be  performed  by  the  same  commands,  and  by  inverse  means. 


To  Advance  by  Files  from  the  Centre. 

1673.  To  effect  this,  the  instructer  will  command, 

1.    Jidvance  by  centre.       2.    Company,  inwards — face.       3.    March. 

1674.  (PI.  XXV.  Fig.  1.)  At  the  second  word,  the  men  will  hi  (  in- 
wards, except  the  two  centre  files,  (the  left  of  the  first  and  right  of  the 
second  platoon,)  who  will  advance  one  pace  obliquely  to  the  right  and  left,  to 
admit  their  two  rear  rank  men  between  them,  who  will  advance    for  thu 

164 


Plate  XXV. 


Light-Infantry  and  Rifle. — Company. 


a 


en 


pilli.'llair'n    □ 

IWirjllMBII 


LIGHT-INFANTRY    AND   RIFLE.— COMPANY.  115 

purpose;  the  first  sergeant  will  take  post  in  front  of  the  left  man  of  the  two 
in  the  centre,  and  the  captain  in  front  of  the  other. 

1675.  At  the  word  March,  the  whole  will  step  off  together,  the  captain 
conducting  the  four  leading  men  directly  to  the  front ;  each  file  of  the  first 
platoon  will  change  direction  in  rear  of,  and  follow  the  two  right  hand  lead- 
ing men,  and  the  files  ofthe.second  platoon  in  like  manner  will  follow  the 
two  left ;  the  company  thus  marching,  its  two  platoons  side  by  side ;  the 
first  platoon  by  the  left,  and  the  second  by  the  right  flank,  and  the  whole 
in  four  files,  the  two  exterior  files  formed  by  the  front  rank  :  so  soon  as  the 
company  shall  have  advanced  the  front  of  a  platoon,  the  file-closers  (who 
will  have  run  to  the  centre,  at  the  commencement  of  the  movement)  will 
take  the  step,  and  follow  the  march  of  the  company. 

Advancing  by  Files  from  the  Centre,  to  Form  Line  to  the 
,  Front. 

1676.  To  effect  this,  the  in3tructer  will  command, 

1.  Into  line.     2.  March. 

1677.  At  the  second  word,  the  two  centre  of  the  four  leading  men  will 
halt ;  the  two  of  the  front  rank  will  step  obliquely  to  the  left  and  right,  cov- 
ering them  in  front. 

1678.  The  men  of  the  first  platoon  will  advance  the  left,  and  those  of  the 
second  the  right,  shoulder,  and  move  over  the  shortest  line  to  the  front ; 
cast  their  eyes  to,  and  align  themselves  on,  the  two  centre  files :  the  cap- 
tain will  proceed  to  the  right  of  the  company,  superintend  the  alignment, 
and  add  the  "command,  Front,  when  the  alignment  is  complete  :  the  file- 
closers  will  resume  their  places  in  rear  of  the  line. 


Advancing  by  Files  from  the  Centre,  to  Form  Line  on 
either  Flank. 

1679.  The  instructer,  wishing  the  company  (advancing  by  file  from  the 
centre)  to  form  line  on  the  right  flank,  will  command, 
1.  Right  into  line.     2.  March.  . 

16S0.  (PI.  XXV. .Fig.  1.)  At  the  last  word,  the  right  hand  files  (those 
of  the  first  platoon)  will  halt  and  face  to  the  right,  the  captain  and  covering 
sergeant  proceeding,  by  the  front  rank,  to  their  posts  on  the  right,  whence 
the"former  will  alifrn  the  company.  The  first  of  the  left  files  (those  of  the 
second  platoon)  will  pass  the  rear  of  the  left  of  the  first  platoon,  turn  to  the 
right,  and  form  line  on  it ;  the  remaining  files  will  turn,  successively,  and 
form  line  on  the  right,  the  whole  casting  their  eyes  to  the  right  flank :  the 
file-closers  will  conform  to  the  movement,  and  resume  their  post3  in  rear 
of  the  fine. 

1631.  The  captain  will  then  command,  Front. 

1682.  Forming  line  on  the  left  will  be  executed  by  inverse  means,  the 
left  files  halting  and  facing,  and  those  of  the  right  forming  line  on  the  left ; 
the  captain  will  proceed  to  the  left  flank,  to  align  the  company  and  resume 
his  post,  on  giving  the  word  Front. 

To  Retire  by  Files  from  the  Centre. 

1683.  To  retire  by  files  from  the  centre,  the  instructer  will  command, 
1.  Retire  by  centre.     2.   Company,  inward — face.     3.  March. 

1684.  At  the  second  word,  the  men  will  face  inwards,  except  the  two 
centre  files. 

1685.  The  two  centre  files  will  face  about ;  the  two  rear  rank  men  will 
advance  one  step  obliquely  to  the  left  and  right :  the  two  front  rank  men 
step  between  them.  The  captain  and  first  sergeant  will  shift  by  the  rear, 
and  take  post  as  in  advancing — the  former  on  the  left  of  the  latter. 


116  LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.— COMPANY. 

1686.  At  the  word  March,  the  four  leading  men  will  be  conducted  by 
the  captain  directly  to  the  rear,  and  the  remaining  files  of  the  company 
will  follow,  as  in  advancing  by  files  from  the  centre. 

Retiring  by  Files  from  the  Centre,  to  Form  Line  faced 
to  the  then  Rear.  ■ 

1687.  The  instructor,  wishing  the  company,  retiring  as  above,  to  form 
line  faced  to  the  original  front,  will  command, 

1.  Rear  into  line.     2.  March. 

1688.  At  the  second  word,  the  two  front  rank  men  of  the  leading  four  will 
halt,  and  face  about ;  the  two  rear  rank  men  will  turn  about,  inwards,  and 
cover  the  former;  the  men  will  advance,  those  of  the  first  platoon  the  right, 
and  those  of  the  second  the  left,  shoulder,  move  over  the  shortest  space, 
cross  the  line,  face  about,  and  dress  by  the  centre. 

1689.  The  captain  will  shift  to  the  right,  followed  by  his  covering  ser- 
geant, correct  the  alignment,  and  add,  Front. 

Countermarch. 

1690.  The  company,  standing  in  line,  would  be  countermarched  by  the 
commands  and  means  prescribed,  No.  717,  and  following. 


Change  of  Front. 

1691.  To  change  the  front  of  the  company,  halted  in  line,  the  instructer 
will  command, 

Change  front  to  the  right. 

1692.  At  this  word,  the  captain  will  step  one  pace  to  the  front,  face  to 
the  left,  and  command, 

1.   Company,  right — face.     2.  Into  line.     3.  March. 

1693.  At  the  first  command,  the  men  will  face  to  the  right.  At  the  word 
March,  the  front  rank  man  on  the  right  will  stand  fast,  and  the  rear  rank 
man  of  the  same  file  cover  by  a  side  step  to  the  left  and  rear;  the  remain- 
ing files  will  advance  the  right  shoulders,  and  move  over  the  shortest  space 
to  their  places  in  the  new  line,  and  dress  by  the  right  as  they  come  up  ; 
the  roar  rank  men  will  carefully  conform  to  the  movement  of  their  respec- 
tive file-leaders. 

1694.  The  captain  (who  has,  after  giving  the  above  command,  resumed 
his  place  on  the  right  of  the  company)  shall  carefully  superintend  the  align- 
ment of  the  men,  as  they  arrive  on  the  line,  and  then  pronrptly  command, 
Front. 

1695.  It  is  a  rule,  to  be  invariably  observed  by  the  men,  in  all  manoeu- 
vres, that,  on  coming  into  line,  they  are  to  close  in  upon,  turn  their  heads 
towards, and  Cw  their  eyes  on,  the  dressing  point,  align  theinselv.es  without 
further  command,  and  steadily  maintain  that  position  of  the  head,  until  the 
command  Front. 

1696.  The  change  of  front  to  the  left  would  he  executed  by  inverse 
commands  and  means;  the  captain,  on  hearing  the  command  from  the  in- 
structer, will  run  quickly  to  the  left  of  his  company,  face  towards  its  right, 
and  give  the  commands  prescribed  above,  substituting  left  for  right ;  align 
the  company  by  (be  left,  and  proceed  promptly  to  the  right  on  ordering, 
Front.  

To  Break  into  Column. 

1697.  The  company  standing  in  line,  and  the  instructer  wishing  it  to 
break  into  column  of  platoons,  right  in  front,  he  will  command, 

1.   Column  of  platoons  to  the  right.     2.  Company,  right— tack. 


LIGHT-INFANTRY    AND    RIFLE.— COMPANY.  117 

1698.  At  the  second  word,  the  whole  will  face  to  the  right;  the  captain 
will  step  one  pace  to  the  right,  and  face  to  the  left ;  the  first  lieutenant  will 
run  quickly  round  the  left  flank  of  the  company,  one  pace  in  front ;  each 
will  then  give  the  caution,  Platoon,  into  line. 

1699.  On  hearing  the  cautions  of  the  chiefs  of  platoons,  the  instructor 
will  add, 

3.  March. 

1700.  At  the  third  command,  each  platoon  will  execute  what  has  been 
prescribed  for  the  company  in  the  preceding. 

1701.  At  this  command,  also,  the  captain  will  pass  rapidly  to  the  point 
where  the  left  of  his  platoon  will  rest,  quickly  post  his  first  sergeant  (who 
will  move  from  the  right)  as  guide  of  the  left;  the  first  lieutenant  will  run 
to  the  point  where  the  left  of  his  platoon  will  rest,  and  post  his  guide  of  the 
left. 

1702.  Each  chief,  after  aligning,  will  command,  Front,  and  take  his 
place  in  front  of  the  platoon. 

1703.  Column  of  sections  will  be  formed  by  similar  commands  and  means, 
substituting  sections  for  platoo/is,  with  this  difference,  that,  at  the  second 
command  from  the  instructer,  the  chiefs  of  the  second  and  third  sections 
will  each  place  himself  in  rear  of  the  right  file  of  his  section,  whence  he 
will  give  the  caution;  at  the  word  March, he  will  run  through  the  inter- 
val caused  by  the  movement  of  the  rear  files  of  the  division  on  his  right,  to 
the  point  where  the  left  of  his  division  will  rest. 

1704.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  be  formed  by  inverse  commands  and 
means.  


To  Resume  the  Formation  in  Line. 


To  the  Left. 

1705.  The  instructer  will  command, 

1.  Left  into  line.     2.   Column,  left — face. 

1706.  At  the  second  command,  all  the  divisions  will  face  to  the  left:  the 
instructer  will  then  add, 

-^  3.  March. 

1707.  The  captain  will  instantly  proceed  to  the  point  where  the  right 
will  rest,  and  each  of  the  other  chiefs  of  division,  by  the  left,  to  his  place  in 
the  rank  of  file-closers ;  the  files  of  each  division  will  advance  the  left 
shoulders,  and  form  to  the  front,  as  in  No.  1693,  and  then  align  themselves 
by  the  right:  the  captain  will  then  command,  Company — front. 

1708.  At  this  word,  the  guides  will  resume  their  position  in  line. 

1709.  The  open  column  would  be  put  in  march,  execute  the  various 
changes  of  direction,  and  be  halted,  by  the  means  prescribed,  No.  609  and 
following,  No.  623  and  following,  and  No.  641  and  following. 

On  the  Rigid  or  Left. 

1710.  The  column,  right  or  left  in  front,  would  form  line  on  the  right  or 
left,  in  the  manner  prescribed,  No.  726  and  following;,  except  that  the 
commands  to  halt  or  dress  will  be  omitted ;  the  men  halting  and  dressing 
on  coming  into  line,  and  remaining  with  their  eyes  to  the  right,  until  the 
word  Front,  given  by  the  captain,  when  he  sees  the  company  aligned. 

Diminishing  and  Increasing  Front,  by  Platoons  and 
Sections. 


Diminishing. 

1711.  The  campany,  marching  in  line,  the  instructer  will  command, 

F  1.  Break  into  platoons.  169 


118  LIGHT-INFANTRY    AND    RIFLE.— COMPANY. 

1712    At  this  word,  the  chiefs  will  place  themselves  in  front  of  their  re- 
spective platoons;  the  chief  of  the  first  will  caution   his  platoon  to  march 
steadily  forward;  the  chief  of  the  second  will  command,  Platoon — by  the 
right  flank  ;  the  instructer  will  then  add, 
2.  March. 

1713.  The  first  platoon  will  march  steadily  to  the  front,  the  first  ser- 
geant shifting  to  the  left ;  the  second  platoon  will  face  to  the  right  on  the 
march,  and  march  by  its  right  flank,  until  its  left  file  arrives  opposite  its 
chief,  who  will  have  halted  on  the  line  of  direction  of  the  guide  of  the  first, 
and  who  will  command,  1.  Front  ;    2.  March  ;    3.   Guide  left. 

1714.  The  company,  marching  by  platoon,  would  be  broke  into  section 
on  the  same  principles  ;  the  instructer  substituting,  in  the  commands,  sec- 
tions for  platoons.  

Increasing. 

1715.  The  company  marching  by  section,  the  instructer,  wishing  to  in- 
crease its  front,  would  command, 

1.  Form  platoons.     2.  March. 

1716.  At  the  first  word,  the  chiefs  of  the  first  and  third  sections  will 
command,  Section — by  the  right  flank  ;  and  the  chiefs  of  the  second  and 
fourth  will  caution  their  sections  to  march  steadily  forward. 

1717.  At  the  word  March,  the  first  and  third  sections  will  face  to  the 
right,  on  the  march,  and  file  past  their  respective  chiefs,  who  will  have 
halted  opposite  the  inner  flanks  of  the  second  and  fourth  sections ;  and  who 
will,  when  the  rear  file  shall  have  passed,  command,  1.  Fro.\t  ;  and,  when 
his  section  has  united  with  its  corresponding  one,  he  will  add,  2.  March; 
3.  Guide  left :  the  chiefs  of  the  second  and  third  sections  will  resume  their 
places  in  the  rank  of  file-closers. 

1718.  A  further  increase  to  company  front  would  be  executed  on  the 
same  principles. 

1719.  The  front  of  a  column,  left  in  front,  would  be  diminished  or  in- 
creased on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means. 


Column  of  Route. 

1720.  The  company,  marching  in  column,  would  assume,  if  necessary,  the 
route  step,  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed.  No.  682,  and  following. 

1721.  Partial  dimii.ution  of  front,  by  breaking  off  files,  and  increase,  by 
forming  them  up,  would  also  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  663,  and  fol- 
lowing.   

-    To  Extend. 

1722.  A  company  may  extend  in  file,  or  in  single  rank,  from  any  part 
and  with  any  interval  between  the  ranks  and  between  the  files. 

1723.  The  habitual  interval  between  extended  files  will  be  six  paces  in 
open  grounds;  but  in  woods  or  broken  grounds,  it  may  be  increased  ;  though, 
under  no  circumstances,  is  it  advisable  to  extend  more  than  twelve  paces. 
When  the  instructer  wishes  the  extension  to  be  at  a  greater  or  less  inter- 
val than  the  habitual  one,  he  will  prefix  to  the  command  extend,  the  words 
four  (ten  or  other)  paces. 

172  1.  The  extension  will  always  take  place  from  the  point  where  the 
bugle  sounds,  or  whence  the  command  issues. 

1725.  The  instructer  wishing  the  company  to  extend  to  the  right,  would 
repair  to  the  left  file,  and  command, 

Right — extend,  (or,  Right paces — extend.) 

1726.  (PI.  XX  \.  Fig.  I.)  At  this  word,  (or,  it  may  be,  signal,)  the  men, 
except  the  left  file,  will  face  ti>  the  right,  trail  arms",  and  move  in  double 
quick  time  ;  'he  front  rank  man  of  the  fust  file  will  immediately  take  up 

170 


LIGHT-INFANTRY    AND    RIFLE.— COMPANY.  119 

points  in  prolongation  of  the  line,  to  which  he  will  conform  as  far  as  the 
ground  will  admit;  each  file  will  follow  the  trace  of  that  in  front,  halt,  and 
front  when  at  the  requisite  distance  from  that  in  rear.  The  rear  rank  man 
of  each  file  will  caution  his  front  rank  man,  in  an  under  tone,  when  to  halt ; 
and  he  will  judge  of  the  distance  by  casting  his  eye  over  the  shoulder.  It 
will  thus  always  be  the  duty  (in  extending  in  file)  of  the  front  rank  man 
to  preserve  the  direction,  and  the  rear  rank  man,  the  distance. 

1727.  If  the  extension  were  to  be  to  the  left,  it  would  be  effected  by  in- 
verse commands  and  means. 

1728.  If  from  the  centre,  or  any  central  point,  the  instructer  will  repair 
thither,  and  command, 

To  the  flanks — extend,  (or,  To  the  flanks paces — extend.) 

1729.  (PL  XXX.  Fig.  3.)  At  the  command,  (or  signal,)  the  files,  ex- 
cept that  opposite  the  instructer,  or  bugle,  will  face  outwards,  and  conduct 
themselves  as  prescribed  above. 

1730.  To  extend  in  single  rank,  the  instructer  will  command, 
Right,  (left,  or  to  the  flanks,)  in  single  rank — extend. 

1731.  At  this  command,  the  whole  will  face,  as  prescribed,  and  the  reai 
rank  men  immediately,  on  the  march,  by  a  side  step,  cover  their  file-lead- 
ers; the  whole  thus  forming  one  rank.  In  this  case,  each  man  will  regu- 
late the  distance  of  the  one  in  his  front,  and  caution  him  to  halt,  when  at 
the  prescribed  number  of  paces. 

1732.  In  elementary  instruction,  the  distance  will  be  frequently  varied, 
in  order  to  accustom  the  men  to  judge  accurately  by  the  eye. 


Supports  and  Reserves. 

1733.  Supports  and  reserves  will  be  designated  previous  to  extending, 
and  the  total  of  these  will  vary  according  to  circumstances,  a  platoon  or 
section  for  a  company,  as  the  ground  may  be  more  or  less  open  or  en- 
closed. 

1734.  (PI.  XXX.  Fig.  3.)  When  a  company  approaches  the  ground 
where  it  is  to  extend,  it  will  halt  with  one  section,  or  any  other  proportion 
of  the  company  ;  this  section  will  constitute  a  reserve,  and  remain  imbodied 
at  a  convenient  distance  in  rear  of  the  line  of  skirmishers.  The  captain 
will  designate  the  number  and  strength  of  the  supports,  each  to  be  com- 
manded by  an  officer,  if  practicable  ;  these  supports  will  advance,  with  the 
sections  to  which  they  belong,  about  one  hundred  paces,  and  halt :  the  re- 
mainder of  each  section  will  continue  to  advance  to  about  the  same  dis- 
tance farther  to  the  front,  whence,  on  a  signal  to  that  effect  from  the  re- 
serve, or  a  command  from  its  own  chief,  take  extended  order.  The  cap- 
tain will  previously  have  designated  the  file  from  which  the  extension  will 
be  made. 

1735.  The  supports  will,  by  a  movement  to  the  right  and  left,  place 
themselves  opposite  the  centre  of  their  respective  lines  of  skirmishers,  and 
remain  imbodied. 

1736.  The  reserve  and  supports  will  mutually  support  and  reinforce  the 
line. 

1737.  When  the  signal  to  relieve  skirtnishers  is  sounded,  the  reserve 
will  advance ;  the  supports  will  unite  with  the  reserve,  and  the  whole  will 
extend  preparatory  to  the  relief ;  the  relieved  line  will  form  a  correspond- 
ing number  of  supports  and  reserves. 

1738.  The  officer  in  command  of  the  company  will  usually  remain  with 
the  reserve  to  give  the  necessary  signals,  or,  by  means  of  trusty  men  of  the 
reserve,  and  supports,  comr.  unicate  with  his  parties  in  front,  and,  by  the 
rear,  with  the  commander  of  the  column.  In  like  manner,  the  habitual 
posts  of  chiefs  of  divisions,  in  extended  order,  will  be  with  their  supports. 

1739.  In  extending,  officers  will  move  opposite  the  particular  file  they 
cover  in  close  order:  when  extended,  they  are  not  to  confine  themselves 

171 

1 


120  LIGHT-INFANTRY    AND    RIFLE.— COMPANY. 

(o  any  spot,  but  will  be  in  constant  activity  along  the  rear,  within  the  limits 
of  the  ground  covered  by  their  particular  section  or  platoon. 

1740.  (PI.  XXX.  Fig.  3.)  If  the  object  be  to  mask  the  deployment  of  . 
column,  cr  the  movement  of  a  line,  the  extension  should  etnlrace  such  a 
space  as  to  envelope  the  flanks  of  the  party  covered ;  and  the  better  to  ef- 
fect this,  the  flanks  of  the  chain  will  be  slightly  thrown  back;  if  the  offi- 
cers towards  the  flanks  discover  that  this  obvious  object  is  not  attained  by 
the  specified  distance,  (although  no  order  to  that  effect  may  have  been 
given,)  they  will  cause  the  files  at  the  extremities  tu  extend,  and  those  to- 
ward-; the  centre  will  conform  to  the  movement. 

1741.  When  a  party,  in  close  order,  is  directed  to  extend  in  a 

upon  a  given  space,  the  commander  will  immediately  select  objects  at  the 
extremities  of  this  space  for  the  two  Hank  files,  and  equi-distant  for  the 
centre  file ;  the  flank  and  centre  files  will,  upon  the  above  order,  (or  sig- 
nal,) move  upon  the  selected  points.  In  this  manner,  the  whole  will  be 
extending  gradually  as  they  advance,  and  regulate  their  distances  on  the 
march ;  in  this  case  the  reserve  and  supports  will,  from  the  commence- 
ment, conform  to  the  movement  of  the  line. 

1742.  The  combined  command  (or  signal)  to  advance,  and  extend,  will 
be  given  in  the  above  ca    ■. 

1743.  If  a  company,  marching  in  close  order,  find  it  necessary  to  retreat 
and  extend,  the  combined  command  (or  signal)  would,  in  like  manner,  be 
given  and  executed. 

To  Fire  in  Extended  Order. 

1744.  In  extended  order,  on  the  signal  being  given  to  fire,  at  a  halt, 
whether  in  double  or  single  rank,  every  man  will  take  deliberate  aim  at 
his  object,  firing  at  will,  as  prescribed,  No.  1624  to  1637,  inclusive. 

Advancing. 

1745.  1st.  At  the  command  (or  signal)  for  the  whole  line  io  fire  advanc- 
ing, the  men  of  each  file  will  keep  together,  preserving  their  distances, 
and  aligning  themselves  as  accurately  as  may  be,  in  the  direction  from 
which  the  command  is  given,  loading  and  firing  as  rapidly  as  is  consistent 
with  order  and  execution;  the  moment  the  man  in  front  has  fired,  he  will 
commence  loading,  and  the  oilier  man  of  his  file  will  pass  to  the  front  by 
the  ri  »ht. 

1746.  (PI.  XXX.  Fig.  I.)  2d.  When  the  command  (or  Bignal)  is  given 
to  advance  and  fire  by  ranks,  the  front  rank  of  each  file  will  lire;  the 
rear  rank  man  will  then  move  forward  the  designated  number  of  paces,  in 
the  manner  which  will  be  prescribed,  and  fin-  at  will:  so  soon  as  he  has 
fired,  the  front  rank  man  will  advance  again  the  prescribed  number  of 
paces,  and,  in  his  turn,  fire  ;  and  so  on  alternat   iy. 


Retiring. 
1747.  1st.  When  ordered  to  fire  retiring  by  the  whole  line,  the  men 
it,  and  fire  deliberately  at  their 
'     loading,  and  :!:*•!!  retiring  to- 
■  line. 

.  by  alternate  ranis,  the  man 
of  the  fronl  rank  the  rear  by  the  left  of 

the  rear  rank  man,  to  the  designate 

man  of  the  other  rank  w  ill  fire 
so  soon  a  I      nd  run  in  like  manner  by  the  right,  and 

to  the  designated  number  of  paces,  in  reap  of  the  other;  and  soon.;]!  i 

17!.').   Firing,  ik,  the  odd   and  even 

di  tance  i  of  extension. 
1750     \  hould  be  always  loaded. 

17J 


LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.— COMPANY.  121 

Intervals  between  Ranks. 

1751.  For  elementary  instruction,  and  at  all  times  when  the  distance  is 
not  specified,  the  intervals  between  ranks,  when  tiling,  advancing  or  re- 
tiring by  ranks,  will  be  twelve  paces,  although  the  commander  may  vary 
it  according  to  circumstances.  When  practicable,  the  commander  will, 
previous  to  extending,  give  the  number  of  paces  of  interval  which  is  to 
separate  the  ranks  in  advancing  or  retiring  after  extension.  If  he  wish 
the  interval  between  ranks  to  be  greater  or  less  than  the  habitual  one,  in 
advancing  or  retiring,  he  will  add,  after  the  order  to  advance  or  retire,  (so 
many)  paces,  when  each  man,  in  advancing  or  retiring,  will  pass  his  tile- 
leader,  the  designated  number  of  paces. 

1752.  In  firing  in  extended  order,  the  skirmishers  will  be  governed  by 
circumstances,  and  fire  standing,  kneeling  or  lying,  as  they  may  require, 
and  take  advantage  of  any  object  which  presents  itself  to  shelter  the  per- 
son ;  and  for  this  they  may  advance  a  few  paces,  more  or  less. 

1753.  In  occupying  fences,  or  the  edges  of  hills,  whether  in  close  or  ex- 
tended order,  the  line  will  always  follow  the  direction  of  these  objects, 
provided  the  salient  angles  are  not  too  acute ;  but  the  men  must  be  very 
careful  to  fire  clear  of  each  other. 

1754.  In  relieving  a  line  of  skirmishers,  the  new  line  will  extend  in  the 
rear,  out  of  reach  of  the  enemy's  fire,  and  afterwards  run  up  rapidly  to  the 
old  line  ;  each  file  of  the  former,  proceeding  straight  in  rear  of  the  latter, 
so  as  to  keep  them  between  themselves  and  the  enemy's  fire. 

1755.  If  the  relief  is  to  take  place  when  halted,  each  file  of  the  old  skir- 
mishers will  run  straight  to  the  rear,  the  instant  that  a  file  of  new  skirmish- 
ers reaches  the  line  of  defence  ;  and,  whenever  the  former  is, out  of  reach 
of  the  enemy's  fire,  they  will  close  in  upon  their  supports;  should  an  im- 
mediate advance  be  intended,  the  relieved  skirmishers  ought  to  remain  in 
the  line,  if  covered,  instead  of  exposing  themselves  to  a  fire  while  retiring. 

1758.  If  the  relief  take  place  while  advancing,  the  new  skirmishers  will 
run  up  in  the  same  way,  and  pass  briskly  in  front  of  the  others ;  the  old 
skirmishers  will  lie  down  till  they  are  out  of  the  enemy's  fire,  after  which 
they  close  upon  their  supports  as  before. 

1757.  If  relieving  while  retiring,  the  new  skirmishers  will  extend  a  con- 
siderable distance  in  the  rear,  and  each  cover  himself  with  an  object,  if 
practicable.  The  old  line  of  skirmishers  will  retire  gradually,  until  within 
twenty  paces  of  the  new  ;  they  will  then  run  through  the  intervals,  until 
out  of  reach  of  the  enemy's  fire,  and  close. 


To  Cease  Firing. 

1758.  At  the  signal  or  command  to  cease  firing,  which  will  be  repeated, 
particularly  in  extended  order,  by  every  officer  and  file-closer,  every  man 
will  re-load  and  maintain  his  position,  if  in  his  proper  rank  :  if  not  in  his 
proper  rank,  it  will  instantly  be  assumed,  the  men  in  the  rear  passing 
quickly  to  the  front  of  their  file-leaders. 

To  Close. 

1759.  When  the  command  or  signal  is  given  to  close,  all  the  files  will 
face  towards  the  point  whence  the  signal  is  given,  if  in  their  own  line,  or, 
if  a  file  has  been  previously  designated,  on  which  to  close,  they  will  face 
towards  it,  and  run  in  double  quick  time  until  they  are  closed.  If  the  sig- 
nal is  sounded  from  the  supports  or  reserve,  and  no  file  has  been  designat- 
ed as  above,  they  will  close  on  the  supports. 

1760.  As  each  file  reaches  the  closing  point,  it  will  halt,  shoulder  arms, 
and  align  itself;  if  the  close  be  upon  the  centre,  the  alignment  will  !)e  on 
the  centre  ;  if  to  a  flank,  towards  that  flank.  When  the  close  is  ordered, 
the  rear  men  may  be  h  front,  in  which  case  they  will  shift  as  they  come 
on  the  line. 

V  173 


122 


LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.— COMPANY. 


To  Recall 

17G1.  The  commander  of  a  column,  wishing  to  recall  his  skirmishers, 
would  cause  the  recall  to  be  sounded,  and  this  signal  would  be  repeated  by 
the  bugle  of  the  reserve  ;  the' extended  line  of  skirmishers  will  instantly 
run  in  upon  the  supports,  with  them  rapidly  retreat  to  the  reserve  ;  then, 
together  with  the  latter,  retire  to  the  column.  Should  the  officer  com- 
manding the  reserve  wish  to  recall  his  skirmishers,  lie  will  .simply  give  the 
signal,  and  ihey  will  cease  firing  and  run  in,  as  above. 


To  Halt. 

17G2.  At  the  command  or  signal  to  halt,  every  man  will  halt  in  his  po- 
sition;  but  if  they  are  advancing  firing,  the  firing  is  not  t<*  cease,  unless 
the  order  to  that  effect  be  given. 

To  Annul. 

1763.  When  this  signal  is  sounded,  all  previous  commands  are  annulled. 
Each  man  will  remain  in  his  position,  re-load,  if  unloaded,  correct  his  dis- 
tance and  interval,  and  give  attention  for  the  succeeding  commands  or  signals. 

To  Incline. 

1764.  When  the  incline  sounds,  preceded  by  the  signal  to  the  right  or 
left,  each  file  will  advance  the  reverse  shoulder,  and  gain  ground  laterally, 
to  the  designated  flank,  preserving,  carefully,  his  distance  from  the  next 
file  toward  the  point  of  inclination. 


To  Throw  forward  a  Flank. 

1763.  When  the  signal  is  sounded  of  left  or  right,  and  the  advance,  the 
men  will  advance  the  reverse  shoulder,  and  gain  to  the  front  and  flank  ; 
when  the  advance  again  sounds,  they  will  resume  the  direct  step.  In 
obeying  the  above  signal,  the  men  will  take  shorter  steps  in  proportion  as 
they  are  near  the  pivot  flank. 

1766.  By  the  above  means,  the  front  of  a  line  of  light  troops  may  be  changed. 

1767.  When  a  line  of  skirmishers,  masking  the  movement  of  troops,  is 
compelled  to  fall  back,  they  will  do  it  with  perfect  deliberation,  disputing 
every  inch  of  ground  :  when  the  assembly  sounds,  it  is  an  evidence  that 
the  troops  are  prepared  to  act,  and  the  skirmishers  will  unmask  the  front  with 
the  greatest  despatch,  re-assemble  in  rear  of  their  respective  corps,  re-form, 
Mid  take  their  positions  in  line,  or  such  other  position  as  may  be  designated. 


Too  fast,  (or,  too  slow.) 


1768.  When  this  signal  sounds,  it  will  be  answered  by  the  bugles  of  the 
advanced  or  flanking  parties,  to  whom  it  may  be  directed;  the  latter  will 
obey  the  signal,  and  decrease  or  accelerate  their  rate  of  march  accordingly. 


No 


Signals. 

17G9.  Simple  Signals 

1 

To  extend. 

No.  8.  To  annul. 

No.  14.  To  incline. 

2. 

To  close. 

9.  To  relieve  Skir- 

15. Right. 

3 

To  advance. 

mishers. 

16.  Left. 

4 

To  halt. 

10.  To  recall. 

17.  Centre. 

b 

To  retire. 

11.  To  assemble. 

18.  Double      quick 

6 

To  fire. 

12.  Too  fast. 

inarch. 

To  cease  firing 

13.  Too  slow. 

19.  Alternate  ranks. 

LIGHT-INFANTRY  AND  RIFLE.— COMPANY. 


123 


Light-Infantry  and  Rifle  Bugle  Signals. 

ttH  j  i#p|  s  \&m  HofcH    \£m  bbm   (£1$ 

4|ii  iu>i?  iiiii   i.iuiifrM' 


,414*°     |Mm    JjH+4 


VrW  I 


1  iiii  '^rrrW  s 
irrwi  5' 


L  .|.h 


lyrn*    j.j.p|.| 
rrni  i  gwTTfa  • 

li  fTFB  11"  ff6H 


till 

tfflstttilg 


•  •M 

rrw ! 


I  ALU  5 
j     14 

4-i-W 


rrrm  1  1 1  w  a     uiu    rrrr»  .. 


tTrm  SfftPI 


my. 

»  I  IliHI 

*■  r.nm 


,rrm 


;TTW 


1    rri7     j-H-H 


L1GHT-1NFANTRV    AND    RIFLE.— BATTALION. 


1770.  The  following  combinations  of  the  above  signals  will  be  required 
under  various  circumstances,  viz  . 


No.  1  and  15.  To  extend  from  right. 

1  and  16.  To  extend  from  left. 
land  17.  To  extend  from  cen- 
tre. 

land    3.  To  extend,  advancing. 
3  and    6.  To  advance,  firing. 

2  and    5.  To  close,  retiring. 
Sand   6.  To  retire, firing. 

7  and    3.  To   cease  firing    and 
advance. 


No.  9  and   3.  To  relieve,  advancing 
9  and   5.  To  relieve,  retiring. 

15  and  14.  To  incline  to  the  right. 

16  and    3.  To  throw  forward \  the 

left. 

15  and   3.  To  throw  forward  the 

right. 
3, 6  and  19.  To  advance,  firing,  by 
alternate  ranks. 

16  and  13.  The  left  is  too  slow. 


BATTALION. 

1771.  The  habitual  order  of  battle  of  a  battalion  of  light-infantry  or  rifle 
men,  is  the  same  as  that  prescribed  for  a  battalion  of  the  line. 

17  72.  The  general  course  of  instruction  will  be  the  same  as  that  pre- 
scribed for  a  battalion  of  the  line  ;  and  the  general  duties  of  the  field-offi- 
cers, in  the  instruction  and  manoeuvres,  will  also  be  the  same.  Hence, 
the  particular  pests  of  the  field-officers,  in  the  following  manoeuvres,  will 
not  be  designated. 


and  to 


To  Open  Ranks ;  the  Alignment  of  Open  Ranks 
Close  the  Ranks. 

1773.  The  manner  of  opening  and  aligning  the  ranks,  is  the  same  as 
prescribed,  No  S24,  and  following  ;  to  close  the  ranks,  will  be  executed  as 
prescribed,  No.  832. 

Firings. 

177-1.  A  battalion  of  light-infantry  or  riflemen,  in  close  order,  may  be 
caused  to  lire  by  battalion,  by  wing,  by  company  or  by  file,  by  the  com- 
mands and  means  prescribed,  No.  833,  and  following.  But  the  fire  by  file, 
as  in  open  order,  will  always  be  conducted  by  each  company,  as  prescrib- 
ed, No.  1623,  and  following. 


File  Movements. 


To  March  to  the  Right  or  Left  Flank. 
'775.  The  battalion,  standing  aligned,  will  be  marched  in  file  to  the  right 
or  left,  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed,  No.  1393,  and  following. 

To  Change  Direction,  Marching  bi/  a  Flank. 

1776.  This  will  be  executed  as  prescribed,  No.  1400,  and  following. 

To  Advance  by  the  Right  (or  Left)  of  Companies. 

1777.  To  effect  this,  the  colonel  will  command, 

l.  JLivance  by  right  of  companies.    2.  Battalion,  right — face. 
:j.  Marcs. 

1778.  (PI.  XXVI.  Fig.  1.)  At  the  second  command,  the  battalion  will 

face  In  the  i  i ^ 1 1 1  ;   captains,  first  sergeants,  and  the    rear   rank   man   on   the 

right  of  each  company,  will  place  themselves  as  prescribed,  No,  1640,  and 
follow  ing. 

1779    At  the  word  March,  the  whole  will  step  off;  the  captain  of  the 
176 


Plate  XXVI. 


Light- Infantry  and  Rifle.— Battalion 


j. 


ws^mw 


j..:....;:.d:.i 


(i!  y=* 


/iHji 

mm-  I 


I  .  »    : 


inn    []. 


i\rv'l-i     tiic 


/am!  Mi    M 


Sf     n 


fill 


4 

& 


LIGHT-INFANTRY    AND    RIFLE.— BATTALION.         125 

first  company  will  move  steadily,  upon  a  line  perpendicular  to  the  original 
line  ;  the  captain  of  the  second  will  conduct  his  company  parallel  to,  and 
with  its  leading  file  accurately  aligned  on,  the  first;  the  other  captains  will 
carefully  preserve  the  distance  and  parallelism,  and  align  the  heads  of 
companies  on  the  two  first. 

1780.  The  battalion  may  be  caused  to  advance  from  left  of  companies  by 
inverse  means;  always,  however,  Signing  themselves  by  the  proper  right. 


To  Retire  by  the  Right  (or  Left)  of  Companies. 

1781.  The  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Retire  by  right  of  companies.     2.  Battalion,  right — face. 
3.  March. 

1782.  (PI.  XXVI.  Fig.  2.)  At  the  second  word,  the  battalion  will  face 
to  the  right,  and  each  company  conforms  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  1647. 

1783.  At  the  command  March,  the  whole  will  step  off ;  each  captain 
aligning  by  the  proper  right,  and  conducting  as  prescribed  above. 

1784.  The  battalion  may  retire  by  the  left,  on  the  same  principles. 


To  Advance  by  the  Centre  of  Companies. 

1785.  The  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Advance  by  centre  of  companies.     2.  Battalion,  inwards — face. 
3.  March. 

1786.  At  the  second  command,  each  company  will  conduct  itself  as  pre- 
scribed for  a  single  company,  No.  1674,  and  following. 

1787.  At  the  word  March,  the  whole  will  step  off,  as  prescribed,  No. 
1675 ;  captains  carefully  preserving  distance  from,  and  aligning  by,  the 
right-  _______ 

To  Retire  by  the  Centie  of  Companies. 

1788.  The  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Retire  by  centre  of  companies.     2.  Battalion,  inwards — face. 
3.  March. 

1789.  At  the  second  command,  each  company  will  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed  for  a  single  company,  No.  1G84,  and  following. 

1790.  At  the  third  word,  the  whole  will  step  off;  preserving  intervals 
and  alignments  as  prescribed  above. 

Formations  in  Line,  from  File. 

To  the  Front. 

1791.  The  battalion,  advancing  by  the  right  of  companies,  to  form  line  to 
the  front,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Battalion,  into  line.     2.  March. 

1792.  (PI.  XXVI.  Fig.  1.)  At  the  second  word,  the  leading  front  rank 
man  of  each  company  will  halt ;  each  first  sergeant  will  halt,  face  to  the 
light,  his  right  elbow  pressed  gently  against  the  breast  of  the  front  rank 
man  of  the  right  file,  and,  bringing  his  firelock  before  the  centre  of  his  body, 
will  carefully  cover  the  gnidein  his  front,  on  the  alignment  •  the  second 
sergeant  of  the  left  company  will  run  up  rapidly,  and  place  himself  on  the 
line  of  guides,  and  near  where  the  left  of  his  company  will  rest.  Each 
company  will  then  conform  to  what  is  directed  for  a  single  company,  Nos. 
1661,  1662;  and  the  captains,  after  correcting  the  alignment,  will  command, 
Front. 

1793    The  colonel  will  command, 

3.  Guides — posts  • 

179 


126         LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.— BATTALION. 

Which  will  be  obeyed,  as  prescribed,  No.  1141. 

179  4.  Advancing  by  the  left  of  companies,  the  line  would  be  formed  by 
inverse  means;  the  first  sergeant  of  the  right  company  conducting  him- 
self as  prescribed  above  for  the  second  sergeant  of  the  left,  and  together 
with  all  the  second  sergeants  acting  as  guides;  captains  who  would  have 
aligned  their  companies  from  the  left  shifting  to  the  right  at  the  command, 
Guides — posts. 

1795.  Ifneces  ary,  the  whole  battalion  might  form  as  above,  on  the  same 
principles,  advancing  from  the  right  or  left  of  platoons,  or  even  sections,  as 
prescribed.  No.  1643,  and  following. 

1796.  Were  the  battalion  advancing  by  file  from  the  centre  of  companies, 
the  colonel,  to  form  line  to  the  front,  would  give  the  same  command  as  for 
forming  line,  when  advancing  by  the  right :  the  captain  and  covering  ser- 
geant would  spring  to  the  point  where  the  right  will  rest,  at  the  second 
word,  whence  both  would  conform  to  what  has  been  prescribed,  No.  1792, 
as  would  the  second  sergeant  of  the  left  company :  the  companies  would 
conduct  themselves  each  as  prescribed  for  a  single  company,  No.  1677, 
1678. 

On  cither  Flan!:,  or  at  any  Angle  foncard  of  the  Original  Line. 

1797.  The  battalion,  advancing  by  the  right,  left  or  centre  of  companies, 
may  be  formed  in  line  at  any  angle  with  the  original  line.  For  ex-mple, 
advancing  by  the  right  of  companies,  the  colonel,  to  form  line  to  the  right, 
will  command, 

1.  Companies — sight.     2.  Battalion,  into  line.     3.  March. 

1793.       (Plate    XXVII.)      At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the 

first  company  Will  wheel  by  file  to  the  right,  at  the  angle  prescribed  by  the 

colonel,  who  will  have  placed  himself,  or  a  field-officer,  at  the  wheeling 

that   purposa;  when   arrived  at  the  point  where  the  right  is  to 

:.■  t,  (also  indicated  by  a  field  or  staff-officer,)  the  captain  will  command, 

1.  Into  line  ;  2.  March  ;  establish  hie  r<ght  and  left  guides,  and  align  bis 
company.  Each  of  the  other  captains  will  change  direction,  conducting 
his  company  in  such  manner,  as  that  it  shall  regain  its  parallelism  with, 

nee  from,  the  company  on  its  right,  at  least  the  length  of  a  compa- 
ny from  the  line  to  be  formed  on ;  and  thus,  each  will  arrive  perpendicu- 
larly  on   the   new   line:    the   captain   will   then   command,    1.  Into  II:::  ,• 

2.  Mar'.-h.;  and  each  left  guide  will  spring  on  the  line,  lace  towards  its 

I  cover  the  guides  of  the  first  company ;  the  companies  will  con- 
mselves,  in  the  formation,  as  prescribed,  No.  1792;  the  captain, 
after  aligning  his  company,  will  command,  3.  Front. 

1799.  When  the  manoeuvre  is  completed,  the  colonel  will  command. 

Guides — posts. 
180.0.  The  line  may  be  formed  by  the  same  means  to  the  left,  the  battal- 
ion advancing  by  the  right  of  companies.     In  this  case,  each  captain  will 
lie  space  between  the  head  of  his  own  company  and  that  of 
my  on  hi    left,  is  to  be  occupied  by  his  own  men,  instead  of  those 
of  that   company,  as  in  the  other  case.     The  right  guide  will  halt  on  the 
line  facing  to  its  left,  and  the  captain  will  spring  to  the  left  to  align. 

1801.  Ik  like  manner,  the  new  line  (at  any  angle  in  advance  of  the  orig- 
inal line)  maj  be  formed  on  the  same  principles,  when  advancing  by  the 
left  or  centre  of  companies. 

Faced  to  the  Hear  of  the  3farch,  retiring. 

1802.  The.  battalion,  retiring  by  the  right  of  companies,  will  form  line 
faced  to  their  (then)  rear,  and  parallel  to  the  original  front.  On  arriving 
where  the  new  line  is  to  be  formed,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1,  Battalion, rear  into  line.    -.  March. 

ISO  ^ 


Plate  XXVII. 


Light- Infantry  and  Rifle. — Battalion. 


LIGHT-INFANTRY    AND    RIFLE.— BATTALION.         127 

1803.  At  the  second  command,  the  leading  file  of  the  front  rank  of  each 
company  will  face  to  the  left-about;  the  covering  sergeant  will  step  quickly 
in  his  front,  face  to  the  left,  and  touch  the  breast  of  the  former  with  his 
right  elbow  ;  each  captain  will  quicu.y  assume  his  post  on  the  right  to  align 
his  company,  and  each  rear  rank  man  of  the  right  file  will  spring  to  tho 
left-about,  covering  his  file-leader,  and  facing  to  the  new  front :  the  re- 
maining files  of  each  company  will  run  by  the  shortest  space  to  their  places 
.  in  the  new  line,  cross  that  line,  face  to  the  left-about,  each  in  his  proper 
rank,  and  quickly  align  by  the  right;  the  second  sergeant  of  the  left 
company  will  cover  on  the  line  of  guides,  conforming  to  what  has  been 
prescribed  ;  each  captain,  seeing  ihe  aligi^ment  of  his  company  complete, 
will  command,  Front. 

The  colonel  will  then  command, 

Guides — posts. 

1801.  Retiring  by  the  left  of  companies,  the  line  would  be  formed  as 
above,  by  inverse  means;  the  first  sergeant  of  the  right  company  facing  to 
the  left,  and  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed  above  for  the  second  sergeant 
of  the  left,  and  together  with  all  the  second  sergeants  acting  as  guides :  the 
captains,  who  would  have  aligned  their  companies  from  the  left,  shifting  to 
their  posts  at  the  command,  Guides — posts. 

1805.  The  same  principles  would  govern  in  similar  formations,  if  retiring 
by  the  right  of  platoons  or  sections. 

1806.  the  battalion,  retiring  by  the  centre  of  companies,  would  be  formed 
in  line  faced  to  their  then  rear,  by  the  above  command :  the  captain  and 
covering  sergeant  would  spring,  at  the  second  word,  to  the  point  where  tho, 
right  of°the  company  will  rest,  whence  both  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed for  them  in  similar  formations,  retiring  by  the  right ;  as  will  also 
the  second  sergeant  of  the  left  company  :  the  remaining  files  conform  to 
what  is  prescribed  for  those  of  a  single  company,  No.  1638. 


On  either  Flank,  retiring,  at  any  Angle  in  Rear  of  the  Original 
Line. 

1307.  Retiring  by  the  right,  left  or  centre  of  companies,  the  battalion 
may  form  line  at  any  angle  with,  and  in  rear  of,  the  original  line.  If,  (for 
instance,)  retiring  by  the  right,  the  formation  were  to  be  on  the  left,  and 
fronting  towards  the  right  of  their  then  direction,  the  colonel  would  com- 
mand, 

1.  Companies  left.     2.  Battalion,  rear  into  line.     3.  March. 

1308.  (PI.  XXVI.  Fig.  2.)  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the 
first  company  will  cause  it  to  wheel  by  file  to  the  left,  at  the  angje  pre- 
scribed by  the  colonel,  who  will  have  placed  himself,  or  a  field-officer,  at 
the  wheeling  point  for  that  purpose ;  when  arrived  at  the  point  where  the 
right  is  to  rest,  (which  the  colonel  will  also  have  caused  to  be  indicated,) 
the  captain  will  command,  1.  Rear  into  line  ;  2.  March  ;•  and  the  com- 
pany will  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  1669,  and  following;  the  right 
and"  left  guides  will  place  themselves  on  the  line,  and  the  company  will 
align  itself  by  the  right.  Each  of  the  other  captains  will  change  direction 
to  the  left,  conducting  hi?  company  in  sueh  manner,  that  it  shall  regain  its 
parallelism  with,  and  ditance' from,  the  company  which  preceded  it,  at  least 
She  length  of  a  company,  before  arriving  at  the  new  line,  on  which  line 
each  company  will  then  arrive  perpendicularly :  each  captain  will,  on  ar- 
riving, command,  1.  Rsar  into  line;  2.  March:  the  left  guides  will 
quickly  cover  on  the  line  the  guides  of  the  first  company;  and  the  compa- 
nies will  conduct  themselves  as  prescribed  No.  1669,  and  following :  after 
the  word  Front,  by  the  captain,  the  colonel  will  command, 

Guides — posts. 
1393.  On  the  same  principles^  but  by  inverse  means,  tho  line   may  be 


128         LIGHT-INFANTRY    AND    RIFLE.— BATTALION. 

formed  (when  the  battalion  h  retiring  hy  Ihc  right)  on  the  right,  and  faced 
to  the  left  of  rtid  line  of  direction. 

1810.  In  like  manner,  the  new  line  may  be  formed  on  the  same  princi- 
ples, when  retiring  by  the  left  or  centre  cf  companies. 

1811.  Lastly,  if,  retiring  thus,  it  were  necessary  to  form  the  line  on  either 
(lank,  but  faced  outwards,  the  colonel  would  command, 

'  1.   Companies  left  (or  right;)     2.  Battalion,  by  inversion,  into  line; 
3.  March  ; 
When  the  companies  would  form  on  the  above  principles,  by  inversion. 

Different  Methods  of  forming  Open  Column. 

1812.  A  battalion  of  fight-infantry  or  riflemen  (like  infantry  of  the  line) 
will  break  habitually  into  coiumn  of  companies,  though,  should  it  be  deem- 
ed necessary,  the  principles  which  govern  in  the  following  manoeuvres, 
will  be  applied  in  forming  column  of  platoons  or  sections.  In  this  latter 
case,  chiefs  of  divisions  would  conform  to  what  is  prescribed  for  them,  No. 
1698,  and  following. 

To  Break  into  Column. 

1813.  The  battalion  being  aligned,  and  the  colonel  wishing  it  to  break 
into  column  of  companies,  right  in  front,  he  will  command, 

1.  Column  of  companies  to  the  right.     2.  Battalion,  right— face. 
3.  March. 

1S14.  At  the  second  command,  the  whole  will  face  to  the  right;  each 
captain  will  step  one  pace  forward,  face  to  the  left,  and  command,  Into 
line. 

1815.  At  the  command  March,  each  company  will  execute  what  is 
prescribed,  No.  1693 ;  the  captain,  after  giving  the  command,  will  pass 
rapidly  to  the  point  where  the  left  of  his  company  is  to  rest,  quickly  post 
his  second  sergeant  on  his  arrival,  align  his  company,  and  command, 
Front;  he  will  then  place  himself  two  paces  in  front  of  the  centre  of  his 
company. 

lSKJ.  A  column,  left  in  front,  will  be  formed  on  the  same  principles,  and 
by  inverse  means. 


To  File  into  Column. 
1S17.  The  column  will  be  formed  from  fine,  by  filing  from' '-the  right  of 
companies  to'  the  rear,  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed, 
and  fallowing;  except  that  the  captain  will  omit  the  commands,  3.  Front  ; 
4.  jjCft — dress';  the  company  fronting  and   aligning  itself,  at  the  word 
Halt,  from  the  captain.  

By  Filing  in  Front  or  Rear  of  the  Company,  on  either  Flank, 
or  on  any  oilier  Company. 

1818.  To  form  bden  column  of  companies,  right  in  front,  on  any  named 
company,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.   Open  column  of  companies,  right  infeont.  on  (such)  company. 
2.  Battalion,  right  (left,  or  inwards)— ¥  \n:.     S.    M  4.RCH. 

1819.  if  on  first  company,  a<  the  secofld  word,  the  first  company  will 
t,  and  .its  captain  command,  Guide— left }  the  remaining  compa- 
|   face  to  the  rj  ht,  and  the  heads  disengage  to  the  rear ;  captains 

-  ,  i   ,,,  ||  ■  v, :  and  the  movement 

[,  on  the  principles  prescribed,  No.  915, 
tthe  words, 
•  i  ■    :.    i !  ■•  i. :  ■  t'ic  ccptain  ad-;;  •      ■  I,  3 

• 
lJ'l 


LJGHT-INFANTRY   AND    RIFLE.— BATTALION.        129 

1S20  The  coluiun  would  be  formed  on  any  other  company  of  the  battal- 
ion, by  the  above  commands  and  means,  on  the  principles  prescribed,  No. 
839,  and  following.  . 

1821.  A  column,  left  in  front,  may  be  formed  on  similar  principles,  but 
by  inverse  means. 

To  Put  the  Column  in  March;  to  Change  Direction ;  and 
to  Halt  it. 

1822.  The  column  will  be  put  in  march  by  the  means  prescribed,  No. 
932,  and  following;  prefixing,  if  necessary,  double  quick  to  the  command 
march.  It  will  change  direction,  and  be  halted,  by  the  means  prescribed. 
No.  1001,  and  following,  and  No.  1026,  and  following. 


Closing  and   Opening  the   Column,  and   the   Counter- 
march. 

1323.  The  open  column  will  be  closed  as  prescribed,  No.  103S,  and  fol- 
lowing. In  like  manner,  the  close  column  will  be  opened,  by  the  means 
prescribed,  No.  1221,  and  following. 

1824.  The  countermarch  of  open  or  close  column,  will  be  executed  as 
prescribed,  No.  1081,  and  following,  and  No.  1083,  and  following;  except 
that,  in  all  cases,  no  order  to  front  or  dress,  when  faced,  will  be  given ;  the 
men  facing  and  aligning  themselves  at  the  command  Halt. 


Different  Methods  of  forming  Line  from  Column.  • 
To  the  Left. 

1825.  The  column  of  companies  halted,  right  in  front,  the  colonel,  wish- 
ing it  to  form  on  a  line  passing  through  the  left  flank,  will  command, 

1.  Left  into  line.     2.  Column,  left — face.     3.  March. 

1826.  At  the  second  command,  the  whole,  except  the  left  guides,  who 
will  stand  fast,  will  face  to  the  left. 

1827.  Each  captain  will  instantly  proceed  to  the  point  where  the  right 
will  rest,  placing  himself  by  the  left  man  of  the  company  on  his  right,  and 
thence  align  his  company :  the  left  man  of  the  front  rank  of  each  company 
will  stand  fast,  and  the  rear  rank  man  will  cover  him  by  a  side  step  to  the 
right ;  the  remaining  files  will  throw  forward  the  left  shoulder,  move  over 
the  shortest  space  to  the  new  line,  and  dress  by  the  right. 

1828.  The  captain  will  then  command,  Front,  and  the  colonel, 

Guides — posts. 

1829.  A  column,  left  in  front,  would  form  on  a  line  passing  through  the 
right  flank,  by  inverse  commands  and  means. 

1830.  Lastly,  were  it  necessary  to  form  line  to  the  right  flank  from  a 
halted  column,  right  in  front,  it  would  be  done  by  inversion  ;  the  colonel 
commanding, 

1.  By  inversion,  right  into  line.     2.  Column,  right — face.     3.  March. 

1831.  The  companies  will  face  to  the  right,  and,  on  the  command  March, 
Advance  the  right  shoulder,  and,  with  the  guides  and  captains,  form  line  by 
inversion  on  the  above  principles. 

1832.  The  column,  left  in  front,  would  also  form  line  by  inversion,  by 
inverse  commands  and  means. 

On  the  Right  or  Left. 

1833.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  column  on  the  march,  right  in  front,  to 
form  line  on  the  right,  or,  left  in  front,  to  form  line  on  the  left,  will  cause 
ij  to  be  executed  by  the  commands  and  means  prescribed,  No.  1151,  and 
foU  jwing 

Q  *  135 


130         LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND    RIFLE.— BATTALION. 

Faced  to  the  Front  on  any  Company. 

1834.  The  column  right  in  front,  to  form  line  faced  to  the  front,  on  the 
leading  company,  the  colonel  will  command; 

1.  Front  into  line.     2.  Column,  left — face.     S.  March. 

1S35.  At  the  second  word,  the  first  company  sta.ids  fast  ;  the  right  and 
left  guides  of  this  company  place  themselves  in  its  front,, facing  to  the  right, 
opposite  the  exterior  files  ;  the  other  companies  face  to  the  left,  captains 
taking  post  on  the  right  of  their  respective  guides  of  the  left. 

1836-.  At  the  third  word,  all  the  companies,  except  the  first  leading  by 
the  left,  will  move  towards  the  point  on  the  line  where  their  left  is  to  rest, 
and  advancing,  for  at  least  the  length  of  a  company,  perpendicular  to  the 
new  line,  as  prescribed.  No:  1798.  When  arrived  to  within  two  paces  of 
the  line,  the  captain  will  command,  1.  Into  line  ;    2.  March. 

1337.  At  the  second  word,  the  leading  file  will  halt,  the  rear  rank  man 
of  this  file  covering  his  file-leader  by  a  side  step;  the  guide  of  the  left  will 
step  on  the  line,  face  to  the  right,  and  align  himself  on  tha  guides  in  front; 
the  captain  will  spring  to  the  point  w!  sre  the  right  will  rest,  align  his  com- 
pany, and  command," 3.  Front  ;  each  file  will  advance  the  left  shoulder, 
move  up  to  the  line,  and  dress  by  the  right. 

1836.  When  the  line  is  formed,  the  colonel  will  command, 
Guides—  posts. 

1839.  To  form  in  line,  faced  to  the  front, on  the  rear  company,  the  colonel 
will  command, 

1.  Into  line  on  rear  company,  faced  to  the  front. 
2.  Colwnn,  right — face.     3.  March. 

1840.  At  the  second  command,  the  rear  company  stands  fast ;  its  right 
and  left  guides  will  take  post  on  its  front — the  remaining  companies  will 
face  to  the  right,  and  their  captains  and  coverii  I  will  place  them- 
selves as  prescribed  to  lead  by  the  right  flank. 

1841.  At  the  third  word,  the  whole,  except  the  rear  company,  will  step 
off;  each  captain  will  conduct  his  company  towards  the  rear,  and  over  the 
shortest  space,  to  where  its  light  will  rest  in  the  new  line,  and. 

first  file  crosses  .that  line,  command,  1.  Rear,  into' line;   '-■  March. 

1842.  The  captain  will  then  spring  to  the  left  of  his  company,  and  place 
himself  to  align  it. 

1843.  At  the  command  March,  the  company  will  conform  to  what  is 
prescribed,  No.  1(560,  and  following,  for  a  single  company,  and  then  dress 
by  the  left ;  the  first  sergeant  will  quickly  place  himself  on  the  line  of 
guides  facing  to  its  left,  an  1  opposite  one  of  the  three  right  files  of  his  com- 
pany; the  captain,  alter  aligning  his  company  by  the  left,  will  command, 
3.  Front,  and  resume  his  post  on  the  light  of  his  company. 

18J  I.  The  colonel  will  then  order, 

Guides — posts. 

1315.  The  column,  righl  in  front,  i  line  facing  to  the  front 

on  any  central  company.  For  example,  right  in  front,  the  colonel,  wishing 
to  form  line,  thus,  on  the  fourth  company,  v.  ill  com 

1.  Into  line  onfourth  company, 'faced  to  the  front. 
2.   Column,  outward* —  f  ace,     •"!.   March. 

184»>.  (PI.  XXVill.j  At  the  ■•'  company  will 

stand  fast,  and  it  i  right  and  left  guides  m  >vc  quickly  to  the  front;  the  cap- 
tain will  place,  himsetfon  its  right.  The  comp  miea  in  front  of  the  desig- 
nated company  will  face' to  the  right,  and  those  in  rear  to  the  left  .  captions 
and  sergeants  will  post  themsebvos  to  lead  those  of  the  former  by  the  right, 
and  those  of  the  latter  by  the  left,  Hank. 

1847.  At  fiie  command  March,  the  who!- will  step  off  together ;  the 
f.'/nt  companies,  by  tho   right,  inclining  their  head*  to  the  rear,  and,  to 


Plate  XXVIII.  Light- infantry  and  Rifle. — Battalion. 


\ 


LIGHT-INFANTRY    AND    RIFLE.— BATTALION.         131 

gether  with  their  captains,  conforming  to  what  is  prescribed,  No.  1341,  and 
following.  The  captains  in  rear  of  the  designated  company  will  conduct 
their  companies  by  the  left  flank  towards  the  front,  and  conform  to  what  is 
orescribed,  No.  1S36,  and  following. 

1848.  In  this,  as  in  all  other  cases  of  formation  to  the  front  or  Tear,  the 
captains,  both  of  the  front  and  rear  companies,  lead,  so  that  their  companies 
may  be  perpendicular  to  the  new  alignment,  for  at  least  the  length  of  a 
company  before  arriving  on  it. 

1849.  When  the  alignment  is  completed,  the  captain  will  command, 
Front  ;  and  the  colonel,  • 

Guides — posts. 

1850.  A  column,  left  in  front,  would  form  line  faced  to  the  front,  on  the 
first,  the  rear,  or  any  central  company,  on  the  same  principles,  but  by  in- 
verse- means. 

Faced  to  the  Rear  on  any  Company. 

1851 .  The  battalion  in  column,  right  in  front,  to  form  line  faced  to  tho 
rear,  on  the  leading  company,  the  colonel- will  command, 

l^Into  line  on  first  company,  faced  to  the  rear. 
2.  Column,  right — face.     3.  March. 
1352.  At  the  first  cemmand,  the  captain  of  the  first  company  will  rapidly 
countermarch  his  company,  establish  its  two  guides  in  front,  and  post  him- 
self on  its  right. 

1S53.  At  the  second,  the  other  companies  will  face  to  the  right,  and  their 
captains  will  place  themselves  to  lead  their  companie's  by  the  right  flank. 

1854.  At  the  word  March,  each  company  will  be  conducted  by  its  cap- 
tain towards  the  new  line,  (on  which  it  is  .to  arrive  perpendicular ;)  the 
leading  file  will  cross  tha  point  where  the  right  is  to  rest  in  line,  and  the 
captain  will  instantly  command,  1.  Rear  into  line  ;  2.  March  ;  and  place 
himself  on  the  right,  to  align  his  company. 

1855.  At  the  word  March,  from  the  captain,  the  left  guide  will  spring 
vn  the  line,  face  to  the  right  of  the  line,  and  cover  the  guides  in  his  front ; 
each  file  will  advance  the  left  shoulder,  and  conform  to  what  is  prescribed, 
No.  ]<>69,  and  following. 

1856.  Captain?,  after  completing  the  alignment,  will  command,  Front  ; 

1857.  Oil  which  the  colonel  will  command, 

Guides — posts. 
185S.  The  column  right  in  front,  to  form  in  line  on  the  rear  company, 
faced  to  the  rear,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Into  line  on  rear  company,  faced  to  the  rear. 
2.  Column,  left — face.     3.  March: 
1859.  At  the  first  command,  the  rear  company  will  be  rapidly  counter- 
marched by  its  captain,  who  will  promptly  establish  the  right  and  left  guides 
in  its  front,  and  take  bis  post  on  the  leiLof  his  company; 

1SC0.  At  the  second,  the  other  companies  will  face  to  the  left,  and  their 
captains  will  place  themselves  by  the  side  of  their  guides  of  the  left. 

1881.  At  the  word  March,  each  company,  led  by  its  captain  by  the  left 
flank,  will  gradually  change  direction  to  the  rear,  and  approach  the  line  at 
right  angles,  and  at  the  point  where  the  left  will  rest  :  when  arrived  with- 
in one  pace  of  the  line,  captains  will  command,  1.  Into  line  ;  2.  March. 
The  guide  of  the  right  will  run  up  rapidly  to  the  line,  and  face  to  the  left 
of  the  line,  covering  the  guides  in  his  front;  each  file  will  advance  the  left 
shoulder,  move  up  to  the  line,  and  dress  by  the  left;  the  captain,  who  has 
placed  himself  on  the  left,  will  correct  the  alignment  of  each  file,  as  it  ar- 
rives on  the  line,  and  add,  3.  Front. 

'  1362.  When  the  last  captain,  aftor  aligning,  has   given   this   command, 
|    ths  colonel  will  command, 

Guides — posts.  1S9 


132        LIGHT-INFANTEY    AND    RIFLE.— BATTALION. 

1303.  The  column,  right  In  front,  may  form  in  line  on  any  central  com 
pany,  faced  to  the  rear.  To  execute  this  on  the  fourth  company,  the  colonel 
will  command, 

1.  Into  lir.z,  on  fourth  company, faced  to  the  rear. 
2.   Column,  outwards — face.     3.  March. 

1S64.  (PL  XXIX.  Fig.  1.)  At  the  first  command,  the  named  company 
(fourth,  in  this  example)  will  be  rapidly  countermarched  by  its  captain,  who 
will  post  its  right  and  left  guides  in  its  front  ; 

1865.  At  the  second, Ofie  companies  in  front  of  the  designated  company 
will  face  to  the  left,  and  those  in  rear,  to  the  right ;  the  captain  of  each  will 
take  post,  as  prescribed  in  file  movements. 

1S6CJ.  At  the  word  March,  captains  of  the  front  companies  will  lead 
their  companies  by  the  left,  approach  the  line  perpendicularly,  and  form 
upon  it  as  prescribed,  No.  1S36,  and  following;  captains  of  the  rear  com- 
panies will  lead  their  companies  by  the  right  flank  towards,  and  arrive  per 
pendicularlyon,  the  line;  these  captains  and  companies  will  conform  to  what 
is  prescribed,  No.  1354,  and  following. 

1867.  At  the  word  Front,  from  the  captain  last  arrived  on  the  line,  the 
colonel  will  command, 

Guides — posts. 

1868.  A  column,  left  ir.  front,  would  form  line  on  any  company,  faced  to 
the  rear,  By  inverse  means,  and  on  the  same  principles. 


.     Changes  of  Front. 

Forward,  on  the  Right  (or  Left.) 
18b9.  The  battalion  aligned,  to  change  its  front,  forward  on  the  first  com- 
.pany,  the  colonel  will  establish  two  markers,  on  the  new  line  which  the 
battalion  is  to  take,  (at  any  angle  forward;)  the  first  opposite  to  the  first 
file,  and  the  other  opposite  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  the  first  company  ; 
he  will  then  command, 

1.  Change  front ,  forward  on  first  company.    2.  Battalion, right — face. 
3.,  March'. 

1870.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first  company,' stepping  a 
pace  forward,  will  command,  1..  Company,  right — face;  2.  Into  line; 
3.  March. 

1871.  At  the  word  March,  from  the  captain,  the  first  company  will 
form  to  the  front,  8Jd  be  aligned  as  prescribed,  No.  1693,  and  following. 

1872.  At  the  second  command  from  the  colonel,  the  Other  companies  will 
face  to  the  right;  their  captains  will  place  themselves  beside  their  respec- 
tive guides  of  the  right,  (to  lead  by  the  right  flank.)  and  disengage  the  heads 
of  their  companies  to  the  front. 

1873.  At  the  command  March,  each  captain  will  conduct  his  company 
towards,  and  form  on,  tlie  new  line,  as  prescribed,  No.  17!'S.  align  by  the 
right,  (the  left  guides  having  promptly  covered  the  markers  on  the  align- 
ment,) and  command,  Front. 

1874.  On  which  the  colonel  will  command^ 

Guides — rosTs. 

1875.  To  change  front,  forward  on  the  left  company,  would  be  executed 
by  inverse  commands  and  means. 

On  a  central  Company,  cither  Wing  forward. 
1376.  To  effect  this,  left  wing  forward,  and  on  the  fourth  company,  (for 
example,)  al  any  angle,  the  colonel  will  establish  two  markers  on  the  new 
line  which  he  wishes  the  battalion  to  assume;  these  will  be  placed  in  front 
190 


Plate  XXIX. 


IAght-Infanlry  and  Rifle. — Battalion. 


i 

HI 


^>v        W 


;;tfYip 


!:  !( 

I!  !i 

M  il 

!  i  : 

i 


I 


mnm 


ii 


m 


i^'<2~ 


■> If! ; t 

lift; 


iXtftl 


;Mi 


LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE. -BATTALION.        133 

of  the  named  company,  the  first  opposite  its  right  file,  and  the  other  where 

one  of  the  three  left  files  of  that  company  is  to  rest ;  he  will  then  command, 

1.  Change  front  on  fourth  company,  left  wing  forward. 

2.  Battalion,  inward — face.     3.  March. 

1877.  (PI.  XXIX.  Fig.  2.)  At  the  first  command,  the  fourth  company 
will  face  to  the  right,  by  command  of  its  captain,  who  will  step  one  pace 
forward,  and  form  his  company  to  the  front,  on  the  markers,  the  captain  of 
the  third  will  command,  1.  Company,  left — face  ;  at  the  same  time, 
spring  to  the  left  of  his  company,  disengage  its  left  to  the  rear,  and  com- 
mand, 2.  Rear  into  line ;  3.  March;  which  is  executed  as  heretofore 
prescribed :  he  will  then  instantly  place  himself  on  the  right  of  the  fourth 
company,  (whose  captain,  after  aligning  his  own  company,  has  stepped 
back,)  and  align  his  company  on  his  right  gu.'de,  who  shall  have  placed  him- 
self facing  to  the  left ;  and  covering,  on  the  new  line,  the  markers  of  the 
fourth  company. 

1878.  At  the  second  command,  the  remaining  companies  will  face  in 
wards;  the  captains  of  the  second  and  first  companies  will  move  quickly 
to  the  left  of  their  companies,  and  disengage  the  left  to  the  rear,  posting 
themselves  to  lead  by  the  left  flank  ;  the  captains  of  the  left  companies  will 
post  themselves  to  lead  their  companies,  by  the  right  flank,  to  the  front. 

1S79.  At  the  word  March,  the  whole  will  step  off;  the  captains  of  the 
right  leading  to  the  rear,  to  where  the  left  of  their  companies  will  rest,  and 
forming  to  the  rear,  on  the  new  line,  establishing  their  right  guides,  and 
aligning  their  companies  by  the  left ;  the  left  companies  will  be  led  to  the 
front,  to  the  point  at  which  their  right  is  to  rest,  by  command  of  their  cap- 
tains, form  to  the  front  into  line,  and  align  themselves  by  the  right. 

1880.  When  all  the  captains  have  commanded  Front,  the  colonel  will 
order, 

Guides — posis. 

1831.  In  like  manner,  the  change  of  front,  left  wing  forward,  at  any  an- 
gle, may  be  executed  on  any  central  company  of  the  battalion. 

1882.  To  change  front  of  the  battalion,  right  wing  forward,  at  any  an- 
gle, may  be  executed  on  the  same  principles,  but  by  inverse  means. 


To  the  Rear,  on  cither  Flank. 

1883.  To  change  front  to  the  rear  on  first  company,  at  any  angle,  the 
colonel  will  establish  two  markers  in  rear  of  the  first  company ;  the  first, 
in  rear  of  the  right  file,  and  the  other,  on  the  new  alignment,  in  front  of 
where  one  of  the  three  left  files  of  that  company  will  rest  when  thrown 
back;  he  will  then  command, 

1.  Change  front  to  the  rear,  on  first  company. 
2.  Battalion,  right — face.     3.  March. 

1884.  At  the  first  command,  the  captain  of  the  first  company  will  com- 
mand, 1.  Company,  right — face;    2.  Rear,  into  line  ;   3.  March. 

1885.  The  company  will  pass  the  markers,  and  form  line  faced  to  the 
rear,  as  heretofore  prescribed ;  the  captain  aligning  it  from  its  right,  on  the 
markers- 

1886.  At  the  second  command  from  the  colonel,  the  remaining  companies 
will  face  to  the  right,  and  disengage  their  heads  to  the  rear ;  their  captains 
will  promptly  post  themselves  to  lead  by  the  right  flank. 

1887.  At  the  word  March,  from  the  colonel,  the  companies  (except 'he 
first)  will  be  led  to  the  rear  of  the  right  flank,  and  towards  their  places  in 
the  new  line,  which  they  pass,  and  form  about  as  prescribed ;  their  cap- 
tains aligning  from  the  right  on  the  left  guide,  who  will  have  covered  on 
the  line  of  the  markers,  and  faced  to  the  right. 

1888.  When  the  colonel  hears  the  last  captain  order  Front,  he  win 
command, 

Guides — posts. 
R  193 


134         LIGHT-INFANTRY   AND   RIFLE.— BATTALION. 

1889.  The  colonel,  wishing  the  aligned  battalion  to  change  front  to  the 
rear  on  the  left  company,  wHl  cause  the  movement  to  be  executed  by  in- 
verse commands  and  means. 


Column  of  Route. 

1890.  The  general  principles  and  methods  of  increasing  and  decreasing 
front  of  a  column  of  route,  prescribed,  No.  966,  and  following,  for  battal- 
ions of  the  line,  will  govern  in  similar  marches  of  a  battalion  of  light  troops. 

1891.  One  method  of  decreasing  from  company  front,  by  advancing  in 
files  from  the  centre  of  companies,  will,  as  often  as  circumstances  admit,  be 
resorted  to,  in  preference  to  any  other.  The  column  supposed  at  a  halt, 
and  the  colonel  wishing  to  effect  this,  he  will  command, 

1.  Advance  by  centre  of  companies.     2.  Column,  inwards — face. 
3.  March. 

1892.  (PI.  XXX.  Fig.  2.)  At  the  second  command,  the  platoons  of  each 
company  will  face  inwards,  and  their  captains  and  covering  sergeants  will 
post  themselves  to  lead  by  the  centre. 

1893.  At  the  third  command,  each  company  will  conform  to  what  is  pre- 
scribed for  a  single  company,  No.  1674,  and  following. 

1894.  Each  captain  will  carefully  preserve  company  distance  between 
himself  and  the  captain  of  the  preceding  company. 

1895.  If,  on  the  march,  a  further  diminution  of  front  were  rendered  ne- 
cessary, the  colonel  would  command, 

1.  Column.     2.  Single — files. 

1896.  At  this  word,  each  front  rank  man  (now  marching  on  the  exterior 
line)  will  move  by  a  side  step  to  the  right  or  left  inwards,  in  front  of  his 
rear  rank  man;  the  file-closers  will  conform  to  the  movement,  decreasing 
to  the  same  front,  and  the  company  marching  by  the  centre,  thus  occupy- 
ing the  same  front,  as  if  by  a  flank. 

1897.  To  increase  the  front,  the  colonel  will  command, 

1.  Column.     2.  Double — files. 

1898.  Each  front  rank  man  will  step  outward,  join  his  rear  rank  man, 
and  the  companies  will  march  as  before. 

1899.  To  increase  to  company  front,  the  colonel  will  order, 

1.  By  companies,  into  line.     2.  March. 

1900.  Each  company  will  promptly  conform  to  what  is  prescribed,  No. 
1677, 1678,  except  that  the  leading  file  will  not  halt,  but  continue  the  march 
as  before;  and  the  battalion  will  thus  march  in  column  of  companies. 

1901.  If  the  colonel  wish  the  increase  to  be  made  by  companies  in  suc- 
cession, he  will  order  the  first  captain  to  execute  it ;  and  each  succeeding 
company  conforms  to  the  movement  on  the  same  ground ;  each  captain 
giving,  when  he  arrives  at  the  proper  place,  the  commands  prescribed  for 
the  instructer,  No.  1676. 

1902.  It  is  believed  that  this  column  possesses  peculiar  advantages  for 
the  route  march,  whereby  the  danger  and  inconvenience  of  opening  the 
column  is  avoided;  the  interval  of  platoons,  between  (lie  rear  of  one  com- 
pany and  the  front  of  the  succeeding,  enabling  the  nun  to  march  with  all 
requisite  openness  of  files.  To  take  close  order,  and  resume  platoon  inter- 
vals, as  preparatory  to  a  formation  to  the  right,  left,  or  front,  the  colonel 
will  command, 

1.  By  companies,  close  order.     2.  Column — march. 

1903.  At  the  word  march,  the  leading  files  of  companies  will  continue 
the  march;  the  other  files  will  close  up. 

1904  The  column  may  he  rapidly  formed  in  line,  to  either  Bank,  by  the 
commands  and  moans  prescribed,  No.  1679,  and  following;  in  the  c«sc  of 
forming  to  the  right  by  insertion,  the  reverse  platoon  would  form  in  the 
195 


Light- Infantry  and  Rifle. — Battalion. 


2> 


>m 


*^= 


& 


//<■     > 

f//     FIG-.  3\ 

X  nq 


W"''  °f 


%L 


Light-Infantry  and  Rifle. — Battalion. 


PARADE  AND   REVIEW.  133 

interval  between  its  first  platoon,  which  has  halted  and  faced,  and  the  cor- 
responding platoon  of  the  company  in  front. 


To  Extend. 

1905.  The  battalion  extends,  in  open  order,  upon  the  principles  prescrib- 
ed for  the  company. 

1906.  The  necessity  will  rarely  occur  for  extending  a  whole  battalion  ; 
therefore,  one  platoon  of  each  company  may  be  held  in  reserve,  to  sup- 
port, relieve,  and  as  a  rallying  point  for  its  own  particular  line  of  skir- 
mishers. 

1907.  Where  a  battalion,  operating  singly,  throws  out  one  platoon  of  each 
company  en  tirailleur,  the  remaining  platoons  will  move  in  closed  order  to 
the  right  and  left,  to  place  themselves  nearly  opposite  their  respective 
•lines  of  skirmishers. 

1908.  Skirmishers,  thus  thrown  out,  should,  inasmuch  as  the  duty  is 
very  fatiguing,  be  relieved  as  often  as  the  proximity  of  the  enemy  or  other 
circumstances  permit. 

1909.  When  a  company  is  ordered  to  skirmish  in  the  immediate  vicinity 
of  the  column,  it  is  not  material  whether  it  be  furnished  with  supports  and 
reserves ;  but  when  at  a  distance  beyond  prompt  support,  one  half,  in  gen- 
eral, should  be  held  as  supports  and  reserves. 

1910.  Should  a  company  of  light-infantry,  in  extended  order,  and  with- 
out cover,  be  menaced  with  an  attack  from  cavalry,  they  will  be  ordered 
to  close,  form  column  of  sections,  and  retire  with  steadiness  towards  the 
main  body.  If  necessary,  the  column  of  sections  would  close  entirely,  and 
the  two  interior  sections  (subdivided  for  that  purpose)  face  outwards,  on 
the  principles  prescribed,  1551,  and  following. 

To  Close. 

1911.  When  a  battalion,  advancing  or  retiring  in  extended  order,  is  or- 
dered to  close,  the  file  on  which  the  close  is  to  be  made,  will  move  inordi- 
nary time  till  the  files  are  well  closed,  when,  by  order  of  the  commanding 
officer,  the  whole  will  assume  double  quick  time. 

1912.  When  a  line  of  skirmishers,  covering  the  head  of  an  advancing 
column,  meets  with  a  defile  or  bridge,  the  commander  of  the  line  will 
sound  the  close,  the  defile  will  be  passed  in  double  quick  time,  and  the  ex- 
tended order  resumed. 


Fimi!.DH    1MB    EU¥IEW. 

1913.  A  BATTALION  being  in  the  order  of  battle,  the  commander  will 
give  the  caution,  Battalion,  prepare  for  review  ;  when  the  ranks  will  be 
opened  in  the  manner  prescribed,  No.  824,  &c. 

1914.  At  the  word  March,  the  field  and  staff  officers  dismount;  all  the 
company  officers,  and  the  color-rank,  will  advance  four  paces  to  the  front 
of  the  first  rank,  and  place  themselves  opposite  their  respective  positions  in 
the  order  of  battle ;  the  assistant  surgeons,  the  surgeon,  paymaster,  quar- 
termaster and  adjutant,  will  place  themselves  or.  the  right  of  the  rank  of 
company  officers,  in  the  order  in  which  they  are  here  mentioned,  at  inter- 
vals of  a  pace  from  each  other  ;  at  the  same  time,  the  band  (if  there  be  one) 
will  advance  through  the  centre,  and  place  itself  in  one  rank  midway  be- 
tween the  colors  and  the  line ;  the  color-guard  will  replace  the  color-rank, 
and  the  quartermaster-sergeant  and  sergeant-major  will  place  themselves 
on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion. 

1915   The  tie?  i-officers  shall  superintend  the  execution  of  these  move 

195 


PARADE  AND  REVIEW.  135 

interval  between  its  first  platoon,  which  has  halted  and  faced,  and  the  cor- 
responding platoon  of  the  company  in  front. 


To  Extend. 

1905.  The  battalion  extends,  in  open  order,  upon  the  principles  prescrib- 
ed for  the  company. 

1906.  The  necessity  will  rarely  occur  for  extending  a  whole  battalion  ; 
therefore,  one  platoon  of  each  company  may  be  held  in  reserve,  to  sup- 
port, relieve,  and  as  a  rallying  point  for  its  own  particular  line  of  skir- 
mishers. 

1907.  Where  a  battalion,  operating  singly,  throws  out  one  platoon  of  each 
company  en  tirailleur,  the  remaining  platoons  will  move  in  closed  order  to 
the  right  and  left,  to  place  themselves  nearly  opposite  their  respective 
•liaes  of  skirmishers. 

1908.  Skirmishers,  thus  thrown  out,  should,  inasmuch  as  the  duty  is 
very  fatiguing,  be  relieved  as  often  as  the  proximity  of  the  enemy  or  other 
circumstances  permit. 

1909.  When  a  company  is  ordered  to  skirmish  in  the  immediate  vicinity 
of  the  column,  it  is  not  material  whether  it  be  furnished  with  supports  and 
reserves ;  but  when  at  a  distance  beyond  prompt  support,  one  half,  in  gen- 
eral, should  be  held  as  supports  and  reserves. 

1910.  Should  a  company  of  light-infantry,  in  extended  order,  and  with- 
out cover,  be  menaced  with  an  attack  from  cavalry,  they  will  be  ordered 
to  close,  form  column  of  sections,  and  retire  with  steadiness  towards  the 
main  body.  If  necessary,  the  column  of  sections  would  close  entirely,  and 
the  two  interior  sections  (subdivided  for  that  purpose)  face  outwards,  on 
the  principles  prescribed,  1551,  and  following. 

To  Close. 

1911.  When  a  battalion,  advancing  or  retiring  in  extended  order,  is  or- 
dered to  close,  the  file  on  which  the  close  is  to  be  made,  will  move  inordi- 
nary time  till  the  files  are  well  closed,  when,  by  order  of  the  commanding 
officer,  the  whole  will  assume  double  quick  time. 

1912.  When  a  line  of  skirmishers,  covering  the  head  of  an  advancing 
column,  meets  with  a  defile  or  bridge,  the  commander  of  the  line  will 
sound  the  close,  the  defile  will  be  passed  in  double  quick  time,  and  the  ex- 
tended order  resumed. 


F&RJkBU    M.'NH    REVIEW. 

1913.  A  BATTALION  being  in  the  order  of  battle,  the  commander  will 
give  the  caution,  Battalion,  prepare  for  review  ;  when  the  ranks  will  be 
opened  in  the  manner  prescribed,  No.  824,  &c. 

1914.  At  the  word  March,  the  field  and  staff  officers  dismount;  all  the 
company  officers,  and  the  color-rank,  will  advance  four  paces  to  the  front 
of  the  first  rank,  and  place  themselves  opposite  their  respective  positions  in 
the  order  of  battle  ;  the  assistant  surgeons,  the  surgeon,  paymaster,  quar- 
termaster and  adjutant,  will  place  themselves  on  the  right  of  the  rank  of 
company  officers,  in  the  order  in  which  they  are  here  mentioned,  at  inter- 
vals of  a  pace  from  each  other  ;  at  the  same  time,  the  band  (if  there  be  one) 
will  advance  through  the  centre,  and  place  itself  in  one  rank  midway  be- 
tween the  colors  and  the  line ;  the  color-guard  will  replace  the  color-rank, 
and  the  quartermaster-sergeant  and  sergeant-major  will  place  themselves 
on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  battalion. 

1915  The  tie?  i-officers  shall  superintend  the  execution  of  these  move 

195 


186  PARADE  AND   REVIEW. 

merits,  and,  on  giving  the  word  Frost,  the  colonel  will  place  himself  eight 
paces,  the  lieutenant-colonel  and  major  six  paces  each,  in  front  of  the  first 
runic,  opposite  thei-r  respective  place-  in  the  order  of  battle. 

1916.  With  a  view  to  an  increased  front,  when  the  battalion  is  to  be  re- 
viewed singly,  the  division  of  drummers,  with  the  drum-major  on  its  right, 
may  he  formed  on  the  right  of  the  battalion;  next,  the  division  of  pioneers, 
with  the  corporal  on  its  right;  and,  lastly,  the  quartermaster-sergeant  and 
sergeant-major  on  the  right  of  the  whole. 

1917.  In  this  parade  order,  the  battalion  will  await  the  approach  of  the 
personage  who  is  to  review  it,  for  whose  guide  a  camp  color  will  have  been 
placed  80  or  15:)  paces  in  front  of  the  colors,  according  to  the  extent  of  the 
line,  and  the  plain  in  front  of  it. 

1913.  When  the  reviewing  personage  is  midway  between  the  camp  col- 
or and  the  colonel,  the  latter  will  face  about,  and  command,  Battalion,  pre- 
sent— arms  ;  resuming  immediately  his  proper  front,  when  the  whole  will 
salute,  the  last  motion  of  the  sword  to  correspond  with  the  last  motion  of 
the  firelock.  The  drums  or  band  will  beat  or  play,  according  to  the  rai.k 
of  the  reviewing  personage  ;  if  it  be  the  president  or  vice-president  of  the 
United  States,  or  the  governor  of  the  state,  a  march  ;  if  the  secretary  of 
war,  or  a  major-general,  two  ruffles;  if  a  brigadier-general,  one  ruffle. 
The  regimental  color  alone  will  be  dropped  to  a  brigadier-general ;  both 
colors  to  the  secretary  of  war  or  a  major-general ;  and  all  colors  and 
standards  to  the  president  or  vice-president  of  the  United  States,  or  the 
governor  of  the  state. 

191.9.  If  the  reviewing  officer  be  under  the  rank  of  brigadier-general,  no 
compliment  will  be  paid  by  either  the  colors  or  music  ;  neither  will  arms 
be  presented  to  him,  if  he  be  junior  in  rank  to  the  commandant  of  the  pa- 
rade.    In  the  latter  case,  he  will  be  received  with  arms  carried. 

1920.  When  the  reviewing  personage,  who  has  halted  till  the  proper 
compliments  are  paid,  advances,  the  colonel  will  bring  his  sword  to  a  carry, 
face  to  the  fine,  and  order,  Battalion,  shoulder — arms  ;  when  the  whole 
will  remain  perfectly  steady,  except  the  colonel,  who  resumes  his  proper 
front. 

1921.  The  reviewing  personage  now  turns  off  to  the  right  of  the  battal- 
ion, passes  thence,  in  front  of  all  the  officers,  to  the  left;  around  the  left,  and 
behind  the  rank  of  file-closers,  to  the  right  again.  Whilst  he  is  passing 
around  the  battalion,  no  matter  what  his  "rank,  the  drums  or  band  will  play, 
and  when  he  turns  off  to  take  his  sta  :on  near  the  camp  color,  the  music 
will  cease. 

1922.  When  the  music  ceases,  the  colonel  will  face  about,  and  command, 
Battalion,  rear  rank,  close  order — march.  At  the  third  word,  all  per- 
sons, except  the  colonel,  who  are  in  advance  of  their  proper  places,  in  the 
order  of  battle,  will  face  about,  and,  at  the  word  march,  the  whole  battal- 
ion will  return  to  that  order,  the  proper  officers  remounting. 

1923.  If  a  brigade  is  to  be  reviewed  standing,  the  battalions  composing  it 
will,  from  the  order  of  battle,  assume  the  parade  order,  as  above.  The 
brigadier  and  his  staff,  on  foot,  will  place  themselves  as  follows : — (he  first, 
two  paces  in  front  of  the  rank  of  colonels,  opposite  the  centre  of  the  brigade, 
his  aid  on  his  riNl  t,  one  pace  retired:  other  brigade  staff  officers,  if  field 
officers  in  rank,  will  place  themselves  in  the  rank  of  lieutenant-colonels  and 
majors,  behind  (lie  brigadier;  if  below  that  rank,  be  hind  him  in  the  rank 
of  company  officers.  If  there  are  bands  of  music  with  the  brigade,  they 
will  be  united  with  (lie  drums,  and  formed  in  the  interval  between  the 
two  battalions.  If  there  be  more  than  two  battalions,  and  no  interval  in  the 
line  behind  the  brigadier,  the  music  may  be  placed  in  any  other  situation 

oay  designate. 

1924.  A  brigade,  (bus  formed,  will  receive  the  reviewing  personage  in 
the  same  manner  thai  be  would  be  received  by  a  single  battalion,  with  a 
slight  difference  in  the  words  of  command,  and  the  repetition  of  them,  whe  h 
neei'  not  be  here  noticed. 

VJli 


PARADE  AND   REVIEW.  137 

1925.  If  several  brigades  are  to  be  reviewed  together,  or  in  one  line,  this 

forthcr  dilFerence  will  be  observed;  the  reviewing  personage,  joined  by 
the  general  of  the  division,  on  the  right  of  his  division,  will  proceed  down 
the  line,  parallel  te  its  front,  and,  when  near  the  brigadiers  respectively, 
will  be  saluted  by  their  brigades  in  succession.  The  music  of  each,  after 
the  prescribed  salute,  will  play  whilst  the  reviewing  personage  is  in  front 
or  in  rear  of  it,  and  only  then. 

1926.  The  reviewing  personage  having  taken  a  position  near  the  camp 
color,  previously  placed  at  a  proper  distance,  the  colonel,  or  other  com- 
mander of  the  line,  will  cause  it  to  break  into  column  of  companies,  right 
er  left  in  front,  and  command,  Pass  in  review. 

1927.  This  command  having  been  repeated  by  the  colonels,  if  more  than 
one  battalion,  the  band  and  drummers  of  each  will  repair  to  tne  head  of  the 
battalion  column,  six  paces  in  front  of  the  position  of  the  colonel ;  the  di- 
vision of  pk'neers  will  precede  the  drum-major  four  paces  ;  the  quarter- 
master-sergeant will  be  in  a  line  with  the  pioneers  two  paces  from  the  side 
opposite  to  the  guides;  and  the  quartermaster,  paymaster,  surgeon  and  as- 
sistant surgeons,  from  right  to  left,  in  the  order  in  which  they  are  mention- 
ed, in  one  rank,  four  paces  in  rear  of  the  rearmost  company.  The  colonel's 
position  in  the  column  will  be  four  paces  in  front  of  the  chief  of  the  leading 
division  of  his  battalion. 

1923.  The  column  will  then  be  put  in  march  at  the  cadenced  pace,  arms 
supported,  with  the  guides  of  direction  on  the  side  next  to  the  reviewing 
personage. 

1929.  The  column  will  first  pass  in  common  time,  and  afterwards,  if  re- 
quired, in  quick  time ;  in  both  case?  with  closed  ranks ;  but,  in  passing  in 
quick  time,  no  particular  salute  or  compliment  will  be  paid. 

1930.  The  battalions  will  take,  in  marching.,  intervals  between  them  of 
about  forty  paces. 

1931.  When  the  head  of  the  column  arrives  within  fifty  paces  of  the  re- 
viewing parsonage,  the  colonel  of  the  first  battalion  will  cause  it  to  carry 
arms,  when  the  music  will  commence  playing. 

1932.  The  drummers  and  musicians  of  the  first  battalion  having  passed, 
the  drum-major  will  cause  them  to  wheel  out  of  the  column,  and  take  posi- 
tion opposite  to  the  reviewing  personage  ;  the  music  will  continue  to  play 
till  the  last  division  of  the  battalion  has  passed;  it  will  then  cease,  and  fol- 
low with  the  drummers  in  the  rear  of  their  battalion. 

1933.  Passing  in  common  time,  the  colonel  and  all  the  officers  will,  as 
they  successively  arrive  within  six  paces  of  the  reviewing  personage,  sa- 
lute with  the  sword. 

1934.  The  colors,  according  to  the  rank  of  the  reviewing  personage,  (see 
No.  1918,)  will  again  salute  at  the  same  distance.  When  the  colors  salute, 
the  music  will  cease  playing,  in  order  that  the  drums  may  give  the  pre- 
scribed number  of  rolls  or  ruffles ;  after  which,  the  music  will  resume  the 
same  march  or  air. 

1935.  The  music  of  each  succeeding  battalion  will  not  commence  play- 
ing until  the  music  of  the  preceding  one  has  ceased  in  order  to  follow  its 
battalion. 

1936.  Each  succeeding  battalion  will  pass  in  review  in  the  order  pre- 
scribed for  the  leading  one. 

1937.  A  major-general  would  pass  in  review  four  paces  in  front  of  the 
brigadier  and  the  colonel  of  the  leading  battalion,  his  staff  on  the  then  re- 
verse side. 

1933.  A  brigadier-general  will  pass,  side  by  side,  with  the  colonel  of  his 
leading  battalion,  the  brigadier  on  the  side  of  the  reviewing  personage,  and 
the  staff  of  the  brigadier  on  the  opposite  side. 

193.9.  The  lieutenant-colonel  of  each  battalion  will  be  r pposite  to  the 
leading  division  ;  the  major  opposite  to  the  rear  division  ;  the  adjutant  op- 
posite to  the  division  next  to  the  front;  and  the  sergeant-major  opposite  to 
R*  197 


138  PARADE  AND   REVIEW. 

the  division  next  to  the  rear :  each  six  paces  from  the  flank  opposite  to  (he 
reviewing  personage. 

1940.  All  other  officers  and  non-commissioned  officers  will  march  past  in 
the  places  prescribed  for  them  in  the  march  of  an  open  column. 

1941.  The  guides  and  the  soldiers  will  keep  the  head  well  to  the  front 
in  passing  in  review  ;  generals,  field  and  other  officers,  who  salute  with  the 
sword,  will  throw  back  a  little  the  shoulder  next  to  the  reviewing  person- 
age, and  fix  their  eyes  upon  him  in  saluting. 

1942.  The  color-bearers  will  remain  in  the  ranks  whilst  passing  and  sa- 
luting. 

1943.  The  commander  of  the  column,  if  of  more  than  one  battalion,  will 
send  forward  two  aides-de-camp,  or  two  mounted  officers,  who  will  place 
themselves  in  front  of  the  column,  at  the  distance  of  about  one  hundred 
paces  from  each  other  ;  they  will  face  the  directing  guides  of  the  column,  and 
remain  in  position  till  the  whole  shall  have  passed  the  reviewing  personage. 

1944.  If  the  column  be  composed  of  a  considerable  number  of  battalions, 
the  general  who  commands  it  may  put  it  in  march  by  the  route  step  ;  the 
colonels  will  cause  the  ranks  to  be  closed,  the  cadenced  pace  to  be  taken, 
and  arms  to  be  carried  as  their  battalions  shall  respectively  arrive  within 
fifty  paces  of  the  reviewing  personage,  and  they  will  cause  the  route  step 
to  be  resumed  when  their  battalions  shall  respectively  have  passed  the  same 
number  of  paces. 

1945.  If  the  reviewing  officer  be  junior  in  rank  to  the  commander  of  the 
column,  the  ruffles  or  rolls,  the  color  and  the  sword  salutes,  will  be  omitted 
in  the  passing  as  in  the  standing  salute  ;  but  the  troops  would  march  past 
with  arms  carried. 

1946.  When  the  column  has  marched  past,  it  will  return  to  its  original 
ground,  and  be  wheeled  up  into  line.  From  this  position,  such  further  ex 
ercises  and  manoeuvres  will  be  performed  as  may  be  required  by  the  re- 
viewing personage,  verbally,  or  according  to  a  card  which  he  will  previ- 
ously have  handed  to  the  commander  of  the  battalion  or  line. 

}947.  In  performing  the  required  manoeuvres,  the  camp  color,  previous- 
ly placed  in  front  of  the  parade,  shall  be,  as  far  as  practicable,  the  point  on 
and  from  which  they  are  to  be  executed,  although  the  reviewing  person- 
age should,  occasionally,  be  absent  from  that  point. 

194S.  A  number  of  companies  less  than  a  battalion  would  be  reviewed  as 
a  battalion  ;  and  a  single  company  would  be  reviewed,  the  captain,  &c.  in 
the  same  position,  both  in  the  standing  and  passing  salutes,  as  if  the  com- 
pany were  with  the  battalion.  But  the  company  would  pass  in  column  of 
platoons  or  sections,  according  to  the  order  of  the  reviewing  personage. 
198 


END. 


